kia, the c...kia, t t he c c ompany Congratulations! Your selection of a Kia was a wise investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure. Now that you are the owner of a Kia

kia, tthe ccompany

Congratulations! Your selection of a Kia was a wise investment. Itwill give you years of driving pleasure. Now that you are the owner ofa Kia vehicle, you’ll probably be asked a lot of questions about yourvehicle and the company like “What is a Kia?”, “Who is Kia?”, “Whatdoes ‘Kia’ mean?”.Here are some answers. First, Kia is the oldest car company in Korea.It is a company that has thousands of employees focused on buildinghigh-quality vehicles at affordable prices. The first syllable, Ki, in the word “Kia” means “to arise from to theworld” or “to come up out of to the world.” The second syllable, a,means “Asia.” So, the word Kia, means “to arise from” or “to comeup out of Asia to the world.”

Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!

i

Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.When you require service, remember that your dealer knowsyour vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained technicians,recommended special tools, genuine Kia replacement parts andis dedicated to your complete satisfaction.Because subsequent owners require this important informationas well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it issold.This manual will familiarize you with operational, mainte-nance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is sup-plemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manualthat provides important information on all warranties regardingyour vehicle.We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow therecommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operationof your new vehicle.Kia offers a great variety of options, components and featuresfor its various models.Therefore, the equipment described in this manual, along withthe various illustrations, may not all be applicable to your par-ticular vehicle.

The information and specifications provided in this manualwere accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right todiscontinue or change specifications or design at any timewithout notice and without incurring any obligation. If youhave questions, always check with your Kia Dealer.We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoringpleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.

© 2005 Kia Motors Corp.All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic ormechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by anyinformation storage and retrieval system or translation inwhole or part is not permitted without written authorizationfrom Kia Motors Corporation.Printed in Korea

Foreword

ii

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Introduction

Your vehicle at a glance

Features of your vehicle

Driving your vehicle

What to do in an emergency

Maintenance

Specifications

Index

table of contents

1How to use this manual / 1-2Fuel requirements / 1-2Vehicle break-in process / 1-3

Introduction

Introduction

21

We want to help you get the greatestpossible driving pleasure from your vehi-cle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist youin many ways. We strongly recommendthat you read the entire manual. In orderto minimize the chance of death or injury,you must read the WARNING and CAU-TION sections spread throughout themanual.Illustrations complement the words in thismanual to best explain how to enjoy yourvehicle. By reading your manual, youlearn about features, important safetyinformation, and driving tips under vari-ous road conditions.The general layout of the manual is pro-vided in the Table of Contents. A goodplace to start is the index; it has an alpha-betical listing of all information in yourmanual.Sections: This manual has seven sec-tions plus an index. Each section beginswith a brief list of contents so you can tellat a glance if that section has the infor-mation you want.

You’ll find various WARNING’s,CAUTION’s, and NOTICE’s in this manu-al. These were prepared to enhance yourpersonal safety.You should carefully readand follow ALL procedures and recom-mendations provided in theseWARNING’s, CAUTION’s and NOTICE’s.

✽✽ NOTICEA NOTICE indicates interesting or help-ful information is being provided.

Your new Kia vehicle is designed to useonly unleaded fuel with a minimumOctane Rating of 87 Anti-Knock Index(AKI).For improved vehicle performance, pre-mium unleaded fuel with an octane ratingof AKI 91 or higher is recommended.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNING A WARNING indicates a situation inwhich harm, serious bodily injury ordeath could result if the warning isignored.

CAUTIONA CAUTION indicates a situation inwhich damage to your vehicle couldresult if the caution is ignored.

CAUTIONNEVER USE LEADED FUEL. Theuse of leaded fuel is detrimental tothe catalytic converter and willdamage the engine control sys-tem’s oxygen sensor and affectemission control.Never add any fuel system cleaningagents to the fuel tank other thanwhat Kia has specified. (Consult anAuthorized Kia Dealer for details.)

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

1 3

Introduction

Gasoline containing alcohol andmethanolGasohol, a mixture of gasoline andethanol (also known as grain alcohol),and gasoline or gasohol containingmethanol (also known as wood alcohol)are being marketed along with or insteadof leaded or unleaded gasoline.Do not use gasohol containing more than10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline orgasohol containing any methanol. Eitherof these fuels may cause drivability prob-lems and damage to the fuel system.Discontinue using gasohol of any kind ifdrivability problems occur.

Vehicle damage or driveability problemsmay not be covered by the manufactur-er’s warranty if they result from the useof:1. Gasohol containing more than 10%

ethanol.2. Gasoline or gasohol containing

methanol.3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

No special break-in period is needed. Byfollowing a few simple precautions for thefirst 1,000 km (600 miles) you may add tothe performance, economy and life ofyour vehicle.• Do not race the engine.• Do not maintain a single speed for long

periods of time, either fast or slow.Varying engine speed is needed toproperly break-in the engine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emergen-cies, to allow the brakes to seat prop-erly.

• Avoid full-throttle starts.

CAUTIONNever use gasohol which containsmethanol. Discontinue use of anygasohol product which impairs dri-vability.

VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS

2Interior overview / 2-2Instrument panel overview / 2-3



22

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

OVQ026001N

1. Door lock/unlock button ....................3-13

2. Driver position memory system*.......3-56

3. Seat adjust knob*..............................3-40

4. Outside rearview mirror control switch .............................................3-103

5. Power rear quarter window switches*...........................................3-26

6. Power window switches ....................3-26

7. Central door lock switch....................3-13

8. Power window lock switch.................3-28

9. Fuel filler lid release button...............3-30

10. Instrument panel illumination........3-110

11. Room light main control switch.....3-123

12. Power adjustable pedal control switch*.............................................3-57

13. Steering wheel tilt .........................3-101

14. Parking brake release lever ............4-16

15. Fuse box .........................................6-21

16. Hood release lever .........................3-29

17. Parking brake pedal ........................4-16

18. Brake pedal.....................................4-14

19. Accelerator pedal..............................4-7

20. Seat.................................................3-37

* : if equipped

2 3


INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

1. Driver’s airbag ................................3-872. Light control / Turn signals ...........3-1273. Instrument cluster.........................3-1074. Wiper/Washer...............................3-1305. Auto cruise control* ........................4-116. Audio controls* .............................3-1797. Steering wheel .............................3-1008. Ignition switch...................................4-39. Digital clock ..................................3-17810. Climate control system* .............3-13611. Hazard warning flasher switch ...3-13512. Seat warmer* ...............................3-4413. Shift lever .......................................4-514. Cigar lighter* ..............................3-17315. Power outlet................................3-17716. Ashtray* ......................................3-17317. Passenger’s airbag.......................3-8818. Storage compartment.................3-16919. Vent controls...............................3-14020. Glove box ...................................3-17121. Sunglass holder .........................3-17222. Sunvisor .....................................3-17623. Power sliding door and power

tailgate controls*...........................3-1724. Sunroof* .......................................3-3325. Conversation mirror....................3-10626. Trip computer* ............................3-11127. Day/night rearview mirror ...........3-105* : if equipped

OVQ026002N

3

Keys / 3-3Remote keyless entry / 3-4Theft-alarm system / 3-7Immobilizer system / 3-9Door locks / 3-11Power sliding door and power tailgate / 3-17

Window / 3-26Hood / 3-29Fuel filler lid / 3-30Sunroof / 3-33Seat / 3-37Driver position memory system / 3-56Power adjustable pedals / 3-57Safety belts / 3-58Child restraint system / 3-70Air bags-advanced restraint system / 3-77Steering wheel / 3-100Mirrors / 3-102Instrument cluster / 3-107Gauges / 3-108Trip computer / 3-111


Warnings and indicators / 3-117Interior lights / 3-123

Lighting / 3-127Wipers and washers / 3-130

Horn / 3-133Defroster / 3-134

Hazard warning flasher / 3-135Manual climate control system / 3-136

Automatic climate control system / 3-147Windshield defrosting and defogging / 3-160

Luggage net holder / 3-163Roof rack / 3-164

Homelink® wireless control system / 3-165 Storage compartment / 3-169

Interior features / 3-173Antenna / 3-179

Audio remote control / 3-179Audio system / 3-180

Rear seat entertainment system / 3-210

Features of your vehicle3

3 3


The key code number is stamped on theplate attached to the key set. Should youlose your keys, this number will enablean authorized Kia Dealer to duplicate thekeys easily. Remove the plate and store itin a safe place. Also, record the codenumber and keep it in a safe and handyplace, but not in the vehicle.

Key operationsMaster keyUsed to start the engine, lock and unlockthe doors, lock and unlock the glove boxand center console storage (if equipped).

KEYS

WARNING - Ignition keyLeaving children unattended in avehicle with the ignition key is dan-gerous even if the key is not in theignition. Children copy adults andthey could place the key in the igni-tion. The ignition key would enablechildren to operate power windowsor other controls, or even make thevehicle move, which could result inserious bodily injury or even death.Never leave the keys in your vehiclewith unsupervised children.

1VQA2001

WARNINGUse only Kia original parts for theignition key in your vehicle. If anaftermarket key is used, the ignitionswitch may not return to ON afterSTART. If this happens, the starterwill continue to operate causingdamage to the starter motor andpossible fire due to excessive cur-rent in the wiring.


43

(1) Lock ( )All doors are locked if the lock buttonis pressed.If all doors and engine hood areclosed, the hazard warning lightsblink once to indicate that all doorsare locked. However, if any door orengine hood remains open, the haz-ard warning lights are not operated.After this, if all door and engine hoodare closed, the hazard warning lightsblink.

(2) Unlock ( ) Driver's door is unlocked if the unlockbutton is pressed once.The hazard warning lights will blinktwice to indicate that the driver's dooris unlocked.All doors are unlocked if the unlockbutton is pressed twice within 3 sec-onds.The hazard warning lights will blinktwice again to indicate that all doorsare unlocked.After depressing this button, thedoors will be locked automaticallyunless you open any door within 30seconds.

(3) Power tailgate opening or closing( , if equipped)The tailgate is opened or closedautomatically if the button is pressed.The hazard warning lights will blinkand the chime will sound 3 times toindicate that the tailgate will swingupward or downward.

(4) Left power sliding door opening orclosing ( , if equipped)The left sliding door is opened orclosed automatically if the button ispressed.

(5) Right power sliding door opening orclosing ( , if equipped)The right sliding door is opened orclosed automatically if the button ispressed.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)

1VQA2002B

1VQA2002A

1VQA2002

Type B

Type A

Type C

3 5


✽✽ NOTICEThe power sliding door and power tail-gate are not opened by pressing the cor-responding button on the transmitterdirectly when all power sliding doorsand power tailgate are locked andclosed. To open the power sliding dooror power tailgate from outside vehicle,press the unlock button first and presscorresponding power sliding door orpower tailgate opening button.

(6) Alarm ( )The horn sounds and hazard warninglights flash for about 27 seconds ifthis button is pressed. To stop thehorn and lights, press any button onthe transmitter.

✽✽ NOTICEThe transmitter will not work if any offollowing occur:• The ignition key is in ignition switch.• You exceed the operating distance

limit (about 30 m [90 feet]).• The battery in the transmitter is

weak.• Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal.• The weather is extremely cold.• The transmitter is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station oran airport which can interfere withnormal operation of the transmitter.

When the transmitter does not workcorrectly, open and close the door withthe ignition key. If you have a problemwith the transmitter, contact an autho-rized Kia Dealer.

Operational distance may vary depend-ing upon the area the transmitter is usedin. For example, if the vehicle is parkednear police stations, government andpublic offices, broadcasting stations, mil-itary installations, airports, or transmit-ting towers, etc.

CAUTIONThe power doors can be operatedwhen the engine is not running.However, the power doors consumelarge amounts of vehicle electricpower. To prevent the battery frombeing discharged, do not operatethem consecutively (more thanapproximately 10 times).

CAUTIONKeep the transmitter away fromwater or any liquid. If the keylessentry system is inoperative due toexposure to water or liquids, it willnot be covered by your manufactur-er vehicle warranty.


63

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210. Operationis subject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interfer-

ence, and 2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that maycause undesired operation of thedevice.

Battery replacementTransmitter uses a 3 volt lithium batterywhich will normally last for several years.When replacement is necessary, use thefollowing procedure.1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen-

tly pry open the transmitter centercover (1).

2. Replace the battery with new one.When replacing the battery, make surethe battery positive “+” symbol facesup as indicated in the illustration.

3. Install the battery in the reverse orderof removal.

For replacement transmitters, see anAuthorized Kia Dealer for reprogram-ming.

CAUTIONThe keyless entry system transmit-ter is designed to give you years oftrouble-free use, however it canmalfunction if exposed to moistureor static electricity. If you areunsure how to use your transmitteror replace the battery, contact anauthorized Kia dealer.

CAUTION• Using the wrong battery can

cause the transmitter to malfunc-tion. Be sure to use the correctbattery.

• To avoid damaging the transmit-ter, don't drop it, get it wet, orexpose it to heat or sunlight.

WARNINGChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance couldvoid the user's authority to operatethe equipment.

1VQA2003

3 7


This system is designed to provide pro-tection from unauthorized entry into thecar. This system is operated in threestages: the first is the "Armed" stage, thesecond is the "Theft-alarm" stage, andthe third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-gered, the system provides an audiblealarm with blinking of the hazard warninglights.

Armed stagePark the car and stop the engine. Armthe system as described below.1. Remove the ignition key from the igni-

tion switch.2. Make sure that all doors, the engine

hood and tailgate are closed andlatched.

3. Lock the doors using the transmitter ofthe keyless entry system.

After completion of the steps above, thehazard warning lights will blink once toindicate that the system is armed.

If any door, tailgate or engine hoodremains open, the hazard warning lightswon’t operate and theft-alarm will notarm. After this, if all doors, tailgate andengine hood are closed, the hazardwarning lights blink once.The system can be armed by locking thedoors with the key from the front doors ortailgate. However, the hazard warninglights are not operated.

• If any door, tailgate or engine hoodremains open, the system will notbe armed. If this happens, re-armthe system as described previous.

• Do not arm the system until all pas-sengers have left the vehicle. If thesystem is armed while a passen-ger(s) remains in the vehicle, thealarm may be activated when theremaining passenger(s) leave thevehicle. If any door, tailgate orengine hood is opened within 30seconds after entering the armedstage, the system is disarmed toprevent unnecessary alarm.

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Armedstage

Theft-alarmstage

Disarmedstage


83

Theft-alarm stageThe alarm will be activated if any of thefollowing occurs while the system isarmed.• A front or rear door is opened without

using the ignition key or transmitter.• The tailgate is opened without using

the ignition key or transmitter.• The engine hood is opened.The siren will sound and the hazardwarning lights will blink continuously for27 seconds, and repeat the alarm 3times unless the system is disarmed. Toturn off the system, unlock the doors withthe ignition key or transmitter.

✽✽ NOTICEAvoid trying to start the engine whilethe alarm is activated. The vehicle start-ing motor is disabled during the theft-alarm stage.

Disarmed stageThe system will be disarmed when thedoors are unlocked by depressing theunlock button on the transmitter orunlocked with the ignition key.After depressing unlock button, the haz-ard warning lights will blink twice to indi-cate that the system is disarmed.After depressing unlock button, if anydoor is not opened within 30 seconds,the system will be rearmed.If the system is not disarmed with theignition key or transmitter, insert the keyin the ignition switch, turn the key to theON position and wait for 30 seconds.Then the system will be disarmed.

3 9


Your vehicle is equipped with an elec-tronic engine immobilizer system toreduce the risk of unauthorized vehicleuse.Your immobilizer system is comprised ofa small transponder in the ignition key,and antenna coil in the key cylinder andImmobilizer Control Unit (or SmartraUnit).With this system, whenever you insertyour ignition key into the ignition switchand turn it to ON, the antenna coil in theignition switch receives a signal from thetransponder in the ignition key and thensends the signal to the ECU (EngineControl Unit).The ECU checks the signal whether theignition key is valid.If the key is determined to be valid, theengine will start.If the key is determined to be invalid, theengine will not start.

To deactivate the immobilizersystem:Insert the ignition key into the key cylin-der and turn it to the ON position.

To activate the immobilizer sys-tem:Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.The immobilizer system activates auto-matically. Without a valid ignition key foryour vehicle, the engine will not start.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen starting the engine, do not use thekey with other immobilizer keys around.Otherwise the engine may not start ormay stop soon after it starts. Keep eachkey separately not to have any malfunc-tion after you receive your new vehicle.

✽✽ NOTICEIf you need additional keys or lose yourkeys, consult your authorized Kia dealer.

Limp home (override) procedureWhen you turn the ignition key to the ONposition, if the IMMO indicator goes offafter blinking 5 times, your transponderequipped in the ignition key is out of order.You cannot start the engine without thelime home procedure. To start the engine,you have to input your password by usingthe ignition switch.The following procedure is how to inputyour password of “2345” as an example.1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.

The IMMO indicator ( ) will blink 5times and go off indicating the begin-ning of the limp home procedure.

2. Turn the ignition key to the ACC posi-tion.

3. To enter the first digit (in this example“2”), turn the ignition key to the ON andACC position twice. Perform the sameprocedure for the next digits between 3seconds and 10 seconds (for example,for “3”, turn the ignition ON and ACC 3times).

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)


103

4. If all of the digits have been input suc-cessfully, you have to start the enginewithin 30 seconds. If you attempt tostart the engine after 30 seconds, theengine will not start and you will haveto input your password again.

After performing the limp home proce-dure, you have to see an authorized Kiadealer immediately to inspect and repairyour ignition key or immobilizer system.




CAUTIONThe transponder in your ignitionkey is an important part of theimmobilizer system. It is designedto give years of trouble-free service,however you should avoid expo-sure to moisture, static electricityand rough handling. Immobilizersystem malfunction could occur.

CAUTIONDo not change, alter or adjust theimmobilizer system because itcould cause the immobilizer sys-tem to malfunction and should onlybe serviced by an authorized Kiadealer.Malfunctions caused by improperalterations, adjustments or modifi-cations to the immobilizer systemare not covered by your vehiclemanufacturer warranty.

WARNINGChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance couldvoid the user's authority to operatethe equipment.

3 11


Operating door locks from out-side the vehicle • Turn the key toward rear of vehicle to

unlock and toward front of vehicle tolock.

• Turn the key toward front of vehicle tolock all doors.

• Turn the key to the right once to unlockthe driver’s door and to the right twicewithin 3 seconds to unlock all doors.

• Turn the key to the left once to unlockthe passenger’s door and to the lefttwice within 3 seconds to unlock alldoors.

• Doors can also be locked andunlocked with the transmitter key (ifequipped).

• Once the doors are unlocked, it may beopened by pulling the door handle.

• When closing the door, push the doorby hand. Make sure that doors areclosed securely.

✽✽ NOTICEIn cold and wet climates door lock anddoor mechanisms may not work proper-ly due to freezing conditions.

• Once the doors are unlocked, it may beopened by pulling the door handle andsliding the door towards the rear of thevehicle.

• When the door is fully open, the doorwill lock into an open position. To closethe door, pull out the door handle andsliding the door towards the front ofvehicle.

• If the window on the rear sliding door isopen (more than 80 mm/3 in.), the rearsliding door will not open fully but willopen to the 3/4 position.

DOOR LOCKS

1VQA2004

LockUnlock

Front doors

1VQA2005

Rear sliding doors


123

To lock a door without the key, push theinside door lock button (1) or door lockswitch (2) to the “Lock” position and closethe door (3).

✽✽ NOTICEIf the door is locked/unlocked multipletimes in rapid succession with either thevehicle key or door lock switch, the sys-tem may stop operating temporarily inorder to protect the circuit and preventdamage to system components.

WARNINGWhen the rear sliding door is notfully open, it is not latched and maymove unintentionally. This couldresult in a serious injury.

OVQ036001N

1VQA2327

Front door

Rear door

CAUTIONThe left sliding door cannot beopened when the fuel filler lid isopen. However, if the fuel filler lid isopened after the door is openedslightly, the left sliding door can beslide rearward. Close the left slidingdoor to prevent possible damage tothe door or the fuel filler lid.

WARNINGAlways remove the ignition key,engage the parking brake, close allwindows and lock all doors whenleaving your vehicle unattended.

3 13


Operating door locks from insidethe vehicleWith the door lock button• To unlock a door, pull the door lock but-

ton (1) to the “Unlock” position. If thedoor is unlocked, the red part (2) of thebutton becomes visible.

• To lock a door, push the door lock but-ton (1) to the “Lock” position. If the dooris locked, red part (2) of the buttonbecomes invisible.

• To open a door, pull the door handle(3).

• If the inner door handle of the frontdoor is pulled when the door lock but-ton is in lock position, the button isunlocked and door opens. (if equipped)

• Front doors cannot be locked if theignition key is in the ignition switch anddoor is open.

With central door lock switchThe central door locking switch is locatedon the front door arm rest. It is operatedby depressing the door lock switch. If anydoor is open when the switch isdepressed, the door will remain lockedwhen closed.

1VQA2007

1VQA2008

Front door

Rear door

Lock Unlock

Lock Unlock

WARNING - Door lock mal-function

If a power door lock ever fails tofunction while you are in the vehi-cle, try one or more of the followingtechniques to exit:• Operate the door unlock feature

repeatedly (both electronic andmanual) while simultaneouslypulling on the door handle.

• Operate the other door locks andhandles, front and rear.

• Lower a front window and use thekey to unlock the door from out-side.

OVQ026011N

Driver’s door


143

• When pushing down on the front por-tion (1) of the switch, all vehicle doorswill lock.

• When pushing down on the rear por-tion (2) of the switch, all vehicle doorswill unlock.

• However, if the key is in the ignitionswitch and any front door is open, thedoors will not lock when the front por-tion of central door lock switch ispressed.

1VQA2012

Passenger’s door

WARNING - Unlockedvehicles

Leaving your vehicle unlocked caninvite theft or possible harm to youor others from someone hiding inyour vehicle while you are gone.Always remove the ignition key,engage the parking brake, close allwindows and lock all doors whenleaving your vehicle unattended.

WARNING - Unattendedchildren

An enclosed vehicle can becomeextremely hot, causing death orsevere injury to unattended chil-dren or animals who cannot escapethe vehicle. Furthermore, childrenmight operate features of the vehi-cle that could injure them, or theycould encounter other harm, possi-bly from someone gaining entry tothe vehicle. Never leave children oranimals unattended in your vehicle.

WARNING - Doors• The doors should always be fully

closed and locked while the vehi-cle is in motion to prevent acci-dental opening of the door.Locked doors will also discour-age potential intruders when thevehicle stops or slows.

• Be careful when opening doorsand watch for vehicles, motorcy-cles, bicycles or pedestriansapproaching the vehicle in thepath of the door. Opening a doorwhen something is approachingcan cause damage or injury.

3 15


Child-protector rear door lockThe child safety lock is provided to helpprevent children from accidentally open-ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle.The rear door safety locks should beused whenever children are in the vehi-cle.1. Open the rear door.2. Push the child safety lock located on

the front edge of the door to the “Lock”position. When the child safety lock isin the “Lock ( )” position, rear doorwill not open when the inner door han-dle is pulled inside the vehicle or thesub control button of the power slidingdoor is pressed.

3. Close the rear door.To open the rear door, pull the outsidedoor handle or push the main control but-ton of the power sliding door.Even though the doors may be unlocked,the rear door will not open by pulling theinner door handle or pushing the subcontrol button until rear door child safetylock is unlocked ( ).

TailgateOpening the tailgate• Tailgate is locked or unlocked with a

key.• If you lock the tailgate with a key, all

doors will lock automatically.• If you unlock the tailgate with a key, the

the tailgate will unlock only.• To open the tailgate, insert the key into

the lock, turn it to the unlock positionand pull up the tailgate by pressing thehandle.You can also lock/unlock the latch (butnot release it) with the central door locksystem.

• If unlocked, the tailgate can be openedby pressing the handle and pulling itup.

WARNING - Rear doorlocks

If children accidentally open therear doors while the vehicle is inmotion, they could fall out and beseverely injured or killed.To preventchildren from opening the reardoors from the inside, the rear doorsafety locks should be used when-ever children are in the vehicle.

1VQA2013

Lock Unlock

1VQA2009


163

Closing the tailgateTo close the tailgate, lower and pushdown the tailgate firmly. Make sure thatthe tailgate is securely latched.

✽✽ NOTICEIn cold and wet climates door lock anddoor mechanisms may not work proper-ly due to freezing conditions.

1VQA2010

WARNING - TailgateThe tailgate swings upward. Makesure no objects or people are nearthe rear of the vehicle when open-ing the tailgate.

CAUTIONMake certain that you close the tail-gate before driving your vehicle.Possible damage may occur to thetailgate lift cylinders and attachinghardware if the tailgate is notclosed prior to driving.

WARNING - Exhaustfumes

If you drive with the tailgate open,you will draw dangerous exhaustfumes into your vehicle which cancause serious injury or death tovehicle occupants.If you must drive with the tailgateopen, keep the air vents and all win-dows open so that additional out-side air comes into the vehicle.

WARNING - Rear cargoarea

Occupants should never ride in therear cargo area where no restraintsare available. To avoid injury in theevent of an accident or suddenstops, occupants should always beproperly restrained.

3 17


(1) Left power sliding door main controlbutton

(2) Right power sliding door main controlbutton

(3) Power tailgate main control button*(4) Power ON/OFF button(5) Left power sliding door sub control

button(6) Right power sliding door sub control

button(7) Power tailgate sub control button*

*: if equipped

The power sliding doors and power tail-gate can be opened and closed automat-ically with the transmitter key, the maincontrol buttons on the overhead consoleor the sub control buttons on the centerpillar trim.When the power ON/OFF button (PWR)is OFF (not depressed), the power slid-ing door and power tailgate can beopened and closed manually by pullingthe door handles from inside or outsidevehicle.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the power sliding door or power tail-gate is open approximately 6 hours, theECU will enter Sleep mode to conservebattery power and the door or tailgatemight not close automatically. Close thedoor or tailgate manually and thenoperate the door or tailgate with thepower operating system.

✽✽ NOTICEIn cold and wet climates, power slidingdoors and tailgate may not work prop-erly due to freezing conditions.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen the sliding doors are opened man-ually (power OFF), more effort will berequired to open and close than on non-power sliding doors.

POWER SLIDING DOOR AND POWER TAILGATE (IF EQUIPPED)

1VQA2014

OVQ036002N

1VQA2016

On the center pillar trim

On the tailgate

On the overhead console

WARNINGNever leave children or animalsunattended in your vehicle.Children or animals might operatethe power sliding door or powertailgate that could result in injury tothemselves or others or damage tothe vehicle.


183

✽✽ NOTICE• The power sliding door and power

tailgate can be operated when theengine is not running. However thepower operation consumes largeamounts of vehicle electric power. Toprevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not operate them exces-sively e.g.: more than approximately10 times repeatedly.

• To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the power slid-ing door and power tailgate at openposition for a long lime.

• Do not apply excessive force whileoperating the power sliding door orpower tailgate. This could cause dam-age to the power sliding door or powertailgate.

• Do not modify or repair any part ofthe power sliding door or power tail-gate by yourself. This must be done byan authorized Kia dealer.

• When jacking up the vehicle tochange a tire or repair the vehicle, donot operate the power sliding door orpower tailgate. This could cause thepower sliding door or power tailgateto operate improperly.

Automatic stop and reversalIf the power opening or closing is blockedby an object or part of the body, thepower sliding door and power tailgate willdetect the resistance, then the chime willsound 3 times, and stop movement ormove to the full open position to allow theobject to be cleared.However, if the resistance is weak suchas an object that is thin or soft, or thedoor is near latched position, the auto-matic stop and reversal may not detectthe resistance and closing operation willcontinue. Also, if the power sliding dooror power tailgate is forced by strongimpact, the automatic stop and reversalmay operate.If the automatic stop and reversal featureoperates continuously more than twiceduring one opening or closing operation,the power sliding door or power tailgatemay stop at that position. At this time,close the doors manually and operatethe door automatically again.

1VQA2346

1VQA2347

3 19


How to reset the power sliding doorand power tailgateIf the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, the related fuse has beenreplaced or disconnected, and the powersliding door or power tailgate doesn'twork properly, the power sliding door andpower tailgate must be reset as follows:1. Put the shift lever in the P (Park) for

automatic transaxle.2. Close the sliding door's windows and

fuel filler lid.

3. Pull the SHUNT connector on the dri-ver's side fuse panel and reinstall itafter 1 minute.

4. Close the sliding door or tailgate man-ually.

5. Open the sliding door or tailgate com-pletely using the transmitter or maincontrol button on the overhead con-sole.

6. Close the sliding door or tailgate com-pletely using the transmitter or maincontrol button on the overhead con-sole.

For the left/right power sliding doors andpower tailgate, follow above steps toreset.If the power sliding door or power tailgatedoesn't work properly after above proce-dure, have the system checked by anauthorized Kia dealer.

WARNING• Never intentionally place any

object or part of your body in thepath of the power sliding door orpower tailgate to make sure theautomatic stop operates.

• Make sure rear passengers areseated and there are no people orobjects around the door beforeoperating the power sliding door.

• Make sure all faces, arms, hands,body parts and any other obstruc-tions are safely out of the waybefore operating the power slid-ing doors or power tailgate.

• Never place any object or part ofyour body in the path of thepower sliding door or power tail-gate. This could result in seriousinjury or cause damage to thevehicle.

• Make sure there are no people orobjects around the door beforeoperating the power sliding dooror power tailgate. Have rear pas-sengers or cargo get in or out ofthe vehicle after the door is openfully and stopped.

1VQA4005

On the driver’s side fuse panel


203

Power ON/OFF button• When the power ON/OFF button

(PWR) is ON (depressed), the powersliding door and power tailgate can becontrolled with the sub control buttonson the center pillar trim or tailgate.Also, the doors can be opened andclosed automatically by pulling theinside or outside door handles.

• When the power ON/OFF button(PWR) is OFF (not depressed), thepower sliding door and power tailgatecan not be controlled with the sub con-trol buttons or door handles. However,the doors can be controlled with thetransmitter or the main control buttonson the overhead console even thoughthe power ON/OFF button (PWR) isOFF (not depressed).Also, the doors can be opened andclosed manually by pulling the inside oroutside door handles.

✽✽ NOTICEClose the sliding door and tailgate, andkeep the power ON/OFF button (PWR)in the OFF (not depressed) positionbefore washing the vehicle in an auto-matic car wash.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen the sliding doors are opened man-ually (power OFF), more effort will berequired to open and close than on non-power sliding doors.

1VQA2017

WARNING• Keep the power ON/OFF button

(PWR) in the OFF (not depressed)position when not in use.

• Do not allow children to play withthe power sliding door or powertailgate. Keep the power ON/OFFbutton (PWR) in the OFF (notdepressed) position when not inuse. Serious injury or death canresult from unintentional poweroperation by child.

3 21


Power sliding door operation• Push the corresponding main control

button on the overhead console toopen or close the power sliding door.However, the power sliding door willnot open with the transmitter or themain control button when all powersliding doors and power taligate arelocked and closed.

• When the power ON/OFF button(PWR) is ON (depressed), do as fol-lows to open or close the power slidingdoors:- Push the corresponding sub control

button on the center pillar trim.- Pull the door handle from inside or

outside vehicle.- If the sub control button is pushed

while the door is locked or child safe-ty lock is engaged, the chime soundsonce, and the power sliding door willnot open.

- If the door handle is pulled frominside or outside while the door islocked or child safety lock isengaged, the power sliding door willnot open. However, the power slidingdoor can be opened by pulling theoutside door handle while the door isunlocked and child safety lock isengaged.

• When the power ON/OFF button(PWR) is OFF (not depressed), thepower sliding door can not be con-trolled with the sub control buttons ordoor handles, and if the sub controlbutton is pushed, chime sounds once.However, the doors can be openedand closed manually by pulling thedoor handles from inside or outsidevehicle.

1VQA2018


OVQ036003N

On the center pillar trim


223

OVQ036004

WARNINGIf your vehicle is facing downwardon a steep grade (15 percent ormore), the door may not stay openand could slam shut, possibly injur-ing someone. To make sure thedoor does not slam shut, turn onthe power sliding door feature.Then if the door closes, it will closeunder the control of the power doorsystem.

WARNINGIf children accidentally open thepower sliding doors while the vehi-cle is in motion, they could fall outand be severely injured or killed. Toprevent children from opening thepower sliding doors from theinside, the child safety locks shouldbe used whenever children are inthe vehicle.

WARNINGWhen the rear passenger operatesthe power sliding door, make surethere are no people or objectsaround the door, and have all occu-pants get in or out of the vehicleafter the door is open fully andstopped.

WARNING• Let the rear passengers get in or

out of the vehicle after the door isopen fully. Sudden closing couldcause a serious injury.

• Close the door by pulling thedoor handle after the door is openfully. Do not pull the door handlewhile rear passengers are gettingin or out. The door could sudden-ly close by itself and cause a seri-ous injury.

• Sudden starting or acceleratingthe vehicle while the door is clos-ing could cause it to open result-ing in a serious injury or damageto cargo.

3 23


• If the window on the power sliding dooris open (more than 80 mm/3 in.), thepower sliding door will not power openfully but will open to the 3/4 positionand the chime will sound 3 times. Toclose the door, use the transmitter ormain control button with the powerON/OFF button in OFF position (notdepressed), or sub control button ordoor handle with the power ON/OFFbutton in ON position (depressed).

• The left power sliding door cannot beopened while the fuel filler lid is openfully. If the main or sub control button ispushed, the chime sounds once. Also,if the fuel filler lid open button ispushed while the left power slidingdoor is opening, the chime soundsonce.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the fuel filler lid is opened when theleft sliding door is not closed completely,the door may be opened. Close the leftsliding door before refueling to preventpossible damage to the door or the fuelfiller lid.

• If the power sliding door is not closedand latched completely after powerclosing operation, the chime sounds 3times. Open and close the door again.

• If the power sliding door is operatedwhile the door is in partially openedposition (less than 300 mm/12 in.), thedoor is automatically opened fully.

• If the power sliding door is operatedwhile the door is in half-opened posi-tion (more than 300 mm/12 in.), thedoor is automatically closed complete-ly.

• If the power sliding door is operatedagain while the door is closing, thedoor is automatically opened fully.

• If the power sliding door is operatedagain while the door is opening, thedoor is automatically closed complete-ly. However, If the power sliding door isoperated again when the door is in par-tially opened position (less than 300mm/12 in.), the door is opened contin-uously.

• The half-opened power sliding door isautomatically opened or closed fully bypushing the door forward or backwardwithout pulling the door handle whilethe power ON/OFF button is in ON(depressed). However, when the dooris in partially opened position (lessthan 300 mm/12 in.), the door is notclosed automatically.

WARNINGDo not leave the power sliding doorin a partially opened position. Closethe window and then open the doorfully. A partially opened door is heldand then released after 10 minutes.The chime sounds 3 times to indi-cate the door is released. If thevehicle is stopped on a downwardslope, it may move and cause aninjury.


243

Power sliding door non-opening condi-tionsThe power sliding door is not automati-cally opened, but closed under the fol-lowing conditions. If the main or sub con-trol button is pushed for power openingoperation, the chime sounds once.When the ignition switch is in the ONposition,1.Vehicle is moving above 5 km/h (3 mph).2. The gearshift lever is not in P (Park) for

automatic transaxle.

Power tailgate operation (if equipped)• Push the power tailgate main control

button on the overhead console toopen or close the power tailgate.However, the power tailgate will notopen with the transmitter or the maincontrol button when all power slidingdoors and power tailgate are lockedand closed.

• When the power tailgate is operatedwith the main or sub control button ortransmitter, the chime sounds and haz-ard warning lights flash 3 times.

• When the power ON/OFF button(PWR) is ON (depressed), do as fol-lows to open or close the power tail-gate:- Pushing the sub control button on the

bottom of the tailgate will close thepower tailgate automatically.

- Pressing and pulling up the tailgatehandle slightly will open the powertailgate automatically when the tail-gate is unlocked.

1VQA2019


1VQA2016A

On the tailgate

WARNINGDo not open the sliding doors whilethe vehicle is in motion. Passengersor cargo may be ejected from thevehicle, possibly resulting in prop-erty damage, severe injury, ordeath.

3 25


• When the power ON/OFF button(PWR) is OFF (not depressed), thepower tailgate can not be controlledwith the sub control buttons or tailgatehandle, and if the sub control button ispushed, the chime sounds once.However, the tailgate may be openedmanually by pulling the exterior handleand lifting the tailgate upward. The tail-gate may be manually closed by push-ing the tailgate downward.

• If the power tailgate is not closed andlatched completely after power closingoperation, the chime sounds 3 times.

• If the power tailgate is operated whilethe tailgate is in partially opened posi-tion (less than 20 degrees), the tailgateis automatically opened fully.If the power tailgate is operated whilethe tailgate is in half-opened position(more than 20 degrees), the tailgate isautomatically closed completely.

• If the power tailgate is operated againwhile the tailgate is closing, the tailgateis automatically opened fully.

• If the power tailgate is operated againwhile the tailgate is opening, the tail-gate is automatically closed complete-ly. However, if the power tailgate buttonis pressed again when the tailgate isopen less than 20 degrees, the tailgatewill continue to open.

Power tailgate non-opening condi-tionsThe power tailgate will not open auto-matically, but will close under the follow-ing conditions. If the main or sub controlbutton is pushed for power opening oper-ation, the chime sounds once.When the ignition switch is in the ONposition,1.Vehicle is moving above 5 km/h (3 mph).2. The gearshift lever is not in P (Park) for

automatic transaxle.

WARNINGEven though the power ON/OFFbutton (PWR) is in the OFF (notdepressed) position, the tailgatewill still be propelled upward bymechanical force if the tailgate ismanually opened more than 20degrees beyond the fully closedposition. In addition, if the tailgateis manually closed to the secondarylatch position, the tailgate will beelectrically moved to the fullylatched position. Make sure thatface, arms, hands, and otherobstructions are safely out of theway before operating the tailgate.

WARNINGMake sure there are no people orobjects around the tailgate beforeoperating the power tailgate. Waituntil the tailgate is open fully andstopped before loading or unload-ing cargo or passengers from thevehicle.

WARNINGMake sure the tailgate is closedfirmly before driving. If the tailgateis open, you will draw dangerousexhaust fumes into your vehiclewhich can cause serious injury ordeath to vehicle occupants.


263

Power windows (1) Driver’s door power window switch(2) Front passenger’s door power win-

dow switch(3) Rear door (left) power window switch(4) Rear door (right) power window

switch(5) Power rear quarter window (left)

switch*(6) Power rear quarter window (right)

switch*(7) Power window lock switch(8) Window opening and closing(9) Automatic power window down

(Driver’s window)

*: if equipped

✽✽ NOTICEIn cold and wet climates power windowsmay not work properly due to freezingconditions.

WINDOWS

OVQ036005N

3 27


The ignition switch must be in the ONposition for power windows to operate.Each door has a power window switchthat controls that door’s window.However, the driver has a power windowlock switch which can block the operationof passenger windows.The power windows can be operated forapproximately 30 seconds after the igni-tion key is removed or turned to the ACCor LOCK position. However, if the frontdoors are opened, the power windowscannot be operated even within the 30seconds after the ignition key removal.While driving, if you notice buffeting andpulsation (wind shock) with either sidewindow open, you should open the oppo-site window slightly to reduce the condi-tion.

Window opening and closingThe driver’s door has a master powerwindow switch that controls all the win-dows in the vehicle.• To open or close a window, press down

(8) or pull up (8) the front portion of thecorresponding switch.

• To open or close a rear quarter win-dow, push (8) the correspondingswitch.

(Continued)• Never try to operate the main

switch on the driver's door andthe individual door windowswitch in opposing directions atthe same time. If this is done, thewindow will stop and cannot beopened or closed.

WARNING - Windows• Always double check to make

sure all arms, hands, head andother obstructions are safely outof the way before closing a win-dow.

• Do not allow children to play withthe power windows. Keep the dri-ver’s door power window lockswitch in the LOCK position(depressed). Serious injury canresult from unintentional windowoperation by the child.

• Do not extend face or arms out-side through the window openingwhile driving.

CAUTION• To prevent the power window

system from the possibility ofdamage, do not open or close twowindows at the same time. Thiswill also ensure the longevity ofthe fuse.

(Continued)


283

Automatic power window down (driver’s window)Depressing the power window switchmomentarily to the second detent posi-tion (9) completely lowers the driver’swindow even when the switch isreleased. To stop the window at thedesired position while the window is inoperation, pull up the switch momentarilyto the opposite direction of the windowmovement.If the power window is not operated cor-rectly, the automatic power window sys-tem must be reset as follows:1. Turn the ignition key to ON position.2. Close driver’s window and continue

pulling up on driver’s power windowswitch for at least 1 second after thewindow is completely closed.

Power window lock switch • The driver can disable the power win-

dow switches on a passenger door orrear quarter trim by depressing thepower window lock switch located onthe driver’s door to LOCK (pressed).

• When the power window lock switchis ON, the driver’s master controlcannot operate the passenger doorpower windows or rear quarter win-dows either.

Manual flip - open (rear quarterwindows, if equipped)To open the quarter windows, pull therear portion of the latch out. Swing thelatch forward and out, then lock it into theopen position by pushing outward untilyou hear a click. To close the windows,pull the handle inward. Then push thehandle rearward until you hear a click.

✽✽ NOTICEIn cold and wet climates rear quarterpanel windows may not work properlydue to freezing conditions.

1VQA2024OVQ026023N

3 29


Opening the hood 1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the

hood. The hood should pop openslightly.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise thehood slightly, pull the secondary latch(1) inside of the hood center and lift (2)the hood.

3. Raise the hood. It will raise completelyby itself after it has been raised abouthalfway.

Closing the hood1. Before closing the hood, check the fol-

lowing:• All filler caps in engine compartment

must be correctly installed.• Gloves, rags or any other com-

bustible material must be removedfrom the engine compartment.

2. Lower the hood halfway and pushdown to securely lock in place.

HOOD

WARNING - Hood• Before closing the hood, ensure

that all obstructions are removedfrom the hood opening. Closingthe hood with an obstruction pre-sent in the hood opening mayresult in property damage orsevere personal injury.

• Do not leave gloves, rags or anyother combustible material in theengine compartment. Doing somay cause a heat-induced fire.

1VQA2028 1VQA2029 WARNING Make sure the hood is properlylocked before driving.


303

1. Stop the engine.2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the

release button located on the driver’slower door.

3. Pull the fuel filler lid out to open.4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel tank

cap counterclockwise.5. Refuel as needed.6. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until

it “clicks”. This indicates that the cap issecurely tightened.

7. Close the fuel filler lid and push it light-ly and make sure that it is securelyclosed.

FUEL FILLER LID

OVQ036006N 1VQA2026

WARNING To avoid injury from sharp edges, itis recommended that protectivegloves be worn if there is a need toopen the fuel filler door manually.

WARNING - RefuelingIf pressurized fuel sprays out, it cancover your clothes or skin and thussubject you to the risk of fire andburns. Always remove the fuel capcarefully and slowly. If the cap isventing fuel or if you hear a hissingsound, wait until the conditionstops before completely removingthe cap.

3 31


WARNING - Refueling dan-gers

Automotive fuels are flammablematerials. When refueling, pleasenote the following guidelines care-fully. Failure to follow these guide-lines may result in severe personalinjury, severe burns or death by fireor explosion.• Before refueling note the location

of the Emergency Gasoline Shut-Off, if available, at the gas stationfacility.

• Before touching the fuel nozzle,you should eliminate potentiallydangerous static electricity dis-charge by touching another metalpart of the vehicle, a safe distanceaway from the fuel filler neck, noz-zle, or other gas source.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not get back into a vehicle

once you have begun refuelingsince you can generate staticelectricity by touching, rubbing orsliding against any item or fabric(polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)capable of producing static elec-tricity. Static electricity dischargecan ignite fuel vapors resulting inrapid burning. If you must re-enter the vehicle, you shouldonce again eliminate potentiallydangerous static electricity dis-charge by touching a metal partof the vehicle, away from the fuelfiller neck, nozzle or other gaso-line source.

• When using a portable fuel con-tainer be sure to place the con-tainer on the ground prior to refu-eling. Static electricity dischargefrom the container can ignite fuelvapors causing a fire. Once refu-eling has begun, contact with thevehicle should be maintaineduntil the filling is complete.

(Continued)

(Continued)Use only portable plastic fuelcontainers designed to carry andstore gasoline.

• Do not use cellular phones whilerefueling. Electric current and/orelectronic interference from cellu-lar phones can potentially ignitefuel vapors causing a fire.

• When refueling, always shut theengine off. Sparks produced byelectrical components related tothe engine can ignite fuel vaporscausing a fire. Once refueling iscomplete, check to make sure thefiller cap and filler door aresecurely closed, before startingthe engine.

• DO NOT use matches or a lighterand DO NOT SMOKE or leave a litcigarette in your vehicle while at agas station especially duringrefueling. Automotive fuel is high-ly flammable and can, when ignit-ed, result in fire.

(Continued)


323

When fuel filler lid does not openwith the release buttonIf the fuel filler lid does not open usingthe remote fuel filler lid release, you canopen it manually. Unsnap and remove thepanel in the cargo area. Pull the handleoutward.

(Continued)• If a fire breaks out during refuel-

ing, leave the vicinity of the vehi-cle, and immediately contact themanager of the gas station andthen contact the local fire depart-ment or 911. Follow any safetyinstructions they provide.

CAUTION• Make sure to refuel with unleaded

fuel only.• Check to make sure the fuel filler

cap is securely closed after refu-eling. A loose fuel filler cap maycause the "Check Engine"(Malfunction Indicator) light in theinstrument panel to illuminateunnecessarily.

• If the fuel filler cap requiresreplacement, use only a genuineKia cap or the equivalent speci-fied for your vehicle. An incorrectfuel filler cap can result in a seri-ous malfunction of the fuel sys-tem or emission control system.

• Do not spill fuel on the exteriorsurfaces of the vehicle. Any typeof fuel spilled on painted surfacesmay damage the paint.

• If the fuel filler lid will not open incold weather because the areaaround it is frozen, push or lightlytap the lid.

OVQ036007N

3 33


(1) Slide button(2) Tilt button(3) Close buttonIf your vehicle is equipped with this fea-ture, you can slide or tilt your sunroofwith the sunroof control buttons locatedon the overhead console.

✽✽ NOTICEIn cold and wet climates sunroof maynot work properly due to freezing con-ditions.

The sunroof can only be opened, closed,or tilted when the ignition switch is in theON position.The sunroof can be operated for approx-imately 30 seconds after the ignition keyis removed or turned to the ACC orLOCK position. However, if the front dooris opened, the sunroof cannot be operat-ed even within the 30 seconds after theignition key is removed or turned to theACC or LOCK position.

✽✽ NOTICEThe sunroof cannot slide when it is inthe tilt position nor can it be tilted whilein an open or slide position.

Sliding the sunroof

SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

1VQA2031

1VQA2032

CAUTIONDo not continue to press the sun-roof control button(s) after the sun-roof is in the fully open, closed, ortilt position(s). Damage to the motoror system components could occur.

1VQA2030


343

OpenAutoslideTo use the autoslide feature, momentari-ly (less than 0.4 second) press the slidebutton on the overhead console.The sunroof will slide all the way open. Tostop the sunroof sliding at any point,press any sunroof control button.

Manual slidePress the slide button on the overheadconsole and hold it until the sunroof isopened to the desired position.

CloseTo close the sunroof, press the close but-ton on the overhead console and hold ituntil the sunroof is closed.

Tilting the sunroof

OpenAutotiltTo use the autotilt feature, momentarily(less than 0.4 second) press the tilt but-ton on the overhead console. The sun-roof will tilt all the way open. To stop thesunroof tilting at any point, press anysunroof control button.

Manual tilt Press the tilt button on the overhead con-sole and hold it until the sunroof isopened to the desired position.

CloseTo close the sunroof, press the close but-ton on the overhead console and hold ituntil the sunroof is closed.

1VQA2034

1VQA2035

3 35


Sunshade The sunshade will be opened with theglass panel automatically when the glasspanel is slid.You will have to close it man-ually if you want it closed.

In case of an emergency If the sunroof does not open electrically:1. Open the conversation mirror cover.

1VQA2039

WARNING - Sunroof• Do not extend face, neck, arms or

body outside through the sunroofopening while driving.

• Make sure hand and face aresafely out of the way before clos-ing a sunroof.

1VQA2036

CAUTION• Do not press any sunroof control

button longer than necessary.Damage to the motor or systemcomponents could occur.

• Periodically remove any dirt thatmay accumulate on the guide rail.

• If you try to open the sunroofwhen the temperature is belowfreezing or when the sunroof iscovered with snow or ice, theglass or the motor could be dam-aged.

• The sunroof is made to slidetogether with sunshade. Do notleave the sunshade closed whilethe sunroof is open.


363

2. Remove the two (2) screws, and thenremove the overhead console.

3. Insert the emergency handle (providedwith the vehicle) and turn the handleclockwise to open or counterclockwiseto close.

Resetting the sunroofWhenever the vehicle battery is discon-nected or discharged, or you use theemergency handle to operate the sun-roof, you have to reset your sunroof sys-tem as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to the ON posi-tion.

2. According to the position of the sun-roof, do as follows.1) in case that the sunroof has closed

completely or been tilted :Press the tilt button until the sun-roof has tilted upward completely.

2) in case that the sunroof has slide-opened:Press and hold the close button(for more than 5 seconds) until thesunroof has closed completely.Press the tilt button until the sun-roof has tilted upward completely.

3. Release the tilt button.

4. Press and hold the tilt button (formore than 10 seconds) until the sun-roof has returned to the original posi-tion of tilt after it is raised a little high-er than the maximum tilt position.Then, release the button.

5. Press and hold the tilt button (formore than 5 seconds) until the sun-roof is operated as follows;

TILT DOWN → SLIDE OPEN →SLIDE CLOSE

Then, release the button.

When this is complete, the sunroof sys-tem is reset.

1VQA2037

1VQA2038

3 37


Front seat(1) Forward and backward(2) Seatback angle(3) Seat cushion height(4) Seat warmer*(5) Headrest(6) Armrest(7) Lumbar support

Rear seats(8) Forward and backward (9) Seatback angle(10) Headrest(11) Armrest(12) Stowing

* if equipped

SEAT

OVQ036201N


383

(Continued)• Always drive and ride with your

seatback upright and the lap por-tion of the safety belt snug andlow across the hips. This is thebest position to protect you incase of an accident.

• In order to avoid unnecessaryand perhaps severe airbaginjuries, always sit as far back aspossible from the steering wheelso that your chest is at least 250mm (10 inches) away from thesteering wheel.

WARNING - Loose objectsLoose objects in the driver’s footarea could interfere with the opera-tion of the foot pedals, possiblycausing an accident. Do not placeanything under the front seats.

WARNING - Driver’s seat• Never attempt to adjust seat while

the vehicle is moving. This couldresult in loss of control, and anaccident causing death, seriousinjury, or property damage.

• Do not allow anything to interferewith the normal position of theseatback. Storing items against aseatback or in any other wayinterfering with proper locking ofa seatback could result in seriousor fatal injury in a sudden stop orcollision.

(Continued)

WARNING - Uprightingseat

When you return the seatback to itsupright position, hold the seatbackand return it slowly and be surethere are no other occupantsaround the seat. If the seatback isreturned without being held andcontrolled, the back of the seatcould spring forward resulting inaccidental injury to a person struckby the seatback.

3 39


Front seat adjustment - manualForward and backwardTo move the seat forward or backward:1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever

under the front edge of the seat cush-ion up and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position youdesire.

3. Release the lever and make sure theseat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, and makesure the seat is locked securely by tryingto move forward and backward withoutusing the lever. If the seat moves, it is notlocked properly.

Seatback angleTo recline the seatback:1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on the

seatback recline lever located on theoutside of the seat, at the rear.

2. Carefully lean back on the seat andadjust the seatback of the seat to theposition you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure theseatback is locked in place. (The leverMUST return to its original position forthe seatback to lock.)

1VQA2041 1VQA2043

WARNING - Driver respon-sibility for front seat pas-senger

Riding in a vehicle with a front seat-back reclined could lead to seriousor fatal injury in an accident. If afront seat is reclined during an acci-dent, the occupant’s hips may slideunder the lap portion of the safetybelt applying great force to theunprotected abdomen. Serious orfatal internal injuries could result.The driver must advise the frontpassenger to keep the seatback inan upright position whenever thevehicle is in motion.


403

Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat)To change the height of the seat cushion,push the lever up or down located on theoutside of the seat cushion.• To lower the seat cushion, push down

the lever several times.• To raise the seat cushion, pull up the

lever several times.

Front seat adjustment - powerThe front seat can be adjusted by usingthe control knob on the front door. Beforedriving, adjust the seat to the properposition so as to easily control the steer-ing wheel, pedals and switches on theinstrument panel.

1VQA2328

WARNINGThe power seats are operable withthe ignition OFF.Therefore, children should never beleft unattended in the car.

CAUTION• Power seats are driven by an

electric motor. Stop operatingonce the adjustment is complet-ed. Excessive operation maydamage the electrical equipment.

• When in operation, the powerseats consume large amounts ofelectrical power.To prevent unnec-essary charging system drain,don’t adjust the power seatslonger than necessary while theengine is not running.

• Do not operate two or more powerseat control buttons at the sametime. Doing so may result inpower seat motor or electricalcomponent malfunction.

OVQ036008N

3 41


Forward and backward Push the control knob forward or back-ward to move the seat to the desiredposition. Release the knob once the seatreaches to the desired position.

Seatback anglePush the control knob forward or back-ward to move the seatback to the desiredangle. Release the knob once the seatreaches to the desired position.

1VQA2045 1VQA2047

WARNING - Driver respon-sibility for front seat pas-senger

Riding in a vehicle with a front seat-back reclined could lead to seriousor fatal injury in an accident. If afront seat is reclined during an acci-dent, the occupant’s hips may slideunder the lap portion of the safetybelt applying great force to theunprotected abdomen. Serious orfatal internal injuries could result.The driver must advise the frontpassenger to keep the seatback inan upright position whenever thevehicle is in motion.


423

Seat cushion heightPush the front portion (1) of the controlknob up to raise or down to lower thefront part of the seat cushion. Push therear portion (2) of the control knob up toraise or down to lower the rear part of theseat cushion. Release the knob once theseat reaches to the desired position.

Headrest (front)The headrest not only provides comfortfor the driver and passengers, but alsohelps to protect the head and neck in theevent of a collision.For best protection, adjust the headrestso its center is as high as your ears. Alsoadjust the headrest so its distance fromthe head is as wide as your fist.

Active headrest (if equipped)The active headrest is designed to moveforward and upward during a rear impact.This helps to prevent the driver's andfront passenger’s head from movingbackward and thus helps prevent neckinjuries.

1VQA2046 1VQH3900N

3 43


Forward and backward adjustment (if equipped)The headrest may be adjusted forward tothree different positions by pulling theheadrest forward. To adjust the headrestbackward, pull it fully forward to the far-thest position and release it. Adjust theheadrest so that it properly supports thehead and neck.

Adjusting the height up and downTo raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (1). To lower the head-rest, push and hold the release button (2)on the headrest support and lower theheadrest to the desired position (3).

RemovalTo remove the headrest, raise it as far asit can go then press the release button (1)while pulling upward (2).

WARNING - Headrest posi-tioning

To reduce the risk of head and neckinjuries, each occupant headrestmust be properly adjusted. Do notdrive the vehicle with the headrestremoved or improperly positioned.Do not adjust the driver's headrestwhile driving, or else loss of controland an accident is possible.

1VQA20511VQA20501VQA2049


443

ArmrestThe front seats have the armrest locatedon the side of seatback.

Type ATo use the armrest, swing down the arm-rest to the lowest position.

Type BTo use the armrest, swing down the arm-rest to the lowest position then pull it upto the desired position.

Seatback pocketA seatback pocket is provided on theback of the front passenger and driversseatbacks.

Seat warmer (if equipped)The front seats can be electrically heatedindividually when the ignition switch isON. When the switch is ON, a numberranging from 1 to 5 is displayed on theswitch (5 = warmest setting).To turn off the seat warmer, set theswitch to 0.The seat warmer turns off automaticallywhen the seat temperature reaches theselected range and will turn on again ifthe temperature drops below the select-ed range.

1VQA2052

WARNING - Seatbackpockets

Do not put heavy or sharp objectsin the seatback pockets. In an acci-dent they could come loose fromthe pocket and injure vehicle occu-pants.

1VQA2053

❈ The location of the seat warmer switch maybe changed depending on your model.

OVQ036010N

3 45


Lumbar support (driver’s seat only)You can adjust the lumbar support bymoving the lever on the outside of the dri-ver’s seatback. Pivoting the lever increas-es or decreases the lumbar support.

WARNING - Seat heaterburns

Passengers should use extremecaution when using seat warmersdue to the possibility of excessheating or burns. In particular, thedriver must exercise extreme carefor the following types of passen-gers:1. Infants, children, elderly or hand-

icapped persons, or hospital out-patients

2. Persons with sensitive skin orthose that burn easily

3. Fatigued individuals4. Intoxicated individuals5. Individuals taking medication

that can cause drowsiness orsleepiness (sleeping pills, coldtablets, etc.)

CAUTION• When cleaning the seats, do not

use an organic solvent such asthinner, benzene, alcohol andgasoline. Doing so may damagethe surface of the heater or seats.

• To prevent overheating the seatwarmer, do not place blankets,cushions or seat covers on theseats while the seat warmer is inoperation.

• Do not place heavy or sharpobjects on seats equipped withseat warmers. Damage to the seatwarming components couldoccur.

1VQA2042


463

Rear seat adjustmentAdjusting the seat forward and back-ward (2nd row)To move the seat forward or backward:1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever

under the front edge of the seat cush-ion up and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position youdesire.

3. Release the lever and make sure theseat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, and makesure the seat is locked securely by tryingto move forward and backward withoutusing the lever. If the seat moves, it is notlocked properly.

Seatback angleTo recline the seatback:1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on the

seatback recline lever located on theoutside of the seat, at the rear.

2. Carefully lean back on the seat andadjust the seatback of the seat to theposition you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure theseatback is locked in place. (The leverMUST return to its original position forthe seatback to lock.)

OVQ036203N

OVQ036204N

OVQ036205N

2nd row seat

3rd row seat

3 47


ArmrestThe 2nd row seats have the armrestlocated on the side of seatback.To use the armrest, swing down the arm-rest to the lowest position.

Headrest (rear)The headrest not only provides comfortfor the driver and passengers, but alsohelps to protect the head and neck in theevent of a collision. For best protection,adjust the headrest so its center is ashigh as your ears.

Adjusting the height up and downTo raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (1). To lower the head-rest, push and hold the release button (2)on the headrest support and lower theheadrest to the desired position (3).

RemovalTo remove the headrest, raise it as far asit can go then press the release button(1) while pulling upward (2).

1VQA2057OVQ036206N 1VQA2058

WARNINGTo reduce the risk of head and neckinjuries, do not drive the vehiclewith the headrest removed orimproperly positioned.


483

Full flat seatWhen the vehicle is parked, you canplace the front seat in a reclined position,nearly flat.1. Move the rear seat to the farthest rear-

ward position.2. Move the front seat to the farthest for-

ward position.3. Remove the headrest.4. Recline the seatback as far as it can

go to allow the rear seat passenger tosupport their legs in the reclined posi-tion.

Folding the rear seatbackThe rear seatbacks fold forward to pro-vide additional cargo space and to pro-vide access to the cargo area.

To fold the rear seat:2nd row seat1. Lower the headrest to the lowest posi-

tion.

WARNING - Full flat seatNever allow a passenger to use thefull flat seat feature while the vehi-cle is in motion because severeinjury or death could occur in anaccident.

WARNING - Uprightingseat

When you return the seatback to itsupright position, hold the seatbackand return it slowly. If the seatbackis returned without holding it, theback of the seat could spring for-ward resulting in accidental injuryfrom being struck by the seatback.

1VQA2329 OVQ036211N

2nd row seat

3 49


2. Pull the seatback recliner and double-fold the seat forward.

3. Push down the seat backward firmly tolock the catches into the rear anchorsuntil an audible "click" is heard.

4. Make sure the green mark on the rearseat cushion frame is visible and thecatches are locked in position by mov-ing the seat forward and backward orlifting the front portion of the seat. If thegreen mark is invisible and the seatmoves, it is not locked properly.

3rd row seat1. Lower the headrest to the lowest posi-

tion.2. Hold the seatback and pull up the

seatback recline lever.3. Fold the seatback forward and down

firmly until it clicks into place.

To unfold the rear seat:1. Pull up the seatback recline lever.2. Lift and push the seatback backward

firmly until it clicks into place.Make sure the seatback is locked inplace.

3. Return the rear safety belt to the prop-er position.

OVQ036208N

3rd row seat

OVQ036209N OVQ036210N


503

Double-folding the rear seat (2nd row)To fold the rear seat:1. Lower the headrest to the lowest posi-

tion.2. Move the seat to rear-most position.3. Double-fold the rear seat forward by

pull up the seatback recline lever.

4. Pull the folding strap out of the pocketlocated under the seat cushion.

5. Lift the entire folded seat forward andtie the folded seat to the assist handleusing the strap.

To unfold the rear seat1. Untie the strap from the assist handle.2. Insert the strap into the pocket.3. Push down the seat backward firmly to

lock the catches into the rear anchorsuntil an audible “click” is heard.

OVQ036211N OVQ036212N OVQ036213N

3 51



5. Push the seatbacks to an upright andlocked position.

Removing the rear seat (2nd row)To remove a rear seat:1. Double-fold the rear seat by pull up the

seatback recline lever.

2. Pull up the catch release lever underthe front of the seat cushion whilereclining the folded seat rearwardslightly to release the front catchesfrom the anchors.

3. Remove the entire seat from the floor.

OVQ036211N

OVQ036214N

OVQ036215N

OVQ036210N


523

To install the rear seat:1. Put the front anchor strikers along the

front anchors on the floor.2. Insert two front anchor strikers into the

front anchors.

3. Lift the rear portion of the seat cushionthen push down firmly to lock thecatches into the rear anchors until anaudible “click” is heard.



OVQ036216N OVQ036217N OVQ036210N

3 53


Stowing the rear seat (3rd row)The rear seat can be folded and stowedin the luggage compartment to provideadditional cargo space.To stow the rear seat:1. Lower the headrest to the lowest posi-

tion.

2. Fold the seatback by pulling out thefolding strap.

3. Stow the seat by pulling out the stow-ing strap and pushing down firmly.

WARNING• Make sure there is no body or

object around the seat and becareful not to injure your hands orbody under the seat or in the mov-ing parts when stowing or rein-stalling the seat.

• Do not sit on the seat stowed withthe seatback upright in the lug-gage compartment. Sitting on theunstable and unlocked seat couldcause serious injuries in an acci-dent.

OVQ036218N OVQ036219N OVQ036220N


543

To use the rear seat:1. Lift the seat by pulling out the stowing

strap and release the strap.

2. Push the seat forward firmly until itclicks into place to insert the catchesinto the anchors.

3. Make sure the catches are locked inposition by moving the seat forwardand backward or lifting the front por-tion of the seat. If the seat moves, it isnot locked properly.


OVQ036221N OVQ036222N OVQ036223N

3 55


WARNING - CargoCargo should always be secured toprevent it from being thrown aboutthe vehicle in a collision and caus-ing injury to the vehicle occupants.Special care should be taken ofobjects placed in the rear seats,since those may hit the front seatoccupants in a frontal collision.

CAUTION - Rear safetybelts

When returning the rear seatbacksto the upright position, rememberto return the rear shoulder belts totheir proper position. Routing thesafety belt webbing through therear safety belt guides will helpkeep the belts from being trappedbehind or under the seats.

WARNING - Cargo loadingMake sure the engine is off, thetransaxle is in P and the parkingbrake is applied whenever loadingor unloading cargo. Failure to takethese steps may allow the vehicle tomove if shift lever is inadvertentlymoved to another position.

CAUTION - Avoid damag-ing rear safety bucklesWhen you fold the rear seatback orput luggage on the rear seat cush-ion, insert the buckle in the pocketbetween the rear seatback andcushion. Doing so can prevent thebuckle from being damaged by therear seatback or luggage.

1VQA2074B

1VQA2074C


563

A driver position memory system is pro-vided to store and recall the driver seat,outside rearview mirror and adjustablepedal positions with a simple buttonoperation. By saving the desired posi-tions into the system memory, differentdrivers can reposition the driver seat,outside rearview mirror and adjustablepedal based upon their driving prefer-ence.If battery is disconnected, the positionmemory will be lost and the driving posi-tions should be restored in the system.

Storing positions into memoryusing the buttons on the doorStoring driver’s seat positions1. Shift the transaxle lever into P while

the ignition switch is ON.2. Adjust the driver seat, outside

rearview mirror and adjustable pedalto positions comfortable for the driver.

3. Press M button on the control panel.The system will beep once.

4. Press one of the memory buttons (1 or2) within 5 seconds after pressing theM button. The system will beep twicewhen memory has been successfullystored.

Recalling positions from memory1. Shift the transaxle lever into P while

the ignition switch is ON.2. To recall the position in memory, press

the desired memory button (1 or 2).The system will beep once, then thedriver seat, outside rearview mirrorand adjustable pedal will automaticallyadjust to the stored positions.

Adjusting one of the control knobs for thedriver seat, outside rearview mirror andadjustable pedal while the system isrecalling the stored positions will causethe movement for that component to stopand move in the direction that the controlknob is moved. Other components willcontinue position recalling.

DRIVER POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING Never attempt to operate the driverposition memory system while thevehicle is moving.This could result in loss of control,and an accident causing death,serious injury, or property damage.

WARNING Use caution when recalling adjust-ment memory while sitting in thevehicle. Push the seat position con-trol knob to the desired positionimmediately if the seat moves toofar in any direction.

OVQ036011N

3 57


Storing and recalling with trans-mitterStoring with the transmitterRemove the key from the ignition switchand lock all the doors using the transmit-ter. The driver seat, outside rearview mir-ror and adjustable pedal positions will bestored in the system memory.

Driver’s position recalling with trans-mitterUnlock the door with the transmitter,positions stored in the system memorywill be recalled automatically. Easy access function

When the AUTO button is ON (the indi-cator light illuminates) with the shift leverin P position, the system will move thedriver’s seat forward or rearward auto-matically so you can comfortably enterand exit the vehicle.• It will move driver’s seat rearward when

the ignition key is removed.• It will move driver’s seat forward when

the ignition key is inserted.

To adjust the position of the acceleratorand brake pedals, push the switch withthe shift lever in the P position.

If you push the � portion of the switch,the pedals move toward the driver.If you push the � portion of the switch,the pedals move away from the driver.

POWER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED)

1VQA2066

1VQH2065N


583

Setting the adjustable pedal posi-tion1. Be sure the parking brake is engaged.2. Move the accelerator and brake ped-

als to the front most position by push-ing the � portion of the switch.

3. Adjust the seat position and the steer-ing wheel angle properly.

4. Move the pedals toward you until youcan fully depress the brake pedal bypushing the � portion of the switch.

5. Depress the pedals a few times to getused to the feel after adjusting.

Safety belt restraint system

We strongly recommend that the driverand all passengers be properlyrestrained at all times by using the safetybelts provided with the vehicle. Properuse of the safety belts decreases the riskof severe injury or death in accidents orsudden stops. In most states, and inCanada, the law requires their use.

All seats have lap/shoulder belts. Inertiallocks in the safety belt retractors allow allof the lap/shoulder safety belts to remainunlocked during normal vehicle opera-tion. This allows the occupants somefreedom of movement and increasedcomfort while using the safety belts. If aforce is applied to the vehicle, such as astrong stop, a sharp turn, or a collision,the safety belt retractors will automatical-ly lock the safety belts.Since the inertial locks do not require acollision in order to lock up, you maybecome aware of the safety belts lockingwhile braking or going around sharp cor-ners.Always use the rear seat position(s) toinstall your child restraint(s).

WARNING - Safety beltsTo minimize the risk of serious orfatal injury in an accident, the driverand all passengers should use theappropriate safety restraints fortheir age and size. The presence ofair bags does not change the needto be properly restrained by a safe-ty belt or size-appropriate childrestraint. In fact, air bags aredesigned to work the best whenpassengers are correctly restrainedin the vehicle.• Be sure you are familiar with the

information in this section,including the information oninfant and child restraints.

• Read the safety warnings on thesun visors of your vehicle also.

WARNING - Child restraintin front seat

Never install a child restraint sys-tem in the front passenger position,as an inflating air bag could causeserious or fatal injury to a child inthat position.

WARNING• Adjust the pedals after parking

the vehicle on level ground. Neverattempt to adjust the pedals whilethe vehicle is moving.

• Never adjust the pedals with yourfoot on the accelerator pedal asthis may result in increasing theengine speed and acceleration.

• Make sure that you can fullydepress the brake pedal beforedriving. Otherwise, you may notbe able to hold down the brakepedal firmly in an emergencystop.

SAFETY BELTS

3 59


WARNING - Belt useSafety belts must be used correctlyto work properly in an accident.Each seating position in your vehi-cle has a specific safety belt assem-bly that includes a buckle andtongue designed to be used togeth-er.Failure to heed these warnings andfollow these instructions willincrease the risk and severity ofinjuries and the likelihood of deathin an accident.

(Continued)

WARNING - Twisted beltsA twisted or jammed safety beltcannot restrain you properly. If youcannot untwist or unjam the safetybelt, have an authorized Kia dealerservice it immediately. Never driveor ride with a twisted or jammedsafety belt.

The rear (or front passenger) safety beltsuse a special auto-lock feature designedto allow a child restraint to be used inthese positions without an added lockingclip. They normally lock only underextreme or emergency conditions (emer-gency lock mode). However they can beadjusted so that they remain fixed andlocked when a child restraint system isplaced in these positions. (Use this auto-lock mode only to secure a childrestraint, never for passengers restrainedby the safety belts.) The drivers safety belt can only operatein the emergency lock mode.

Safety belts provide the best restraintwhen:• The seatback is upright.• The occupant is sitting upright (not

slouched).• The lap belt is snug across the hips.• The shoulder belt is snug across the

chest.• The knees are straight forward.

WARNING - After a colli-sion

• Lap/shoulder belt assembliesmay be stretched or damagedwhen subjected to the stress andforces of a collision.

• The entire restraint systemshould be inspected followingany collision. All belts, retractors,anchors and hardware damagedby a collision should be replacedbefore the vehicle is operatedagain.

WARNING - Cargo area Passengers should never beallowed to ride in the cargo area ofa vehicle. No safety belts are pro-vided for the cargo area. Personsriding in the vehicle without a fas-tened safety belt are much morelikely to suffer serious bodily injuryor death during an accident.


603

Safety belt warning light and chimeIf the driver's safety belt is not fastenedwhen the key is turned ON or if it is dis-connected after the key is turned ON, thesafety belt warning light will blink until thebelt is fastened.If the driver's safety belt is not fastenedwhen the key is turned ON or if it isunfastened after the key is ON, the safe-ty belt warning chime will sound forapproximately 6 seconds.

(Continued)• Use the shoulder portion of the

safety belt on the outside shoul-der only. Never wear the shoulderportion under the arm or place itbetween your back and seatback.

• Never swing the safety beltaround your neck to fit over theinside shoulder.

• Never wear the shoulder portionof the safety belt across the neckor face.

• Wear the lap portion as low aspossible. Be sure that the lap beltfits snugly around the hips.Never wear a lap portion of alap/shoulder belt over your waist;it should always go over thestronger area of your hips.

• Never use a single safety belt formore than one person.

• The front seatbacks shouldalways remain in a comfortable,upright position when the vehicleis moving.

WARNING - Safety beltcare

• A damaged belt may not give youthe protection you need in anaccident.

• Inspect your safety belts periodi-cally for excessive wear or dam-age. Pull out each belt fully andlook for fraying, cuts, burns orother damage. Pull the safety beltout and let it retract a number oftimes. Make sure that thelap/shoulder belts return smooth-ly and easily into the retractor.

• Check the latches to make surethey latch and release withoutinterference or delay.

• Never close the doors on any partof the lap or shoulder belt.

• Any belt not in good condition orin good working order should bepromptly replaced.

WARNING Never close the doors on any partof the lap or shoulder belt. It candamage the safety belt or bucklewhich could increase the risk ofinjury in case of an accident.

1GQA2083

3 61


Lap/shoulder beltTo fasten the lap/shoulder belt:1. Grasp the buckle and tongue plate.2. Slowly pull the lap/shoulder belt out

from the retractor.

3. Insert the tongue plate (1) into theopen end of the buckle (2) until anaudible “click” is heard, indicating thebelt is locked in the buckle.

4. Position the lap portion (2) of the beltacross your lap as LOW ON THE HIPSas possible to reduce the risk of slidingunder it during an accident. Adjust thebelt to a SNUG FIT by pulling up onthe shoulder portion (1) of the safetybelt. The belt retractor is designed totake up excess webbing automaticallyand to maintain tension on the belt. Foryour safety, do not put any excessslack into the safety belt at any loca-tion.

1GHA2262 1VQH2263 1VQH2264


623

5. Adjust the shoulder anchor position toyour size. To raise the anchor position,push the anchor up (1). To lower theanchor position, press (2) the button(A) and slide the anchor down (3).After adjustment, make sure theanchor is locked in position. (ifequipped)

If the height of the adjusting seat belt istoo near your neck, you will not be gettingthe most effective protection. The shoul-der portion should be adjusted so that itlies across your chest and midway overyour shoulder nearest the door and notyour neck.

To unfasten the lap/shoulder belt:Press the release button on the buckleand allow the belt to slowly retract.

4GQB03381VQA2068

WARNING• The height adjuster must be in

the locked position when thevehicle is moving.

• The misadjustment of height ofthe shoulder belt could reducethe effectiveness of the seat beltin a crash.

3 63


3 Point rear center belt To fasten the rear center belt1. Extract the tongue plate from the hole

on the belt assembly cover and slowlypull the tongue plates out from theretractor.

2. Insert the tongue plate (A) into theopen end of the buckle (C) until anaudible “click" is heard, indicating thelatch is locked. Make sure the belt isnot twisted.

3. Pull the tongue plate (B) and insert thetongue plate (B) into the open end ofthe buckle (D) until an audible “click” isheard, indicating the latch is locked.Make sure the belt is not twisted.

1VQH3903

CAUTION - Cargo Be sure that the cargo is securelyloaded in the rear cargo area.Failing to do so may damage therear center safety belt in suddenstop or certain collisions.

OVQ036225N OVQ036097N


643

There will be an audible “click” when thetab locks in the buckle. The safety beltautomatically adjusts to the proper lengthonly after the lap belt is adjusted manu-ally so that it fits snugly around your hips,if you lean forward in a slow, easymotion, the belt will extend and let youmove around. If there is a sudden stop orimpact, the belt will lock into position. Itwill also lock if you try to lean forward tooquickly.

When using the rear center seat belt, thebuckle with the “CENTER” mark must beused.

To unfasten the rear center belt 1. Press the release button on the buckle

(D) and remove the tongue plate (B)from the buckle (D).

2. Retract the rear center seatbelt.

WARNINGWhen using the rear safety centerbelt, you must lock all tongue platesand buckles. If any tongue plate orbuckle is not locked, it will increasethe chance of injury in the event ofcollision.

OVQ036226N 1VQH3904

3 65


3. Insert the key or similar small rigiddevice into the web release button (E)on the anchor connector. Pull up onthe seat belt web (A) and allow thewebbing to retract automatically.

4. Insert the tongue plate (A) into thehole on the belt assembly cover.

Stowing the rear safety belt The rear safety belt can be stowed in thepocket between the rear seatback andcushion when not in use.

Proper use and care of the safetybelt system To ensure that the safety belts providethe maximum protection, please followthese instructions:• Use the belts at all times - even on

short trips.• If the safety belt is twisted, straighten it

prior to use.• Keep sharp edges and damaging

objects away from the belts.• Periodically inspect belt webbing,

anchors, buckles and all other parts forsigns of wear and damage. Replacedamaged, excessively worn or ques-tionable parts immediately.

• To clean the belt webbing, use a mildsoap solution recommended for clean-ing upholstery or carpets. Follow theinstructions provided with the soap.

• Do not make modifications or additionsto the safety belt.

• After wearing a safety belt, make sureit fully retracts to the stowed position.Do not allow the belt to get caught inthe door when you close it.

OVQ036099N

OVQ036098N

OVQ036227N


663

Restraint women Pregnant women should wear lap/shoul-der belt assemblies whenever possibleaccording to specific recommendationsby their doctors. The lap portion of thebelt should be worn AS SNUGLY ANDLOW AS POSSIBLE.

Infants and small children To increase their safety, infants andyoung children should always berestrained by a restraint systemapproved for their age and size.Never allow a child to stand or kneel onthe seat of a moving vehicle. Never allowa safety belt to be placed around both achild and an adult or around two childrenat the same time.It is best for children to be seated in therear seats.Many companies manufacture childrestraint systems (often called childseats) for infants and small children. Anacceptable child restraint system mustalways satisfy Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards. Make sure that anychild-restraint system you use in yourvehicle is labelled as complying withFederal Safety Standards.The child-restraint system should bechosen to fit both the size of the child andthe size of the vehicle seat. Be sure to fol-low any instructions provided by thechild-restraint system manufacturerwhen installing the child-restraint system.

WARNING - Pregnantwomen

Pregnant women must never placethe lap portion of the safety beltover the area of the abdomen wherethe fetus is located or above theabdomen where the belt couldcrush the fetus during an impact.

WARNING - Belt cleaningDo not bleach or dye the webbingbecause this may weaken the web-bing fibers and cause them to failwhen restraining an occupant in acollision.

WARNING - Children onlaps

Never hold a child on your lap or inyour arms in a moving vehicle.Even a very strong person cannothold onto a child in the event ofeven a minor collision.

WARNING - Hot metalparts

Safety belts and seats can becomehot in a vehicle that has beenclosed during warm/hot weather;they could burn a child. Check seatcovers and buckles before youplace a child anywhere near them.

3 67


Larger children As children grow, they may need to usenew child-restraint systems, includinglarger child seats or booster seats, whichare appropriate for their increased size.A child who has outgrown available child-restraint systems should use the beltsprovided in the vehicle. When seated inthe rear outboard seats, the child shouldbe restrained by the lap/shoulder belt.If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch-es the child’s neck or face, try placing thechild closer to the center of the vehicle. Ifthe shoulder belt still touches their faceor neck they need to be returned to achild restraint system. In addition, after-market devices are available from inde-pendent manufacturers which help pullthe shoulder belt down and away fromthe child’s face or neck.

Pre-tensioner safety belt Your vehicle is equipped with driver's andfront passenger's pre-tensioner safetybelts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner isto make sure that excess slack is takenup in certain frontal collisions. The pre-tensioners may activate along with thefront air bags in frontal collisions basedon angle of impact, seat belt usage andimpact severity.

WARNING - Infants andyoung children

• Infants and young children are atmuch greater risk of serious injuryor death in an accident or suddenstop if they are unrestrained orrestrained improperly. Follow allinstructions in this section and theinstructions that came with anapproved child safety system. Thechild restraint must be correctlyinstalled in the vehicle, and thechild must be correctly placed inthe child restraint.

• All children under 12 are safest inthe back seat.

• Never install a rear facing infantseat in the front passenger posi-tion. The baby will be injured orkilled by the air bag if it deploys.

• Never allow a child to stand orkneel on the seat of a moving vehi-cle.

2GHB3002

WARNING - Shoulder beltson small children

• Never allow a shoulder belt to bein contact with a child’s neck orface while the vehicle is inmotion.

• If safety belts are not properlyworn and adjusted on children,there is a risk of death or seriousinjury.


683

✽✽ NOTICEThe pre-tensioner seat belt is installed atthe front seats, and the sensor isequipped inside the buckle, where pres-ence of passenger is sensed by the fas-tening of the seat belts. Therefore, pre-tensioner will not activate if the passen-ger is not fastened with the seat belts.Likewise, it will activate if buckled evenwithout a passenger in the seat. Pre-ten-sioner seat belt is designed to activatewhen the seatbelt is in use. To ensure thepretensioner seatbelts activate in eventof a possible seatbelt buckle switch mal-function, the system is designed to acti-vate regardless of whether a seat belt isin use or if no seat belt use is detectedwithin 6 seconds of turning the ignitionswitch ON.

The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-sists mainly of the following components.Their locations are shown in the illustra-tion.(1) SRS air bag warning light(2) Seatbelt pre-tensioner assembly(3) SRS air bag control module

WARNING - Safety beltadjustment

To obtain maximum benefit from apre-tensioner seat belt:• The safety belt must be worn cor-

rectly.• The safety belt must be adjusted

to the correct position.

1LDE3100

3 69


Load limiter (if equipped)When the pre-tentioner activates, if thesystem senses excessive seat belt ten-sion on the driver or passenger’s seatbelt, the load limiter inside the pre-ten-sioner will release some of the pressureon the affected seat belt.

WARNING - Air bag/pre-tensioner warning light

If the SRS air bag warning lightdoes not illuminate when the igni-tion key is turned to “ON”, or if itremains illuminated after approxi-mately 6 seconds, or if it illuminateswhile the vehicle is being driven,please have an authorized Kia deal-er inspect the pre-tensioner and airbag system as soon as possible.

WARNING - Hot partsThe pre-tensioner assembly mecha-nism may become hot during acti-vation. Do not touch the pre-ten-sioner seat belt assembly for sever-al minutes after they have been acti-vated.

WARNING - Replacingused pre-tensioners

• Pre-tensioners are designed tooperate once. After activation,pre-tensioner seat belts must bereplaced. All seat belts, of anytype, should always be replacedafter they have been worn duringa collision.

• Do not attempt to replace the pre-tensioners yourself. This must bedone by an authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING - Damaging thepre-tensioners

• Do not hit or strike the pre-ten-sioner assemblies, especiallywith a tool or heavy object.

• Do not attempt to service orrepair the pre-tensioners.

WARNING - Air bag/Pre-tensioner dust

When the air bags and pre-tension-ers are activated, a loud noise maybe heard and fine dust, which mayappear to be smoke, may be visiblein the passenger compartment.Thisdust is not toxic. The dust maycause skin irritation and should notbe breathed for prolonged periods.Ventilate the vehicle after impactand wash your hands and face thor-oughly after an accident.


703

We strongly recommend the use of achild seat or infant seat for small childrenand babies, and it is required by law inalmost all states. This child seat or infantseat should be of appropriate size for thechild and should be installed in accor-dance with the manufacturer's instruc-tions.Children riding in the car should sit onthe rear seat and must always be proper-ly restrained to minimize the risk of injuryin an accident, sudden stop or suddenmaneuver. According to accident statis-tics, children are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seats than in thefront seat.Children could be injured or killed in acrash if their restraints are not properlysecured. For small children and babies, achild seat or infant seat must be used.Before buying a particular child restraintsystem, make sure it fits your car andseat belts, and fits your child. Follow allthe instructions provided by the childseat manufacturer when installing thechild restraint system.

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

WARNING - Childrestraints

• A child restraint system must beplaced in the rear seat. Neverinstall a child or infant seat on thefront passenger's seat.Should an accident occur andcause the passenger air bag todeploy, it could severely injure orkill an infant or child seated in thefront seat.

• Since a safety belt or childrestraint system can become veryhot if it is in a closed vehicle, besure to check the seat cover andbuckles before placing a childthere.

(Continued)

(Continued)• When the child restraint system

is not in use, store it in the trunkor fasten it with a safety belt sothat it will not be thrown forwardin the case of a sudden stop or anaccident.

• Children who are too large to bein a child restraint should sit inthe rear seat and be restrainedwith the available lap/shoulderbelts.

• When using the vehicleslap/shoulder safety belts, alwaysmake sure that the shoulder beltportion is positioned midwayover the shoulder, never acrossthe neck or behind the back. Thelap belt portion of the lap/shoul-der belt must always be posi-tioned as low as possible on thechild's hips and as snug as pos-sible.

• If the vehicle’s safety belt will notproperly fit the child, you mustuse an appropriate child restraintor booster seat in the rear.

(Continued)

1JBH3051

3 71


Installing a child restraint system For safety reasons, we recommend thatthe child restraint system be used in therear seats.

Since all passenger safety belts movefreely under normal conditions and onlylock under extreme or emergency condi-tions (emergency lock mode), you mustmanually change these safety belts tothe auto lock mode to secure a childrestraint.

WARNING - Child seatinstallation

• Before installing the childrestraint system, read the instruc-tions supplied by the childrestraint system manufacturer.

• If the safety belt does not operateas described in this section, havethe system checked immediatelyby your authorized Kia dealer.

• Failure to observe this manual'sinstructions regarding childrestraint system and the instruc-tions provided with the childrestraint system could increasethe chance and/or severity ofinjury in an accident.

WARNINGNever place a rear-facing childrestraint in the front passengerseat, because of the danger that aninflating passenger side air bagcould impact the rear-facing childrestraint and kill the child.

(Continued)• Never allow a child to stand up or

kneel while the vehicle is moving.• Never use an infant carrier or

child seat that "hooks" over aseatback. It will not provide ade-quate protection in an accident.

• Never allow a child to be heldwhile they are in a moving vehi-cle, as this could result in seriousinjury to the child in the event ofan accident or a sudden stop.Holding a child in a moving vehi-cle does not provide the childwith any protection during anaccident, even if the person hold-ing the child is wearing a seatbelt.


723

Securing a child restraint seat Tether anchor system Child restraint hook holders are locatedon the back of the rear seat cushions.

1. Route the child restraint seat strapover the seatback.For vehicles with adjustable headrest,route the tether strap under the head-rest and between the headrest posts,otherwise route the tether strap overthe top of the seatback.

2. Connect the tether strap hook to theappropriate child restraint hook holderand tighten to secure the seat.

WARNING - Tether strapIf the tether strap is secured incor-rectly, the child restraint seat may notbe restrained properly in the event ofa collision. Do not mount more thanone child restraint seat to a tetheranchorage, since the anchorage canthen fail in a collision.

WARNING - Child restraintcheck

Check that the child restraint sys-tem is secure by pushing andpulling it in different directions.Incorrectly fitted child restraintsmay swing, twist, tip or come awaycausing death or injury.

OVQ036230R

OVQ036228N

OVQ036229N

3 73


Child seat lower anchorsSome child seat manufacturers makechild restraint seats that are labeled asInternational Standards OrganizationFixed (ISOFIX) or ISOFIX-compatiblechild restraint seats. These seats includetwo rigid or webbing mounted attach-ments that connect to two ISOFIXanchors at specific seating positions inyour vehicle. This type of child restraintseat eliminates the need to use seatbelts to attach the child seat for forward-facing child restraint seats in the rearseats.

ISOFIX anchors have been provided inyour vehicle. The ISOFIX anchors arelocated in the left and right outboard rearseating positions. Their locations areshown in the illustration. There is noISOFIX anchor provided for the centerrear seating position.The ISOFIX anchors are locatedbetween the seatback and the seat cush-ion of the rear seat left and right outboardseating positions.

WARNING - Child restraint anchorage

• Child restraint anchorages aredesigned to withstand only thoseloads imposed by correctly fittedchild restraints. Under no circum-stances are they to be used foradult seat belts or harnesses orfor attaching other items orequipment to the vehicle.

• The tether strap may not workproperly if attached somewhereother than the correct tetheranchor.

OVQ036300N OVQ036231N


743

Follow the child seat manufacturer’sinstructions to properly install childrestraint seats with ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible attachments.Once you have installed the ISOFIX childrestraint, assure that the seat is properlyattached to the ISOFIX and tetheranchors. Also, test the child restraint seatbefore you place the child in it. Tilt theseat from side to side. Also try to tug theseat forward. Check to see if the anchorshold the seat in place.

Placing a passenger safety beltinto the auto lock mode The use of the auto lock mode willensure that the normal movement of thechild in the vehicle does not cause thesafety belt to be pulled out and loosenthe firmness of its hold on the childrestraint system. To secure a childrestraint system, use the following proce-dure.

WARNING - ISOFIXAnchors

If the child restraint is not anchoredproperly, there is a significant riskof a child being seriously injured orkilled in a collision.

WARNING - ISOFIX loweranchors

ISOFIX lower anchors are only to beused with the left and right rear out-board seating positions. Neverattempt to attach an ISOFIXequipped seat in the center seatingposition. You may damage theanchors or the anchors may fail andbreak in a collision.

WARNINGInstall the child restraint seat fullyrearward against the seatback withthe seatback in a vertical position,not reclined.

WARNINGWhen using the vehicle's "ISOFIX"system to install a child restraintsystem in the rear seat, all unusedvehicle rear seat belt metal latchplates or tabs must be latchedsecurely in their seat belt bucklesand the seat belt webbing must beretracted behind the child restraintto prevent the child from reachingand taking hold of unretracted seatbelts. Unlatched metal latch platesor tabs may allow the child to reachthe unretracted seat belts whichmay result in strangulation and aserious injury or death to the childin the child restraint.

3 75


Installing a child restraint system bylap/shoulder belt

To install a child restraint system on theoutboard or center rear seats, do the fol-lowing:1. Place the child restraint system in the

seat and route the lap/shoulder beltaround or through the restraint, follow-ing the restraint manufacturer’sinstructions. Be sure the safety beltwebbing is not twisted.

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch intothe buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”sound.

Position the release button so that it iseasy to access in case of an emergency.

3. Pull the shoulder portion of the safetybelt all the way out. When the shoulderportion of the safety belt is fullyextended, it will shift the retractor tothe “Auto Lock” (child restraint) mode.

E2MS103005 E2BLD310 MMSA3028


763

4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion ofthe safety belt to retract and listen foran audible “clicking” or “ratcheting”sound. This indicates that the retractoris in the “Auto Lock” mode. If no distinctsound is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5. Remove as much slack from the beltas possible by pushing down on thechild restraint system while feeding theshoulder belt back into the retractor.

6. Push and pull on the child restraintsystem to confirm that the safety belt isholding it firmly in place. If it is not,release the safety belt and repeatsteps 2 through 6.

7. Double check that the retractor is inthe “Auto Lock” mode by attempting topull more of the safety belt out of theretractor. If you cannot, the retractor isin the “Auto Lock” mode.

To remove the child restraint, press therelease button on the buckle and thenpull the lap/shoulder belt out of therestraint and allow the safety belt toretract fully.

When the safety belt is allowed toretract to its fully stowed position, theretractor will automatically switchfrom the “Auto Lock” mode to theemergency lock mode for normaladult usage.

MMSA3029 MMSA3030

WARNING - Auto lockmode

The lap/shoulder belt automaticallyreturns to the “emergency lockmode” whenever the belt is allowedto retract fully. Therefore, the pre-ceding seven steps must be fol-lowed each time a child restraint isinstalled.If the safety belt is not placed in the“Auto lock” mode, severe injury ordeath could occur to the childand/or other occupants in the vehi-cle in a collision, since the childrestraint will not be effectively heldin place.

3 77


AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

Driver’s air bag Front passenger’sair bag

Curtain Air bag

SRS control module

OVQ036094N/OVQ036015N/1VQA2077/1VQA2078/OVQ036017N/1VQA2079/1VQA2323/1VQA2080/OVQ036096N/OVQ036095N/1VQA2081

Side air bag

Occupant classi-fication system

Front seat positionsensor

Side impact sensor Front impact sensor


783

(1) Driver’s air bag(2) Front passenger’s air bag(3) Side air bag*(4) Curtain Air bag*(5) Side impact sensor*(6) Front impact sensor(7) Occupant classification system (8) Front seat position sensor(9) SRS Control Module

� Air bag inflation conditions� Air bag non-inflation conditions� Air bag warning light� SRS care� Air bag warning label

*: if equipped

What your air bag system doesDriver’s air bag and front passenger’s airbag are designed to supplement the pro-tection offered by the safety belt in cer-tain frontal collisions. Likewise, side airbag and curtain air bags are designed tosupplement the protection offered by thesafety belt in side collisions. Safety beltsare designed to reduce the injury of thedriver or passengers in case of impact orcollision. No safety belt or air bag systemcan completely eliminate injuries thatmay cause in collisions or impacts. Tohelp reduce impact on driver or passen-gers in any collision, safety belts must becorrectly worn.

What your air bag system doesnot doThe air bag system is designed to sup-plement the protection offered by thesafety belt system. IT IS NOT A SUB-STITUTE FOR THE SAFETY BELT.

The importance of using safety beltsThere are four very important reasons touse safety belts even with an air bag sup-plemental restraint system. They:• help keep you in the proper position

(away from the air bag) when it inflates.• reduce the risk of harm in rollover, side

impact (vehicles not equipped withside and curtain air bags) or rearimpact collisions, because an air bag isnot designed to inflate in such situa-tions and even a side curtain air bag isdesigned to inflate only in certain sideimpact collisions.

• reduce the risk of harm in frontal orside collisions which are not severeenough to actuate the air bag supple-mental restraint system.

• reduce the risk of being ejected fromyour vehicle.

3 79


Occupant classification systemThe occupant classification systemdetects the presence of a passenger inthe front passenger's seat and will turn offthe front passenger's air bag under cer-tain conditions.The occupant classification system isdesigned to detect the presence of aproperly-seated occupant and determineif the front passenger's air bag should beenabled (may inflate) or not.Only the front passenger front air bag andfront passenger side air bag are con-trolled by the Occupant ClassificationSystem.

WARNING - Air bags &safety belts

• Even in vehicles with air bags,you and your passengers mustalways wear the safety belts pro-vided in order to minimize the riskand severity of injury in the eventof a collision or rollover.

• Always wear your safety belt. Itcan help keep you away from theair bags during heavy brakingjust before a collision.

• If occupants are not wearing safe-ty belts or correctly seated, theycannot be protected, and thusface serious injury or death.

• Driver’s and front passenger’s airbag are designed to inflate only incertain frontal collision, and sideand curtain air bags are designedto inflate in certain side impacts.Frontal air bags will generally notprovide protection in side impacts(vehicles not equipped with sideand curtain air bags) or rearimpacts, rollovers, less severefrontal collisions.They will not pro-vide protection from later impactsin a multi-impact collision.

(Continued)

(Continued)• If your vehicle has been subject-

ed to flood conditions (e.g.soaked carpeting/standing wateron the floor of the vehicle, etc.) orif your vehicle has become flooddamaged in any way, do notattempt to start the vehicle or putthe key in the ignition before dis-connecting the battery.Disregarding this precaution maycause air bag deployment, whichcould result in serious personalinjury or death. If your vehicle issubjected to flooded conditions,before starting the vehicle, havethe vehicle towed to an autho-rized Kia dealer for inspectionand necessary repairs.

OVQ036096N


803

Main components of occupant classi-fication system• Detection devices located under the

front passenger seat frame.• Electronic system to determine

whether passenger air bag systems(both front and side) should be activat-ed or deactivated.

• A indicator light ocated on the instru-ment panel which illuminates the words“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” passen-ger air bag system is deactivated.

• The instrument panel air bag indicatorlight is interconnected with the occu-pant classification system.

If there is no passenger in the front pas-senger seat or if the passenger in thefront passenger seat is very light, (suchas a child), the front PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator may illuminate.When this indicator is ON, the front pas-senger’s air bag will not operate.If there is no passenger in the front pas-senger's seat, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator comes on, and thesystem shuts off not only the front pas-senger's front air bag but also the frontpassenger’s side air bag.

Always be sure that you and all vehicleoccupants are seated and restrainedproperly (sitting upright with the seat inan upright position, centered on the seatcushion, with the person's legs comfort-ably extended, feet on the floor, andwearing the safety belt properly) for themost effective protection by the air bagand the safety belt.• The OCS may not function properly if

the passenger takes actions which candefeat the detection system. Theseinclude:

(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.(2) Leaning against the door or center

console.(3) Sitting towards the sides or the front

of the seat.(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or rest-

ing them on other locations whichreduce the passenger weight on thefront seat.

(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.(6) Reclining the seat back.

OVQ036012N

3 81


• The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator illuminates after the ignitionkey is turned to the "ON" position orafter the engine is started. If the frontpassenger seat is unoccupied or isoccupied by very small person, or isoccupied by someone who is improp-erly seated, the "PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator will remain illumi-nated. If the front passenger seat isoccupied by someone of adult size andbody shape, the "PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator will turn off afterapproximately 4 seconds.

• If the front passenger's seat is unoccu-pied, the “PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF” indicator will turn on, and thefront passenger's air bag will notdeploy in frontal crashes.

• If the “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”indicator illuminates, the front passen-ger’s air bag will not deploy in frontalcrashes.

• If the front passenger’s seat is occu-pied by a person of adult size, the“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indica-tor is not illuminated and the front pas-senger’s air bag will deploy in frontalcrashes.

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

Condition detected bythe occupant classifi-

cation system

1. Adult *1

2. Child*2 or child

restraint system

3. Unoccupied

Off

On

On

Off

Off

Off

Activated

Deactivated

"PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator

lightSRS warning light

Front passengerair bag

Deactivated

Indicator/Warning light Devices

*1 The system detects a person who is generally adult size as an adult, thus allowing the pas-senger air bag to deploy. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the systemmay detect their body shape as that of a child, thus preventing air bag deployment.

*2 When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat,the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her body shape or seatingposition, thus permitting air bag deployment.

CAUTION If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator illuminates or blinks continuous-ly when a person of adult size sits in the front passenger's seat, it could bebecause that person isn't sitting properly in the seat. If this happens, turn thevehicle off, make sure the seat back is not reclined, have the passenger cen-ter on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended, and the safety beltproperly positioned. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in thisposition long enough to allow the system to detect the person and activate thepassenger air bag.


823

WARNING• Even though your vehicle is

equipped with the occupant clas-sification system, do not install achild restraint system in the frontpassenger seat. The child couldbe severely injured or killed if theair bag deploys. Children areafforded the most protection inthe event of an accident whenthey are restrained by the properrestraint system in the rear seat.

• If the "PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF" indicator is illuminatedwhen the front passenger's seatis occupied by a person of adultsize who is seated properly, or ifthe "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator" is not illuminated whenthe front passenger's seat isunoccupied or occupied by a verysmall person, the occupant clas-sification system is not workingproperly. Have your vehicle imme-diately inspected by your Kiadealer if the occupant classifica-tion system is not working prop-erly.

(Continued)

(Continued)• If a very low weight adult is seat-

ed in the front passenger seat, theoccupant classification systemmay or may not turn off the rightfront passenger air bag, depend-ing upon the person's seatingposition and body type. Everyonein your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly -- whether ornot there is an air bag for that per-son.

• If the front seat passengerchanges their seating position(for example, by not sittingupright, by sitting on the edge ofthe seat, or by otherwise beingout of position), the "PASSEN-GER AIR BAG OFF" indicator maybe turned on, and the passengerair bag may not deploy in a colli-sion. Always be sure to sit prop-erly in the front passenger seatand wear the safety belt properlyand do not do any of the follow-ing.

(Continued)

CAUTION If the occupant classification sys-tem is not working properly, the airbag warning light on the instrumentpanel will illuminate because thepassenger’s air bag is connectedwith the occupant classificationsystem. If there is a malfunction ofthe occupant classification system,the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator will not illuminate and thefront passenger's air bag will deployin either a side or frontal crasheseven if there is child or no occupantin the front passenger's seat.Have an authorized Kia dealerinspect the occupant classificationsystem with the SRS air bag systemas soon as possible if any of follow-ing occur;• The SRS air bag warning light

does not illuminate when the igni-tion key is turned to "ON" posi-tion.

• The SRS air bag warning lightremains illuminated after illumi-nating or blinking for approxi-mately 6 seconds.

• The SRS air bag warning light illu-minates while the vehicle is beingdriven.

3 83


1KMN3663

1KMN3664

1KMN3665

- Never sit with hips shiftedtowards the front of the seat.

- Never lean on the center console.- Never sit on one side of the front

passenger seat.

- Never place feet on the dash-board.

(Continued)

OVQ036013N

1KMN3662

- Never put a heavy load in thefront passenger seat or seatbackpocket.

- Never excessively recline thefront passenger seatback.

OVQ036014N

- Never place feet on the front pas-senger seatback.

(Continued)


843

✽✽ NOTICE• If luggage or other objects are placed

on the front passenger's seat or if thetemperature of the seat changes whilethe seat is unoccupied, the "PASSEN-GER AIR BAG OFF" indicator mayblink. These conditions do not indi-cate a problem.

• Do not put heavy objects on the frontpassenger's seat. This may cause frontpassenger air bag deployment in theevent of an accident, thus increasingyour repair costs.

WARNING• The front seat passenger air bag

is much larger than the steeringwheel air bag and inflates withconsiderably more force. It canseriously hurt or kill a passengerwho is not in the proper positionand wearing the safety belt prop-erly. The front passengers shouldalways move their seat as farback as practical and sit back intheir seat.

• It is essential that the front pas-senger always wears their safetybelts, even when the vehicle ismoving in a parking lot or up a dri-veway into garage.

(Continued)

(Continued)Any other such replacement ormodification could adverselyaffect the operation of the occu-pant classification system andyour advanced air bags. For thesame reason, do not attach any-thing to the seat, dashboard ordoor, even temporarily. If the sys-tem is adversely affected, it couldcause severe personal injuries ordeath in a collision.

• Do not put a heavy load in the frontpassenger seatback pocket or onthe front passenger seat. Do nothang onto the front passengerseat. Do not hang any items suchas seatback table on the front pas-senger seatback. Do not place feeton the front passenger seatback.Do not place any items under thefront passenger seat. Any of thesecould interfere with proper sensoroperation.

(Continued)

• Kia does not endorse nor will itsupport any changes to any partor structure of the vehicle thatcould affect the advanced air bagsystem, including the occupantclassification system.Specifically, the front passengerseat, dashboard or door shouldnot be replaced except by anauthorized Kia dealer using origi-nal Kia parts designed for thisvehicle and model.

(Continued)

1KMN3666

- Always sit in a proper seatingposition.

3 85


Air bag system components The main components of your SRS are:• To indicate that your vehicle is

equipped with air bags, the corre-sponding air bag covers are markedwith “SRS AIR BAG”.- Driver’s air bag - Passenger’s air bag - Side air bag - Curtain air bag

• A diagnostic system that continuallymonitors the system operation.

• An indicator light to warn you of a pos-sible problem with the system.

• Emergency power backup in case yourcar’s electrical system is disconnectedin a crash.

The SRS uses a collection of sensors togather information about the driver’s seatposition, the driver’s and front passenger’ssafety belt usage and impact severity.The driver’s seat position sensor, whichis installed on the seat track, determine ifthe seat is fore or aft of a reference posi-tion. Similarly, the safety belt usage sen-sors determine if the driver and front pas-senger’s safety belts are fastened. Thesesensors provide the ability to control theSRS deployment based on how close thedriver’s seat is to the steering wheel,whether or not the safety belts are fas-tened, and the severity of the impact.

(Continued)• If the driver brakes the vehicle

heavily prior to an impact, unbelt-ed occupants will be thrown for-ward. If the front passenger is notwearing the safety belts, they willbe directly in front of the storagecompartment when deploymentoccurs. In that situation, seriousinjury or death is possible.

• Never allow front passenger toput their hands, feet or face on orclose to the instrument panel. Inthe event of air bag deployment,such a mispositioned occupantwould be likely to suffer severeinjury or death.

• Never allow children, pregnantwomen or weak persons to sit inthe front passenger seat. Do notput child restraint system on thefront passenger's seat either.They may be seriously injured bythe air bag inflation when air bagdeploys.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not put objects or stickers on

the instrument panel. Do notapply any accessory to the frontwindshield. Do not install after-market mirrors or accessories onthe factory-installed rearview mir-ror. Any of these could interferewith the deployment of the air bagor could hit your body at highspeed and cause severe bodilyinjury and even death.


863

The advanced SRS offers the ability tocontrol the air bag inflation with two lev-els. A first stage level is provided for mod-erate-severity impacts. A second stagelevel is provided for more severe impacts.According to the impact severity, seatingposition and safety belt usage, theSRSCM (SRS Control Module) controlsthe air bag inflation. Failure to properlywear safety belts can increase the riskor severity of injury in an accident.Additionally, your SRS is equipped withan occupant classification system in thefront passenger’s seat. The occupantclassification system detects the pres-ence of a passenger in the front passen-ger’s seat and will turn off the front pas-senger’s air bag under certain conditions.For more detail, see “OccupantClassification System” in this section.

CAUTIONIf the seat position sensor is notworking properly, the SRS air bagwarning light on the instrumentpanel will illuminate even if there isno malfunction of the SRS air bagsystem, because the SRS air bagwarning light is connected with theseat position sensor. If the SRS airbag warning light does not illumi-nate when the ignition key is turnedto the "ON" position, if it remainsilluminated after illuminating orblinking for approximately 6 sec-onds, or if it illuminates while thevehicle is being driven, have anauthorized Kia dealer inspect theseat position sensor and theadvanced SRS air bag system assoon as possible.

WARNING• Modification to the seat structure

can adversely affect the seatposition sensor and cause the airbag to deploy at a different levelthan should be provided.

• Failure to properly wear safetybelts can increase the risk orseverity of injury by causing theair bags to deploy at a differentlevel than should be provided.

• Do not place any objects under-neath the front seats which coulddamage the seat position sensoror interfere with the occupantclassification system.

• Do not place any objects that maycause magnetic fields near thefront seat. These may cause amalfunction of the seat positionsensor.

(Continued)

3 87


Driver’s air bagThe driver’s air bag is stored in the cen-ter of the steering wheel.

HLZ206

OVQ036015N

(Continued)• Ignoring the SRS indicator light

(air bag indicator and passengerair bag off indicator) can result inserious or fatal injury if the airbags occupant classification sys-tem or pre-tensioners do not workproperly. Have your car checkedby a dealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS warning light alerts youto a potential problem.

• Sitting improperly or out of posi-tion can result in serious or fatalinjury in a crash. All occupantsshould sit upright in their seatswith their feet on the floor untilthe vehicle is parked and the igni-tion key is removed.

WARNING• You must always sit as far back

from the steering wheel air bag aspossible (chest at least 250 mm(10 inches) away from the steer-ing wheel), while still maintaininga comfortable seating position forgood vehicle control, in order toreduce the risk of injury or deathin a collision.

• Never place objects over the airbag storage compartments orbetween the air bags and your-self. Due to the speed and force ofthe air bag inflation, such objectscould hit your body at high speedand cause severe bodily injuryand even death.

• Do not put stickers or ornamentson the steering wheel cover.These may interfere with thedeployment of the air bag.


883

Front passenger’s air bagFront passenger’s air bag is stored in theinstrument panel on the glove box.Since you cannot know which air bagswill deploy or from what direction, neverput any objects or ornaments on theinstrument panel.

Side air bag (if equipped)Side air bags are stored in the left side ofthe driver’s seat, right side of the frontpassenger’s seat.If air bag inflation conditions are met(side collision), they will inflate.

1VQA2077

EHMR200

WARNING• Do not use any accessory seat

covers for the vehicle equippedwith side air bags.Use of seat covers could interferewith side air bag deployment.If seat or seat cover is damaged,have the vehicle checked andrepaired by an authorized Kiadealer. Inform them that yourvehicle is equipped with side airbags and an occupant detectionsystem.

• Do not make modifications oradditions to the seats. If inappro-priate seats are used, unexpectedinjury may result in due to themalfunction of the air bag sys-tem.

OVQ036900N

OVQ036310N

3 89


Curtain air bag (if equipped)Curtain air bags are located along bothsides of the roof rails above the front andrear doors.It is designed to help protect the heads ofthe front seat occupants and the rear out-board seat occupants in certain sideimpact collisions.

• If the curtain air bag deploys, itremains inflated for approximately 3seconds. The curtain air bag deploy-ment occurs only on the side of thevehicle affected by the impact.

• The side air bags (side and curtain airbags) are not designed to deploy dur-ing collisions from the front or rear ofthe vehicle or in most rollover situa-tions.

• The curtain air bags are designed todeploy only during certain side-impactcollisions, depending on the crashseverity, angle, speed and impact. Thecurtain air bags are not designed todeploy in all side impact situations.

WARNING• In order for side air bags (side

and curtain air bags) to provideits best protection, both front seatoccupants and both outboardrear occupants should sit in anupright position with the seatbelts properly fastened.Importantly, children should sit ina proper child restraint system inthe rear seat.

(Continued)

(Continued)• When children are seated in the

rear outboard seats, they must beseated in the proper childrestraint system. Make sure to putthe child restraint system as faraway from the door side as possi-ble, and secure the child restraintsystem in a locked position.

• Do not allow the passengers tolean their heads or bodies ontodoors, put their arms on thedoors, stretch their arms out ofthe window, or place objectsbetween the doors and passen-gers when they are seated onseats equipped with side airbags.

• Never try to open or repair anycomponents of the side curtainair bag system. This should onlybe done by an authorized Kiadealer.

Failure to follow the above men-tioned instructions can result ininjury or death to the vehicle occu-pants in an accident.

OVQ036017N

OVQ036093N


903

Why didn’t my air bag go off in acollision? (Inflation and non-inflation conditionsof the air bag)There are many types of accidents inwhich the air bag would not be expect-ed to provide additional protection.These include rear impacts, second orthird collisions in multiple impactaccidents, as well as low speedimpacts. In other words, just becauseyour vehicle is damaged and even if itis totally unusable, don’t be surprisedthat the air bags did not inflate.

Air bag collision sensors(1) SRS control module(2) Front impact sensor

(3) Side impact sensor (if equipped)(4) Side impact sensor (if equipped)

OVQ036400N/1VQA2081/1VQA2080/1VQA2079/1VQA2323

3 91


Air bag inflation conditionsFront air bag Front air bags are designed to inflatewhen the impact is delivered to front col-lision sensors depending on the intensity,speed or angles of impact of the frontcollision - generally from an area a littleto the left to a little to the right of straightahead.

1VQA2084

WARNING• Do not hit or allow any objects to

impact the locations where air bagor sensors are installed.This may cause unexpected airbag deployment, which couldresult in serious personal injuryor death.

• If the installation location orangle of the sensors is altered inany way, the air bags may deploywhen they should not or they maynot deploy when they should,causing severe injury or death.Therefore, do not try to performmaintenance on or around the airbag sensors. Have the vehiclechecked and repaired by anauthorized Kia dealer.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Problems may arise if the sensor

installation angles are changeddue to the deformation of frontbumper, body or B/C pillar whereside collision sensors areinstalled. Have the vehiclechecked and repaired by anauthorized Kia dealer.

• Your vehicle has been designedto absorb impact and deploy theair bag(s) in certain collisions.Installing aftermarket bumperguards or replacing a bumperwith non-genuine parts mayadversely affect your vehiclescollision and air bag deploymentperformance.


923

Side air bags (if equipped)Side air bags (side and/or curtain airbags) are designed to inflate when animpact is detected by side collision sen-sors depending on the strength, speed orangles of impact of side impact of sideimpact collision or rollover.

Although the front air bags (driver’s andfront passenger’s air bags) are designedto inflate only in frontal collision, it mayinflate in any collision if front impact sen-sors detect a sufficient impact. Side airbags (side and/or curtain air bags) aredesigned to inflate only in side impactcollision, it may inflate in any collision ifside impact sensors detect a sufficientimpact.If the vehicle chassis is impacted bybumps or objects on unimproved roadsor sidewalks, air bags may deploy. Drivecarefully on unimproved roads or on sur-faces not designed for vehicle traffic toprevent unintended air bag deployment.To protect occupants, front air bags orpre-tensioner seat belts may deploy incertain side impact collisions.

Air bag non-inflation conditions• In certain low-speed collisions the air

bags may not deploy. The air bags aredesigned not to deploy in such casesbecause the risk of injuries which canbe caused by the air bags exceeds thebenefits they provide in protectingoccupants.

OVQ036018N

OVQ036016N

1VQA2086

3 93


• Frontal air bags are not designed toinflate in rear collisions, because occu-pants are moved backward by theforce of the impact. In this case, the airbags do not provide proper protection.

• Front air bags may not inflate in sideimpact collision, because occupantsmove to the direction of the collision,and thus in side impacts, frontal air bagdeployment does not provide occupantprotection.However, side or curtain air bags mayinflate depending on the intensity, vehi-cle speed and angles of impact.

• In a slant or angled collision, the forceof impact may direct the occupants in adirection between the front and side airbags, and thus the sensors may notdeploy any air bags.

1VQA2087 1VQA2089OVQ036018N


943

• Just before impact, drivers often brakeheavily. Such heavy braking lowers thefront portion of the vehicle causing it to“ride” under a vehicle with a higherground clearance. Air bags may notinflate in this "under-ride" situationbecause deceleration forces that aredetected by sensors may be signifi-cantly altered by such “under-ride” col-lisions.

• Air bags may not inflate in rollover acci-dents because air bag deploymentwould not provide proper protection tothe occupants.However, side air bags may inflatewhen the vehicle is rolled over by aside impact collision, if the vehicle isequipped with side air bags and cur-tain air bags.

• Air bags may not inflate if the vehiclecollides with objects such as utilitypoles or trees, where the point ofimpact is concentrated to one area andthe full force of the impact is not deliv-ered to the sensors.

1VQA2090 1VQA2091 1VQA2092

3 95


Air bag system operation• Air bag only operates when the ignition

switch is turned to the ON or STARTpositions.

• Air bags inflate instantly in the event ofserious frontal or side collision (ifequipped with side air bag or curtainair bag) in order to help protect theoccupants from serious physical injury.

• There is no single speed at which theair bags will inflate.Generally, air bags are designed toinflate by the severity of a collision andits direction. These two factors deter-mine whether the sensors send out anelectronic deployment/inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on anumber of factors including vehiclespeed, angles of impact and the densi-ty and stiffness of the vehicles orobjects which your vehicle hits in thecollision. However, factors are not limit-ed to those mentioned above.

• The front air bags will completelyinflate and deflate in an instant.It is virtually impossible for you to seethe air bags inflate during an accident.It is much more likely that you will sim-ply see the deflated air bags hangingout of their storage compartments afterthe collision.

• In order to help provide protection in asevere collision, the air bags mustinflate rapidly. The speed of air baginflation is a consequence of theextremely short time in which a collisionoccurs and the need to get the air bagbetween the occupant and the vehiclestructures before the occupant impactsthose structures. This speed of inflationreduces the risk of serious or life-threatening injuries in a severe collisionand is thus a necessary part of air bagdesign.However, air bag inflation can alsocause injuries which normally caninclude facial abrasions, bruises andbroken bones, and sometimes moreserious injuries because that inflationspeed also causes the air bags toexpand with a great deal force.

• There are even circumstancesunder which contact with the steer-ing wheel air bag can cause fatalinjuries, especially if the occupantis positioned excessively close tothe steering wheel.


963

Noise and smokeWhen the air bags inflate, they make aloud noise and they leave smoke andpowder in the air inside of the vehicle.This is normal and is a result of the igni-tion of the air bag inflator. After the airbag inflates, you may feel substantial dis-comfort in breathing due to the contact ofyour chest to both the safety belt and theair bag, as well as from breathing thesmoke and powder. We strongly urgeyou to open your doors and/or win-dows as soon as possible after impactin order to reduce discomfort and pre-vent prolonged exposure to thesmoke and powder.Though smoke and powder are non-toxic, it may cause irritation to the skin(eyes, nose and throat etc). If this is thecase, wash and rinse with the cold waterimmediately and consult the doctor if thesymptom persists.

WARNING - Seated positioning

• Driver should sit as far back (atleast 250 mm (10 inches) away)from the steering wheel air bag aspossible to reduce the risk ofinjury or death in a collision. Thefront passenger should alwaysmove their seat as far back aspossible and sit back in theirseat.

• Air bag inflates instantly in anevent of collision, passengersmay be injured by the air bagexpansion force if they are not inproper position.

• Air bag inflation may causeinjuries which normally includefacial or bodily abrasions, injuriesby the broken glasses or burns bythe explosives.

WARNINGWhen the air bags deploy, the airbag related parts in steering wheeland/or instrument panel and/or inboth sides of the roof rails abovethe front and rear doors are veryhot. To prevent injury, do not touchthe air bag storage areas internalcomponents immediately after anair bag has inflated.

3 97


Installing a child restraint on afront passenger’s seat is forbid-den.Never place a rear-facing child restraintin the front passenger’s seat. If the airbag deploys, it would impact the rear-fac-ing child restraint, causing serious orfatal injury.In addition, do not place front-facing childrestraint in the front passenger’s seateither. If the front passenger air baginflates, it would cause serious or fatalinjuries to the child.

Air bag warning lightThe purpose of the air bag warning lightin your instrument panel is to alert you ofa potential problem with your air bag -Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).When the ignition switch is turned ON,the indicator light should blink or illumi-nate for approximately 6 seconds, thengo off.Have the system checked if:• The light does not turn on briefly when

you turn the ignition ON.• The light stays on after the engine

starts.• The light comes on while the vehicle is

in motion.

1JBH3051

WARNING• Never put child restraint in the

front passenger’s seat. If the frontpassenger air bag inflates, itwould cause serious or fatalinjuries.

• When children are seated in therear outboard seats in which sideair bags are equipped, be sure toput the child restraint system asfar away from the door side aspossible, and secure the childrestraint system to be locked inposition.Inflation of side or curtain air bagcould cause serious injury ordeath due to the expansionimpact.

AIRBAG


983

SRS careYour Supplemental Restraint System isvirtually maintenance-free. There are noparts which you can service.You must have the system servicedunder the following circumstances:• If an air bag ever inflates, the air bag

must be replaced. Do not try to removeor discard the air bag by yourself. Thismust be done by an authorized Kiadealer.

• If the air bag warning indicator lightalerts you to a problem, have the airbag system checked as soon as possi-ble. Otherwise, your air bag systemmay be ineffective.

When repairing or scrapping thevehicles • Repairing steering wheel, instrument

panel, center console or roofs, orinstalling car audio around center con-sole or painting front metal sheet coulddisable the air bag system. Have themchecked by an authorized Kia dealer.

• When leaving the vehicle at an autho-rized Kia dealer, inform the facility thatthe vehicle is equipped with air bagsystem, and leave the owner’s manualin the vehicle.

• Since air bag system contains explo-sive chemical substances, contact anauthorized Kia dealer when scrappingthe vehicle.

WARNING - No mainte-nance or repair

• Do not modify your steeringwheel, seat or any other part ofthe Supplemental RestraintSystem. Modification could makethe system inoperable.

• Do not work on the system’s com-ponents or wiring. This couldcause the air bags to inflate inad-vertently, possibly seriously injur-ing someone.Working on the sys-tem could also disable the sys-tem so that the air bags would notdeploy in a collision.

• Any work on the SRS system,such as removing, installing,repairing, or any work on thesteering wheel must be per-formed by a qualified Kia techni-cian. Improper handling of the airbag system may result in seriouspersonal injury or death.

WARNING - No modifica-tion

Do not modify any part of the airbag system. Modification couldmake the air bag system ineffectiveor could cause unnecessarydeployment.

3 99


Air bag warning labelAir bag warning labels which are now required by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (CMVSS) are attached to alert dri-ver and passengers of potential risk of air bag system.Note that these government warnings focus on the risk to children, Kia also wants you to be aware of the risks which adults areexposed to. Those have been described in previous pages.

OVQ036401N/OVQ036020N/1VQA2096/1VQA2097/OVQ036302N

(if equipped)(if equipped)(if equipped)


1003

Power steeringPower steering uses energy from theengine to assist you in steering the vehi-cle. If the engine is off or if the powersteering system becomes inoperative,the vehicle may still be steered, but it willrequire increased steering effort.Should you notice any change in theeffort required to steer during normalvehicle operation, have the power steer-ing checked by an Authorized Kia Dealer.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the vehicle is parked for extendedperiods outside in cold weather (below -10 °C/14 °F), the power steering mayrequire increased effort when the engineis first started. This is caused byincreased fluid viscosity due to the coldweather and does not indicate a mal-function.When this happens, increase the engineRPM by depressing accelerator until theRPM reaches 1,500 rpm then release orlet the engine idle for two or three min-utes to warm up the fluid.

STEERING WHEEL

CAUTION• Never hold the steering wheel

against a stop (extreme right orleft turn) for more than 5 secondswith the engine running. Holdingthe steering wheel for more than5 seconds in either position maycause damage to the power steer-ing pump.

• If the power steering drive beltbreaks or if the power steeringpump malfunctions, the steeringeffort will greatly increase.

3 101


Tilt steering A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjustthe steering wheel before you drive. Youcan also raise it to the highest level togive your legs more room when you exitand enter the vehicle.

The steering wheel should be positionedso that it is comfortable for you to drive,while permitting you to see the instru-ment panel warning lights and gauges.

To change the steering wheel angle, pullup the lock release lever (1), adjust thesteering wheel to the desired angle (2),then release the lock-release lever tolock the steering wheel in place. Be sureto adjust the steering wheel to thedesired position before driving.

WARNING • Never adjust the angle of steering

wheel while driving.You may loseyour steering control and causesevere personal injury or acci-dents.

• After adjusting, push the steeringwheel both up and down to becertain it is locked in position.

OVQ036021N


1023

Outside rearview mirror Be sure to adjust mirror angles beforedriving.Your vehicle is equipped with both left-hand and right-hand outside rearviewmirrors. The mirrors can be adjustedremotely with the remote switch. The mir-ror heads can be folded back to preventdamage during an automatic car wash orwhen passing in a narrow street.

Folding the outside rearview mirrorTo fold outside rearview mirror, grasp thehousing of mirror and then fold it towardthe rear of the vehicle.

MIRRORS

WARNING - Rearview mir-rors

• The right outside rearview mirroris convex. Objects seen in themirror are closer than theyappear.

• Use your interior rearview mirroror direct observation to deter-mine the actual distance of fol-lowing vehicles when changinglanes.

CAUTIONDo not scrape ice off the mirrorface; this may damage the surfaceof the glass. If ice should restrictmovement of the mirror, do notforce the mirror for adjustment. Toremove ice, use a deicer spray, or asponge or soft cloth with very warmwater.

OVQ036022N

3 103


Outside rearview mirror heater (if equipped) The outside rearview mirror heater isactuated in connection with the rear win-dow defroster. To heat the outsiderearview mirror glass, push the button forthe rear window defroster.The rearview mirror heater (and rear win-dow defroster) will not operate unless theengine is running.The outside rearview mirror glass will beheated for defrosting or defogging andwill give you improved rear vision ininclement weather conditions. Push thebutton again to turn the heater off. Theoutside rearview mirror heater automati-cally turns off after 20 minutes.

Electric remote control The electric remote control mirror switchallows you to adjust the position of theleft and right outside rearview mirrors. Toadjust the position of either mirror, movethe lever (1) to R or L to select the rightside mirror or the left side mirror, thenpress a corresponding point ( ) on themirror adjustment control to position theselected mirror up, down, left or right.After adjustment, put the lever into neu-tral position to prevent the inadvertentadjustment.

CAUTION• The mirrors stop moving when

they reach the maximum adjust-ing angles, but the motor contin-ues to operate while the switch isdepressed. Do not depress theswitch longer than necessary, themotor may be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust the out-side rearview mirror by hand.Doing so may damage the parts.

OVQ036023N


1043

Automatic mirror adjustment in reversemaneuvers (if equipped)When the transaxle gear is shifted intoreverse (R), the outside rearview mir-ror(s) will automatically be turned down-ward about 5 degrees to improve drivervisibility. It will stay in that position untilthe transaxle shift lever is shifted out ofreverse (R).

L : Both the left and right outsiderearview mirrors will be turneddownward about 5 degrees.

R : Only the right outside rearviewmirror will be turned downwardabout 5 degrees.

Center : Automatic mirror adjustmentfunction is disabled. No mirrorwill be turned downward.

The outside rearview mirror(s) will returnto its previous position automatically ifoutside rearview mirror selection switchis changed to another position, ortransaxle shift lever is shifted out ofreverse (R).

(Examples) If the shift lever is shifted into reverse (R)when the outside rearview mirror selec-tion switch is in L, both the right and leftoutside rearview mirrors will automatical-ly be turned down about 5 degrees.If the outside rearview mirror selectionswitch is set to R while shift lever is inreverse (R), the left outside rearview mir-ror will return to its previous position. Theright outside rearview mirror will notreturn to it’s previous position.If the shift lever is shifted into any otherrange OR the outside rearview mirrorselection switch is set to center, the rightoutside rearview mirror will automaticallyreturn to its original position.

OVQ036024N

3 105


Day/night rearview mirror Adjust the rearview mirror to center onthe view through the rear window. Makethis adjustment before you start driving.

Manual type Make this adjustment before you startdriving and while the day/night lever is inthe day position.Pull the day/night lever toward you toreduce glare from the headlights of vehi-cles behind you during night driving.Remember that you lose some rearviewclarity in the night position.

Electric type The electric rearview mirror automatical-ly controls the glare from the headlightsof the car behind you in nighttime or lowlight driving conditions. The sensormounted in the mirror senses the lightlevel around the vehicle, and through achemical reaction, automatically controlsthe headlight glare from vehicles behindyou.When the engine is running, the glare isautomatically controlled by the sensormounted in the rearview mirror.Whenever the shift lever is shifted intoreverse (R), the mirror will automaticallygo to the brightest setting in order toimprove the drivers view behind the vehi-cle.

WARNING - Rear visibilityDo not place objects in the rear seator cargo area which would interferewith your vision out the rear win-dow.

1VQA2105

Day Night

Day/Night lever

CAUTIONWhen cleaning the mirror, use apaper towel or similar materialdampened with glass cleaner. Donot spray glass cleaner directly onthe mirror as that may cause the liq-uid cleaner to enter the mirror hous-ing.


1063

Type ATo operate the electric rearview mirrorPress the ON/OFF button (1) to turn theautomatic- dimming function on. The mir-ror indicator light will illuminate.Press the ON/OFF button to turn theautomatic- dimming function off. The mir-ror indicator light will turn off.

Type B (with homelink wireless control system)To operate the electric rearview mirrorPress the I button (1) to turn the auto-matic- dimming function on. The mirrorindicator light will illuminate.Press the O button (2) to turn the auto-matic- dimming function off. The mirrorindicator light will turn off.

Conversation mirrorThe mirror is a convenient feature to helpthe front passenger talk with rear pas-sengers without turning the head or bodyrearward.To use the mirror, push the cover andopen it.Adjust mirror angle to the desired posi-tion.Close the cover after use.

1VQA2107

WARNINGDo not adjust the mirror angle ortalk with rear passengers for a longtime while driving. You may loseyour steering control and causesevere personal injury or accidents.

1KMA3084 OVQ036025N

3 107


INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

1. Tachometer 2. Turn signal indicators3. Speedometer4. Engine temperature gauge5. Warning and indicator lights6. Shift position indicator

(Automatic transaxle only)7. Odometer/Trip odometer8. Fuel gauge

�� Type A

�� Type B

OVQ036026N/OVQ036027N


1083

Speedometer The speedometer indicates the forwardspeed of the vehicle.

Odometer/Trip odometerYou can choose the odometer, tripodometer A and trip odometer B bypressing the tripmeter mode button.

OdometerThe odometer indicates the total dis-tance the vehicle has been driven.

GAUGES

OVQ036035NOVQ036028N OVQ036032N

3 109


Trip odometerTRIP A: Trip odometer ATRIP B: Trip odometer BThe trip odometer indicates the distanceof individual trips selected by the driver.Trip odometer A and B can be reset to 0by pressing the reset button for 1 secondor more, and then releasing.

Tachometer The tachometer indicates the approxi-mate number of engine revolutions perminute (rpm).Use the tachometer to select the correctshift points and to prevent lugging and/orover-revving the engine.The tachometer pointer may move slight-ly when the ignition switch is in ACC orON position with the engine OFF. Thismovement is normal and will not affectthe accuracy of the tachometer once theengine is running.

Engine temperature gauge This gauge shows the temperature of theengine coolant when the ignition switchis ON.Do not continue driving with an overheat-ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, referto “Overheating” in the Index.

CAUTIONDo not operate the engine withinthe tachometer's RED ZONE.This may cause severe engine dam-age.

CAUTIONIf the gauge pointer moves beyondthe normal range area toward the“H” position, it indicates overheat-ing that may damage the engine.

OVQ036030N OVQ036031NOVQ036036N


1103

Fuel gaugeThe fuel gauge indicates the approxi-mate amount of fuel remaining in the fueltank.Fuel tank capacity : 80 liters (21 US gallons)The fuel gauge is supplemented by a lowfuel warning light, which will illuminatewhen the fuel tank is nearly empty.

Instrument panel illuminationWhen the vehicle’s parking lights or head-lights are on, rotate the illumination con-trol knob to adjust the instrument panelillumination intensity.The instrument cluster (Type B) illumina-tion intensity can be adjusted by rotatingthe control knob with the headlight switchin any position when the ignition switch isin ON position.

OVQ036033N

WARNING - Fuel gaugeRunning out of fuel can exposevehicle occupants to danger.You must stop and obtain addition-al fuel as soon as possible after thewarning light comes on or when thegauge indicator comes close to theE level.

1VQA2126

3 111


The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system thatdisplays information related to driving,including compass, distance to empty,driving time, average fuel consumptionand outside temperature on the displaywhen the ignition switch is in ON posi-tion. All stored driving information is resetif the battery is disconnected.

Mode selectionThe compass is always displayed untilthe display is turned off.Push the MODE button to select distanceto empty, driving time, average fuel con-sumption and outside temperature func-tions.

CompassThe vehicle compass displays the direc-tion the vehicle is heading.Heading display- E : East- W : West- S : South- N : Northex) NE : North East

✽✽ NOTICEIf new vehicle is first driven, performcalibration procedure as follows.

TRIP COMPUTER (IF EQUIPPED)

1VQA2315Driving time (ET)

Average fuel consumption(AVG)

Outside temperature

OFF

Distance to empty (RANGE)

1VQA2211


1123

Calibration procedureThe compass may not indicate the cor-rect compass direction when you are dri-ving in certain areas (tunnel, parkinggarage, underground parking lot, neartransformer substation, etc.), and the fol-lowing may occur:• The compass headings become inac-

curate.• The compass heading doesn't change

when the vehicle changes direction.• Some compass headings are not dis-

played.• The compass headings are inaccurate

in long distance driving.If the vehicle's compass headingsbecome inaccurate continuously, thecompass should be manually calibratedas follows:

1. Move the vehicle away from any largesteel structures or power generatingcables or equipment.

2. Check the terrestrial deviation anglevalue by pressing and holding theMODE button for 4.5 seconds until thecurrent terrestrial deviation anglevalue appears in the display.

3. If the terrestrial deviation angle valueis different for your country, set the cor-rect angle referring to “Setting thecompass zone” and perform the“Calibration procedure” again.

4. Make sure the vehicle windshieldwipers are turned off.

5. Press and hold the MODE buttonagain for 2~4.5 seconds until the “turn”appears and “DIR” blinks in the displayand release the button.

6. Drive your vehicle in at least 1 com-plete (either clockwise or counter-clockwise) circle at less than 5 km/h (3mph) within 10 minutes until the com-pass heading appears.

7. If the vehicle’s compass headingsbecome inaccurate again, repeatsteps 1 through 6 above.

✽✽ NOTICEIf you press the MODE button beforethe calibration is completed or the vehi-cle is not rotated within 10 minutes after“turn” appears and “DIR” blinks, thecorrection will be cancelled.

1VQA2316

3 113


Setting the compass zoneThis compass must be set to compen-sate for the variation between true northand magnetic north. To set variation:1. Find your current location and terres-

trial deviation angle value on the zonemap.

2. Press and hold the MODE button for4.5 seconds. The current terrestrialdeviation angle value will appear in thedisplay.

3. Release the MODE button and pressthe RESET button repeatedly until thecorrect terrestrial deviation angle valuefor your location appears in the display.

4. Press and hold the MODE button formore than 1 second, and then the dis-play will show a compass direction.

✽✽ NOTICEIf you press the MODE button for lessthan 1 second before new compass zoneis set, the correction is cancelled.Also, if the correction is not completedwithin 30 seconds, the current terrestri-al deviation angle value will blink for 2seconds and the correction is cancelled.

✽✽ NOTICE1. Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.

that is attached to the vehicle using amagnet as anything attached to theroof of the vehicle with a magnet willeffect compass operation.

2. If the compass deviates from the cor-rect indication after repeated adjust-ment, have the compass checked at anauthorized dealer.

3. The compass may not indicate thecorrect compass point in tunnels orwhile driving up or down a steep hill.

(The compass returns to the correctcompass point when the vehicle movesto an area where the geomagnetism isstabilized.)

1VQA2317


1143

Compass zone map

3 115


Distance to empty (“RANGE”shown on display)This mode indicates the estimated dis-tance to empty based on the current fuelin the fuel tank and the amount of fueldelivered to the engine. When theremaining distance is below 50 km (30miles), a blinking “----” symbol will be dis-played.The meter’s working range is from 50 to1500 km (30 to 1500 miles).

✽✽ NOTICE• If the vehicle is not on level ground or

the battery power has been interrupt-ed, the “Distance to empty” functionmay not operate correctly.The trip computer may not registeradditional fuel if less than 6 liters (1.6gallons) of fuel are added to the vehi-cle.

• The fuel consumption and distance toempty values may vary significantlybased on driving conditions, drivinghabits, and condition of the vehicle.

• The distance to empty value is an esti-mate of the available driving distance.This value may differ from the actualdriving distance available.

Driving time (“ET” shown on dis-play)This mode indicates the total time trav-eled since the last driving time reset.Even if the vehicle is not in motion, thedriving time keeps going while the engineis running.The meter’s working range is from0:00~99:59.Pressing the RESET button for less than4 seconds, when the driving time is beingdisplayed, clears the driving time to zero.

1VQA23191VQA2318


1163

Average fuel consumption (“AVG”shown on display)This mode calculates the average fuelconsumption from the total fuel used andthe distance since the last average con-sumption reset. The total fuel used is cal-culated from the fuel consumption input.For an accurate calculation, drive morethan 500 m (0.3 miles).The meter's working range is from 0.0 to99.9 l/100 km (0.0 to 99.9 miles per gal-lon).Pressing the RESET button for less than4 seconds, when the average fuel con-sumption is being displayed, clears theaverage fuel consumption to “- -” until thevehicle is moved to 500 m (0.3 miles).

Outside temperatureThis mode indicates the outside temper-ature around the vehicle.The meter’s working range is from -40°C to 60°C (-40°F~140°F).

Unit conversionThe unit on each mode can be changedby pushing the RESET button for morethan 4 seconds as follows:• Distance to empty: km ↔ MI• Average fuel consumption: l/100km ↔

MPG• Outside temperature: °C ↔ °FThe units on the mode of distance toempty and average fuel consumption arechanged together. However, the outsidetemperature mode display units arechanged separately.

1VQA23221VQA2320 OVQ036040N

3 117


Checking operation All warning lights are checked by turningthe ignition switch ON (do not start theengine). Any light that does not illuminateshould be checked by an Authorized KiaDealer.After starting the engine, check to makesure that all warning lights are off. If anyare still on, this indicates a situation thatneeds attention. When releasing theparking brake, the brake system warninglight should go off. The fuel warning lightwill stay on if the fuel level is low.

Air bag warning light

This warning light will illuminate forapproximately 6 seconds each time youturn the ignition switch to the ON posi-tion.If this indicator does not go out, or if it illu-minates while the vehicle is being driven,see an authorized Kia Dealer for immedi-ate service.

Anti-lock brake system(ABS) warning light

This light illuminates if the key is turnedto ON and goes off in approximately 3seconds if the system is operating nor-mally.If the light stays on, you may have aproblem with your ABS system. Contactan authorized Kia dealer as soon as pos-sible.

Electronic brake forcedistribution (EBD) sys-tem warning light

If two warning lights illumi-nate at the same time whiledriving, your vehicle has aproblem with ABS and EBDsystem.In this case, your ABS system and regu-lar brake system may not work normally.Have the vehicle checked by anAuthorized Kia Dealer as soon as possi-ble.

WARNINGS AND INDICATORS

WARNINGIf the both ABS and Brake warninglights are ON and stay ON, yourvehicle’s brake system will not worknormally. So you may experience anunexpected and dangerous situa-tion during sudden braking. In thiscase, avoid high speed driving andabrupt braking. Have your vehiclechecked by Authorized Kia Dealeras soon as possible.

AIRBAG


1183

Safety belt warning light

If the driver's safety belt is not fastenedwhen the key is turned ON or if it isunfastened after the key is turned ON,the safety belt warning light blinks untilthe belt fastened.

Safety belt warning chime (if equipped)If the driver's safety belt is not fastenedwhen the ignition key is turned ON or if itis unfastened after the key is ON, thesafety belt warning chime will sound forapproximately 6 seconds. At this time, ifthe safety belt is fastened, the chime willstop at once.

High beam indicator

This indicator illuminates when the head-lights are on and in the high beam posi-tion or when the turn signal lever is pulledinto the Flash-to-Pass position.

Engine oil pressurewarning

This warning light indicates the engine oilpressure is low.If the warning light illuminates while dri-ving:1. Drive safely to the side of the road and

stop.2. With the engine off, check the engine

oil level. If the level is low, add oil asrequired.

If the warning light remains on afteradding oil or if oil is not available, call anAuthorized Kia Dealer.

Parking brake & brakefluid warning Parking brake warning This light is illuminated when the parkingbrake is applied with the ignition switch inthe START or ON position. The warninglight should go off when the parkingbrake is released.Low brake fluid level warningIf the warning light remains on, it mayindicate that the brake fluid level in thereservoir is low.If the warning light remains on:1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.2. With the engine stopped, check the

brake fluid level immediately and addfluid as required. Then check all brakecomponents for fluid leaks.

3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks arefound, the warning light remains on orthe brakes do not operate properly.Have it towed to any Authorized KiaDealer for a brake system inspectionand necessary repairs.

CAUTIONIf the engine is not stopped imme-diately after the engine oil pressurewarning light is illuminated, severedamage could result.

3 119


To check bulb operation, check whetherthe parking brake and brake fluid warninglight illuminates when the ignition switchis in the ON position.

Parking start warning chimeIf you drive over 10 km/h (6 mph) with theparking brake applied, the parking startwarning chime will sound.

Front fog light indicator(if equipped)

This light comes on when the front foglights are ON.

Shift pattern indicators(if equipped)

The individual indicators illuminate toshow the automatic transaxle shift leverselection.

Taillight indicator (if equipped)

This light comes on when the taillightsare ON.

Charging system warning

This warning light indicates a malfunctionof either the generator or electricalcharging system.If the warning light comes on while thevehicle is in motion:1. Drive to the nearest safe location.2. With the engine off, check the genera-

tor drive belt for looseness or break-age.

3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob-lem exists somewhere in the electricalcharging system. Have an AuthorizedKia Dealer correct the problem assoon as possible.

Tailgate openwarning light

This warning light comes on when thetailgate is not closed securely.

Door ajar warning light

This warning light illuminates when adoor is not closed securely with the igni-tion in any position.

Door ajar warning chime If a door or tailgate is opened while dri-ving the vehicle over 10 km/h (6 mph),the warning chime will sound.

WARNINGDriving the vehicle with a warninglight on is dangerous. If the brakewarning light remains on, have thebrakes checked and repaired imme-diately by an authorized Kia Dealer.


1203

Immobilizer indicator (if equipped)

This light illuminates when the immobiliz-er key is inserted and turned to the ONposition to start the engine.At this time, you can start the engine.Thelight goes out after the engine is running.If this light blinks when the ignition switchis in the ON position before starting theengine, have the system checked by anauthorized Kia Dealer.

Low fuel level warning

This warning light indicates the fuel tankis nearly empty. When it comes on, youshould add fuel as soon as possible.Driving with the fuel level warning light onor with the fuel level below “E” can causethe engine to misfire and damage thecatalytic converter.

Malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL) (checkengine light)This indicator light is part of the EngineControl System which monitors variousemission control system components. Ifthis light illuminates while driving, it indi-cates that a potential problem has beendetected somewhere in the emissioncontrol system.Generally, your vehicle will continue to bedrivable, but have the system checked byan authorized Kia Dealer promptly.

✽✽ NOTICE A loose fuel filler cap may cause the OnBoard Diagnostic System MalfunctionIndicator Light ( ) in the instrumentpanel to illuminate unnecessarily.Always make sure that the fuel filler capis tight.

Low washer fluid levelwarning indicator

This warning light indicates the washerfluid reservoir is near empty. Refill thewasher fluid as soon as possible.

CAUTION• Prolonged driving with the

Emission Control SystemMalfunction Indicator Light ( ) illuminated may causedamage to the emission controlsystems which could effect dri-vability and/or fuel economy.

• If the Emission Control SystemMalfunction Indicator Light ( )Illuminates, potential catalyticconverter damage is possiblewhich could result in loss ofengine power. Have the EngineControl System inspected as soonas possible by an authorized KiaDealer.

3 121


ESC indicator (Electronic StabilityControl) (if equipped)The ESC indicator will illuminate whenthe ignition switch is turned ON, butshould go off after approximately 3 sec-onds. When the ESC is on, it monitorsthe driving conditions and under normaldriving conditions, the ESC light willremain off. When a slippery or low trac-tion condition is encountered, the ESCwill operate, and the ESC indicator willblink to indicate the ESC is operating.

ESC OFF indicator (if equipped)

The ESC OFF indicator will illuminatewhen the ignition switch is turned ON,but should go off after approximately 3seconds. To switch to ESC OFF mode,press the ESC OFF button. The ESCOFF indicator will illuminate indicatingthe ESC is deactivated. If this indicatorstays on in the ESC ON mode, the ESCmay have a malfunction. Take your car tothe authorized Kia dealer and have thesystem checked.

Cruise indicator (if equipped)CRUISE indicator

The indicator light illuminates when thecruise control system is enabled.

Cruise SET indicator

The indicator light illuminates when thecruise function switch (COAST/SET orRES/ACCEL) is ON.

Lights on warning chimeThe lights on warning chime will sound ifthe headlight switch is left in the 1st or2nd position and the driver’s door isopened.

Key reminder warning chimeIf the driver’s door is opened while theignition key is left in the ignition switch(ACC or LOCK position), the keyreminder warning chime will sound. Thisis to prevent you from locking your keysin the vehicle.

ESC

ESCOFF

CRUISE

SET


1223

Low tire pressure indi-cator

Low tire pressure position indicator

The low tire pressure and position indica-tors illuminate for 3 seconds after the igni-tion key is turned to the "ON" position.If the warning lights do not come on, orcontinuously remain on after the 3-secondbulb check when you turned the ignitionkey to the "ON" position, the Tire PressureMonitoring System is not working properly.If this occurs, have your vehicle checkedby an authorized Kia dealer as soon aspossible.This warning lights will also illuminate ifone or more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated. The low tire pressure posi-tion indicator light will indicate which tire issignificantly under-inflated by illuminatingthe corresponding position light.

You should stop and check your tires assoon as possible. If the warning lights illu-minate while driving, reduce vehicle speedimmediately and stop the vehicle. Avoidhard braking and overcorrecting at thesteering wheel. Inflate the tires to the prop-er pressure as indicated on the vehicle’stire information placard.

TPMS (Tire pressuremonitoring system)malfunction indicator

TPMS malfunction indicator illuminates for3 seconds after the ignition key is turned tothe "ON" position.

If the warning light does not come on, orcontinuously remains on after the 3-sec-ond bulb check when you turned the igni-tion key to the "ON" position, the TirePressure Monitoring System is not work-ing properly. If this occurs, have your vehi-cle checked by an authorized Kia dealer assoon as possible.The warning light also comes on and stayson when there is a problem with the TirePressure Monitoring System.If this happens, the system may not moni-tor the tire pressure. Have the systemchecked by an authorized Kia dealer assoon as possible.

TPMS

WARNINGSignificantly low tire pressuremakes the vehicle unstable and cancontribute to loss of vehicle controland increased braking distances.Continued driving on low pressuretires will cause the tires to overheatand fail. WARNING

• The TPMS cannot alert you tosevere and sudden tire damagecaused by external factors.

• If you feel any vehicle instability,immediately take your foot off theaccelerator and slowly move to asafe position off the road.

3 123


INTERIOR LIGHTS

1VQA2141

1VQA2140

Main control switch

Map light

OFF Any ON OFF

Close ON OFF*2)

ON Any

Map lights operating logic

Main controlswitch status

Door open/close status

DOOR

Open orClose ➜ Open ON

Lamp turns ON, then turns OFF afterabout 20 minutes*1)

Open ➜ Close ON

ON

Lamp dims gradually overa 5-second period*3)

Map light switchON (depressed) DOOR (not depressed)

*1) If other door is opened while the light stays off after about 20 minutes, the light stays onagain for about 20 minutes.

*2) When a door is unlocked by the transmitter, the light stays on for about 30 seconds as longas any door is not opened. When the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK position,the light stays on for about 15 seconds.

*3) If the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the light turns off immediately.

Map lightThe lights are turned ON or OFF based on the status of the doors, main control switchand corresponding light switch.


1243

1VQA2141

1VQA2142

1VQA2333

Dome light - center/rear

Main control switch

Dome light - center (if equipped)

OFF Any

Close ON OFF*2) OFF

ON Any

Dome lights operating logic

Main controlswitch status

Door open/close status

DOOR

Open orClose ➜ Open ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Lamp turns ON, then turns OFFafter about 20

minutes*1)

Lamp dimsgradually over

a 5-secondperiod*3)

Open ➜ Close

OFF

ON

Dome light switchON DOOR OFF

*1) If other door is opened while the light stays off after about 20 minutes, the light stays onagain for about 20 minutes.

*2) When a door is unlocked by the transmitter, the light stays on for about 30 seconds as longas any door is not opened. When the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK position,the light stays on for about 15 seconds.

*3) If the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the light turns off immediately.

Dome lightThe lights are turned ON or OFF based on the status of the doors, main control switchand corresponding light switch.

3 125


1VQA2141

1VQA2311

Main control switch

Tailgate light

Open ON OFFClose

ON Any

Tailgate light operating logic

Main control switch status

Tailgate open/close status

DOOR

OFF

Open orClose ➜ Open

Lamp turns ON, then turns OFF after

about 20 minutesOFF

Close orOpen ➜ Close OFF

ON

OFF

Tailgate light switchDOOR OFF

Tailgate light The lights are turned ON or OFF based on the status of the tailgate, main controlswitch and corresponding light switch.


1263

Door courtesy lamp (if equipped)The door courtesy lamp comes ON whenthe door is opened to assist entering orexiting the vehicle. It also serves as awarning to passing vehicles that the vehi-cle door is open.

Glove box lampThe glove box lamp comes ON when theglove box is opened.The parking lights or headlights must beON for the glove box lamp to function.

OVQ036041N

OVQ036042N

Front

RearOVQ036043N

3 127


Battery saver function • The purpose of this feature is to pre-

vent the battery from being dis-charged. The system automaticallyturns off the small light when the driverremoves the ignition key and opens thedriver- side door.

• With this feature, the parking lights willbe turned off automatically if the driverparks on the side of road at night.If necessary, to keep the lights onwhen the ignition key is removed, per-form the following :1) Open the driver-side door.2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON

again using the light switch on thesteering column.

Rescue mode functionIf your vehicle has any problem on thevehicle network system, the headlights(low beam) and parking lights turn onautomatically with the ignition switch inthe ON position even though the head-light switch is not turned on. At this time,the emergency lighting is not turned offwhen the headlight switch is turned off.

Lighting controlThe light switch has a Headlight and aParking light position.To operate the lights, turn the knob at theend of the control lever to one of the fol-lowing positions:(1) OFF position(2) Parking light position(3) Headlight position

LIGHTING

CAUTIONIf the rescue mode occurs, haveyour vehicle checked by an autho-rized Kia dealer as soon as possi-ble.

OVQ036407N


1283

Parking light position ( )When the light switch is in the parkinglight position (1st position), the tail, posi-tion, license and instrument panel lightsare ON.

Headlight position ( )When the light switch is in the headlightposition (2nd position) the head, tail,position, license and instrument panellights are ON.

High - beam operation To turn on the high beam headlights,push the lever away from you. Pull it backfor low beams.The high-beam indicator will light whenthe headlight high beams are switchedon.To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights on for aprolonged time while the engine is notrunning.

OVQ036408N OVQ036409N OVQ036410N

3 129


Flashing headlights To flash the headlights, pull the levertowards you. It will return to the normal(low-beam) position when released. Theheadlight switch does not need to be onto use this flashing feature.

Turn signals (A)The ignition switch must be on for theturn signals to function. To turn on theturn signals, move the lever up or down.Green arrow indicators on the instrumentpanel indicate which turn signal is oper-ating. They will self-cancel after a turn iscompleted. If the indicator continues toflash after a turn, manually return thelever to the OFF position.

Lane change signals (B)To signal a lane change, move the turnsignal lever slightly and hold it in position.The lever will return to the OFF positionwhen released.If an indicator stays on and does notflash or if it flashes abnormally, one of theturn signal bulbs may be burned out andwill require replacement.

✽✽ NOTICEIf an indicator flash is abnormally quickor slow, bulb may be burned out or havea poor electrical connection in the cir-cuit.

1VQA2133 1VQA2135


1303

Front fog light (if equipped) Fog lights are used to provide improvedvisibility and avoid accidents when visibil-ity is poor due to fog, rain or snow etc.The fog lights will turn on when fog lightswitch (1) is turned to ON after the head-light is turned on.To turn off the fog lights, turn the switchto OFF.

Daytime running light (if equipped)Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can makeit easier for others to see the front of yourvehicle during the day. DRL can be help-ful in many different driving conditions,and it is especially helpful after dawn andbefore sunset.The DRL system will make your high-beam headlights turn OFF when:1. The head light switch is ON.2. The parking brake engaged.3. Engine stops.

WIPERS AND WASHERS

Windshield wipers Operates as follows when the ignitionswitch is turned ON.OFF : Wiper is not in operationINT : Wiper operates intermittently at

the same wiping intervals. Usethis mode in a light rain or mist. Tovary the speed setting, turn thespeed control knob(1). (S : slowoperation, F: fast operation)

CAUTIONWhen in operation, the fog lightsconsume large amounts of vehicleelectrical power. Only use the foglights when visibility is poor orunnecessary battery and generatordrain could occur.

OVQ036051NOVQ03690N

3 131


LO : Normal wiper speedHI : Fast wiper speedMIST: For a single wiping cycle, push the

lever upward and release it withthe lever in the OFF position. Thewipers will operate continuously ifthe lever is pushed upward andheld.

✽✽ NOTICEIf there is heavy accumulation of snowor ice on the windshield, defrost thewindshield for about 10 minutes, oruntil the snow and/or ice is removedbefore using the windshield wipers toensure proper operation.

Auto control (if equipped)The rain sensor located on the upper endof windshield glass senses the amount ofrainfall and controls the wiping cycle forthe proper intervals. The more it rains,the faster the wiper operates. When therain stops, the wiper stops. To vary thespeed setting, turn the speed controlknob (1). (S : slow operation, F: fast oper-ation.) Set the wiper to OFF positionwhen the wiper is not in use.If the wiper switch is set in AUTO modewhen the ignition switch is ON, or thespeed control knob is turned toward theF position when the wiper switch is inAUTO mode, wiper will operate once toperform a self-check of the system. Setthe wiper to OFF position when the wiperis not in use.

OVQ036052N

CAUTIONWhen washing the vehicle, set thewiper switch in the OFF position tostop the auto wiper operation.Wiper may operate and be damagedif the switch is set in AUTO modewhile washing vehicle.Do not remove the sensor coverlocated on the upper end of the pas-senger side windshield glass.Damage to system parts couldoccur and may not be covered byyou vehicle warranty.When the starting the vehicle in win-ter, set the wiper switch in the OFFposition. Otherwise, wipers mayoperate and ice may damage thewindshield wiper blades. Alwaysremove all snow and ice and defrostthe windshield properly prior tooperating the windshield wipers.


1323

Variable intermittent wipersSet the lever to the INT/AUTO positionand choose the desired wiper interval byturning the ring(1).

One - touch wiper For a single wiping cycle, push the leverupward and release it with the lever in theOFF position.The wipers will operate continuously ifthe lever is pushed upward and held.

Windshield washers In the OFF position, pull the lever gentlytoward you to spray washer fluid on thewindshield and to run the wipers 1-3cycles.Use this function when the windshield isdirty.The spray and wiper operation will con-tinue until you release the lever.If the washer does not work, check thewasher fluid level. If the fluid level is notsufficient, you will need to add appropri-ate non-abrasive windshield washer fluidto the washer reservoir.The reservoir filler neck is located in thefront of the engine compartment on thepassenger side.

CAUTIONWhen the ignition switch is ON andthe windshield wiper switch isplaced in the AUTO mode, use cau-tion in the following situations toavoid any injury to the hands orother parts of the body:• Do not touch the upper end of the

windshield glass facing the rainsensor.

• Do not wipe the upper end of thewindshield glass with a damp orwet cloth.

• Do not put pressure on the wind-shield glass.

CAUTION• To prevent possible damage to

the wipers or windshield, do notoperate the wipers when thewindshield is dry.

• To prevent damage to the wiperblades, do not use gasoline,kerosene, paint thinner, or othersolvents on or near them.

• To prevent damage to the wiperarms and other components, donot attempt to move the wipersmanually.

OVQ036053N

3 133


Rear window wiper and washerswitch (if equipped)The rear window wiper and washerswitch is located at the end of the wiperand washer switch lever. Turn the switchto desired position to operate the rearwiper and washer.

- Spraying washer fluid and wipingOFF - Wiper is not in operationINT - Intermittent wiper operation ON - Normal wiper opertion

- Spraying washer fluid and wiping

HORN

To sound the horn, press the horn sym-bol on your steering wheel.Check the horn regularly to be sure itoperates properly.

CAUTIONTo prevent possible damage to thewasher pump, do not operate thewasher when the fluid reservoir isempty.

WARNINGDo not use the washer in freezingtemperatures without first warmingthe windshield with the defrosters;the washer solution could freeze oncontact with the windshield andobscure your vision.

OVQ036054N

CAUTION• To sound the horn, press the area

indicated by the horn symbol onyour steering wheel (see illustra-tion). The horn will operate onlywhen this area is pressed.

• Do not strike the horn severely tooperate it, or hit it with your fist.Do not press on the horn with asharp-pointed object.

OVQ036055N


1343

The defroster heats the window toremove frost, fog and thin ice from theinterior and exterior of the rear window,while engine is running.

To activate the rear window defroster,press the rear window defroster buttonlocated in the center console switchpanel. The indicator on the rear windowdefroster button illuminates when thedefroster is ON.If there is heavy accumulation of snow onthe rear window, brush it off before oper-ating the rear defroster.

The rear window defroster automaticallyturns off after 20 minutes or when theignition switch is turned off. To turn off thedefroster, press the rear windowdefroster button again.

Outside mirror defroster (if equipped)If your vehicle is equipped with the out-side mirror defroster, it will be operatingat the same time when you operate therear window defroster.

DEFROSTER

OVQ036056N

OVQ036057N

Type A

Type B

CAUTION• To prevent damage to the con-

ductors bonded to the inside sur-face of the rear window, never usesharp instruments or windowcleaners containing abrasives toclean the window.

• If you want to defrost and defogon the front windshield, refer to“Windshield Defrosting andDefogging” in this section.

3 135


Front windshield deicer(if equipped)The engine must be running to enablethis feature. To activate the front wind-shield deicer, press the front windshielddeicer button. The indicator on the buttonilluminates when the deicer is ON. Thefront windshield deicer automaticallyturns off after 20 minutes or when theignition switch is turned off. To turn off thedeicer, press the front windshield deicerbutton again.

The hazard warning flasher causes thefront and rear turn signal lights to flashon and off, which serves as a warning toother drivers to exercise caution whenapproaching or passing your vehicle.

To activate the flasher, depress the haz-ard warning flasher switch. This switchoperates in any ignition switch position.To turn the flashers off, depress theswitch again.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

OVQ036059N

OVQ036060N

Type A

Type B

❈ The location of the front windshield deicerbutton may be changed depending on yourmodel.

OVQ036058N


1363

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OVQ036061N

1. Driver’s temperature control knob2. Passenger’s temperature control knob3. Front fan speed control knob4. Air conditioning button (if equipped)5. Air intake control button

6. Rear window defroster button7. Mode selection knob8. Rear temperature control button9. Rear fan speed control knob

3 137


Heating and ventilation (front)Fan speed control knobThe ignition switch must be in the ONposition for fan operation.The fan speed control knob allows you tocontrol the fan speed of the air flowingfrom the ventilation system. To changethe fan speed, turn the knob to the rightfor higher speed or left for lower speed.Setting the mode selection knob to theOFF position turns off the fan.

Air intake control button This is used to select outside (fresh) airposition or recirculated air position.To change the air intake control position,push the control button.

Recirculated air position The indicator light on thebutton is illuminated whenthe recirculated air positionis selected.With the recirculated airposition selected, air frompassenger compartmentwill be drawn through theheating system and heatedor cooled according to thefunction selected.

Outside (fresh) air position The indicator light on thebutton is not illuminatedwhen the outside (fresh) airposition is selected.With the outside (fresh) airposition selected, air entersthe vehicle from outside andis heated or cooled accord-ing to the function selected.

OVQ036062N OVQ036063N


1383

✽✽ NOTICEIt should be noted that prolonged oper-ation of the heating in recirculated airposition will cause fogging of the wind-shield and side windows and the airwithin the passenger compartment willbecome stale.In addition, prolonged use of the airconditioning with the “recirculated airposition” selected, will result in exces-sively dry air in the passenger compart-ment.

Temperature control knobThe temperature control knob allows youto control the temperature of the air flow-ing from the ventilation system. Tochange the air temperature in the pas-senger compartment, turn the knob tothe WARM position for warm and hot airor COOL position for cooler air.• Turn the left knob to control the driver

side air temperature.• Turn the right knob to control the pas-

senger side air temperature.

WARNING• Continued climate control system

operation in the recirculated airposition may allow humidity toincrease inside vehicle whichmay fog the glass and obscurevisibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with airconditioning or heating systemon. It may cause serious harm ordeath due to a drop in the oxygenlevel and/or body temperature.

• Continued climate control systemoperation in the recirculated airposition can cause drowsiness orsleepiness, and loss of vehiclecontrol. Set the air intake controlto the outside (fresh) air positionas much as possible while dri-ving.

OVQ036064N

3 139


Mode selection knob The mode selection knob controls thedirection of the air flow through the venti-lation system.The steps (•) between the air flow posi-tions adjust the direction of the air flow tothe middle position.

Outlet port locations

OVQ036065N

1VQA2147


1403

MAX/ A/C position When you select the MAXA/C mode while the fanspeed is on, the followingsystem settings will be madeautomatically;• the air conditioning system

will be turned on.• the recirculated air position

will be selected.• the face mode will be

selected.If you select MAX A/C mode,you will not be able to cancelthe A/C system operation, orchange the recirculated airmode position.Set the fan speed controlknob to the desired speedand rotate the temperaturecontrol knob to the COOLposition for maximum cool-ing. (outlet port : B, E)

Face position Air flow is directed toward theupper body and face.Additionally, each outlet canbe controlled to direct the airdischarged from the outlet.(outlet port: B, E)

Face - floor position Air flow is directed towardsthe face and the floor.(outlet port: B, C, E, F)

OFF positionThe fan is turned off.

Floor position Most of the air flow is direct-ed to the floor, with a smallamount of the air beingdirected to the windshieldand side window defroster.(outlet port: A, C, D, E, F)

Floor - defrost position Most of the air flow is direct-ed to the floor and the wind-shield with a small amountdirected to the side windowdefrosters.(outlet port: A, C, D, E, F)

Defrost position Most of the air flow is direct-ed to the windshield with asmall amount of air directedto the side windowdefrosters.(outlet port: A, D, E)

Instrument panel ventsIf air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe instrument panel vents. The outletport (B, E) can be opened or closed sep-arately using the horizontal thumbwheel.To close the vent, rotate it left to the max-imum position. To open the vent, rotate itright to the desired position.Also, you can adjust the direction of airdelivery from these vents using the ventcontrol lever as shown.

OFF

MAXA/C

1VQA2148

3 141


Air conditioning button (if equipped) Push the A/C button to turn the air condi-tioning system on (indicator light will illu-minate). Push the button again to turn theair conditioning system off.

1VQA2335/1VQA2168

� Front

� Rear

1. Rear fan speed control knob (from front seat)

2. Rear temperature control button(from front seat)

3. Rear fan speed control knob (from rear seat)

4. Rear mode selection button (from rear seat)

5. Rear temperature control button(from rear seat)

OVQ036066N


1423

Heating and ventilation (rear)Temperature, fan speed and mode of therear climate control system can be con-trolled independently regardless of thefront climate control system operation.However, the front climate control systemshould be operated together for rear airconditioning;1. Set the front fan speed to the desired

position.2. Push the air conditioning button.3. Set the rear temperature, fan speed

and mode to the desired position.Rear fan speed controlFrom front seatSet the rear fan speed control (REAR)knob in the front climate control panel tothe desired position (except R and 0positions).To change the rear fan speed, turn theknob to the right for higher speed or leftfor lower speed.Setting the knob to the OFF(0) positionturns off the rear fan.

From rear seatSet the rear fan speed control (REAR)knob in the front climate control panel tothe R position and set the rear fan speedcontrol knob on the rear control panel tothe desired position.To change the rear fan speed, turn theknob to the right for higher speed or leftfor lower speed.Setting the knob to the OFF(0) positionturns off the rear fan.

1VQA2170OVQ036067N

3 143


Rear temperature controlFrom front seatSet the rear fan speed control (REAR)knob in the front climate control panel tothe desired position (except R and 0positions), and set the rear temperaturecontrol in the front climate control panelto the desired position.To change the rear air temperature, pushthe upper part � of the button for warmerair or push the lower part � of the buttonfor cooler air.The lights located to the right of the reartemperature control will illuminate to indi-cate the selected outlet temperaturerange.

From rear seatSet the rear fan speed control (REAR)knob in the front climate control panel tothe R position and turn the rear tempera-ture control knob on the rear controlpanel to the desired position.To change the rear air temperature, turnthe knob to the right for warmer air or leftfor cooler air.

Rear mode selectionWhen the rear fan speed control (REAR)knob in the front climate control panel isin the any position (except R and 0 posi-tions), the rear mode is selected auto-matically depending on the mode of thefront climate control as follows:• Front climate control is MAX A/C,

or • :Rear air blows from the upper vents onthe rear ceiling.

• Front climate control is or • :Rear air blows from the upper vents onthe rear ceiling and the lower vents onthe right rear trim together.

• Front climate control is OFF, •, ,•, , •, :Rear air blows from the lower vents onthe right rear trim.

1VQA2172

1VQA2338

1VQA2174OVQ036068N


1443

When the rear fan speed control (REAR)knob in the front climate control panel isin the R position, the rear mode is select-ed by pushing the rear mode selectionbutton on the rear control panel as fol-lows:• : Rear air blows from the upper

vents on the rear ceiling.• : Rear air blows from the upper

vents on the rear ceiling and thelower vents on the right rear trimtogether.

• : Rear air blows from the lowervents on the right rear trim.

Rear ventsIf air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe rear vents on the rear ceiling.The vent can be opened or closed sepa-rately using the control lever. To close thevent, move it to the close position ( ).To open the vent, move it to the openposition ( ).Also, you can adjust the direction of airdelivery from these vents by moving theblade.

System operationVentilation1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

1VQA2173 1VQA2175

3 145


Heating1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the outside



desired speed.5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn

the air conditioning system (ifequipped) on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set the modeto the , position.

Air conditioning (if equipped) All Kia Air Conditioning Systems arefilled with environmentally friendly R-134a refrigerant which is not damag-ing to the ozone layer.1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-

tioning button.2. Set the mode to the position.3. Set the air intake control to the outside

air or recirculated air position.4. Set the temperature control to the


desired speed.6. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-

perature control to maintain maximumcomfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired, setthe temperature control to the COOLposition, set the air intake control to therecirculated air position, then set thefan speed control to the highest speed.

CAUTION• When using the air conditioning

system, monitor the temperaturegauge closely while driving uphills or in heavy traffic when out-side temperatures are high. Airconditioning system operationmay cause engine overheating.Continue to use the blower fanbut turn the air conditioning sys-tem off if the temperature gaugeindicates engine overheating.

• When opening the windows inhumid weather air conditioningmay create water droplets insidethe vehicle. Since excessivewater droplets may cause dam-age to electrical equipment, airconditioning should only be runwith the windows closed.


1463

Air conditioning system operation tips • If the vehicle has been parked in direct

sunlight during hot weather, open thewindows for a short time to let the hotair inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of win-dows on rainy humid days, decreasethe humidity inside the vehicle by oper-ating the air conditioning system.

• During air conditioning system opera-tion, you may occasionally notice aslight change in engine speed as theair conditioning compressor cycles on.This is a normal system operationcharacteristics.

• Use the air conditioning system everymonth if only for a few minutes toensure maximum system perfor-mance.

• When using the air conditioning sys-tem, you may notice clear water drip-ping (or even puddling) on the groundunder the passenger side of the vehi-cle. This is a normal system operationcharacteristics.

• Operating the air conditioning systemin the recirculated air position doesprovide maximum cooling, however,continual operation in this mode maycause the air inside the vehicle tobecome stale.

Checking the amount of air con-ditioner refrigerant and compres-sor lubricantWhen the amount of refrigerant is low,the performance of the air conditioning isreduced. Overfilling also has a bad influ-ence on the air conditioning system.Therefore, if abnormal operation isfound, have the system inspected by anauthorized Kia dealer.

CAUTIONThe air conditioning system shouldbe serviced by an authorized Kiadealer. Improper service may causeserious injury.

CAUTIONWhen the performance of the airconditioning system is reduced it isimportant that the correct type andamount of oil and refrigerant isused. Otherwise, damage to thecompressor and abnormal systemoperation may occur.

3 147


AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

1. AUTO (automatic control) button

2. Driver’s temperature control button

3. A/C display

4. Passenger’s temperature control button

5. Dual temperature control selection button

6. Front fan speed control knob

7. Mode selection button

8. Front windshield defrost button

9. Recirculated air position button

10. Rear temperature control button

11. Rear fan speed control knob

12. OFF button

13. Air conditioning button

14. Rear window defrost button

15. Outside air position button

OVQ036069N


1483

Automatic operationThe automatic climate control system iscontrolled by simply setting the desiredtemperature.The Full Automatic Temperature Control(FATC) system automatically controls theheating and cooling system as follows;

1. Push the AUTO button. It is indicatedby AUTO on the display. The modes,fan speeds, air intake and air-condi-tioning will be controlled automaticallyby temperature setting.

2. Push the TEMP button to set thedesired temperature.If the temperature is set to the lowestsetting LO (17°C/62°F), the air condi-tioning system will operate continu-ously.

3. To turn the automatic operation off,press any button except temperaturecontrol button. If you press the modeselection button, air-conditioning but-ton, defrost button, air intake controlbutton or fan speed knob, the selectedfunction will be controlled manuallywhile other functions operate automat-ically.

Regardless of the temperature setting,when using automatic operation, the airconditioning system can automaticallyturn on to decrease the humidity insidethe vehicle, even if the temperature is setto warm.

1VQA2156

CAUTIONNever place anything over the sen-sor located on the instrument panelto ensure better control of the heat-ing and cooling system.

OVQ036070N

3 149


Manual operation The heating and cooling system can becontrolled manually as well by pushingbuttons other than the AUTO button. Inthis case, the system works sequentiallyaccording to the order of buttons select-ed.When pressing any button except AUTObutton while automatic operation, thefunctions of the buttons not selected willbe controlled automatically.Press the AUTO button in order to con-vert to full automatic control of the sys-tem. Temperature control button

The temperature will increase to the maxi-mum 32°C/90°F (HI) by pushing the upbutton. Each push of the button will causethe temperature to increase by 0.5°C/1°FThe temperature will decrease to the mini-mum 17°C/62°F (LO) by pushing the downbutton. Each push of the button will causethe temperature to decrease by 0.5°C/1°FWhen set to the lowest temperature set-ting, the air conditioning will operate con-tinuously.

Dual temperature control selectionbuttonAdjusting the driver and passenger sidetemperature individually 1. Press the DUAL button to operate the

driver and passenger side temperatureindividually. Pressing the right temper-ature control button will automaticallyswitch to the DUAL mode as well.

2. Press the left temperature control toadjust the driver side temperature.Press the right temperature control toadjust the passenger side tempera-ture.

OVQ036071N OVQ036072N


1503

Adjusting the driver and passenger sidetemperature equally1. Press the DUAL button again to deac-

tivate DUAL mode. The passengerside temperature will be set to thesame as the driver side temperature.

2. Press the left temperature control but-ton. The driver and passenger sidetemperature will be adjusted equally.

Temperature conversionIf the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, the temperature mode dis-play will reset to Fahrenheit.This is normal condition. You can switchthe temperature mode betweenFahrenheit to Centigrade as follows;While depressing the AUTO button,depress the OFF button for 3 seconds ormore. The display will change fromFahrenheit to Centigrade, or fromCentigrade to Fahrenheit.

Fan speed control knobThe fan speed can be set to the desiredspeed by turning the fan speed controlknob.The higher the fan speed is, the more airis delivered.Pressing the OFF button turns off thefan.

Air intake control button This is used to select outside (fresh) airposition or recirculated air position.To change the air intake control position,push the control button.

OVQ036073N OVQ036074N

3 151


Recirculated air positionThe indicator light on the but-ton is illuminated when therecirculated air position isselected.With the recirculated air posi-tion selected, air from pas-senger compartment will bedrawn through the heatingsystem and heated or cooledaccording to the functionselected.

Outside (fresh) air positionThe indicator light on the but-ton is illumimated when theoutside (fresh) air position isselected.With the outside (fresh) airposition selected, air entersthe vehicle from outside andis heated or cooled accordingto the function selected.

✽✽ NOTICEIt should be noted that prolonged oper-ation of the heating in recirculated airposition will cause fogging of the wind-shield and side windows and the airwithin the passenger compartment willbecome stale.In addition, prolonged use of the airconditioning with the “recirculated airposition” selected, will result in exces-sively dry air in the passenger compart-ment.

Defrost button Most of the air flow is directed to thewindshield with a small amount of airdirected to the side window defrosters.(outlet port: A, D, E)

WARNING• Continued climate control system

operation in the recirculated airposition may allow humidity toincrease inside vehicle which mayfog the glass and obscure visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with airconditioning or heating system on.It may cause serious harm or deathdue to a drop in the oxygen leveland/or body temperature.

• Continued climate control systemoperation in the reciruclated airposition can cause drowsiness orsleepiness, and loss of vehicle con-trol. Set the air intake control to theoutside (fresh) air position as muchas possible while driving.

OVQ036075N


1523

Mode selection button The mode selection button controls thedirection of the air flow through the venti-lation system.The air flow outlet port is converted asfollows:

Outlet port locations1VQA2147

OVQ036076N

3 153


Face position Air flow is directed toward theupper body and face.Additionally, each outlet canbe controlled to direct the airdischarged from the outlet.(outlet port: B, E)

Face - floor position Air flow is directed towardsthe face and the floor.(outlet port: B, C, E, F)

Floor position Most of the air flow is direct-ed to the floor, with a smallamount of the air beingdirected to the windshieldand side window defroster.(outlet port: A, C, D, E, F)

Floor - defrost position Most of the air flow is direct-ed to the floor and the wind-shield with a small amountdirected to the side windowdefrosters.(outlet port: A, C, D, E, F)

Instrument panel ventsIf air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe instrument panel vents. The outletport (B, E) can be opened or closed sep-arately using the horizontal thumbwheel.To close the vent, rotate it left to the max-imum position. To open the vent, rotate itright to the desired position.Also, you can adjust the direction of airdelivery from these vents using the ventcontrol lever as shown.

Air conditioning button Push the A/C button to turn the air condi-tioning system on (indicator light will illu-minate).Push the button again to turn the air con-ditioning system off.

1VQA2148 OVQ036077N


1543

OFF buttonPush the OFF button to turn off the air cli-mate control system. However you canstill operate the mode and air intake but-tons as long as the ignition switch is ON.

1VQH2167N/1VQA2168

� Front

� Rear

1. Rear fan speed control knob (from front seat)

2. Rear temperature control button(from front seat)

3. Rear fan speed control knob (from rear seat)

4. Rear mode selection button (from rear seat)

5. Rear temperature control button(from rear seat)

OVQ036078N

3 155


Heating and ventilation (rear)Temperature, fan speed and mode of therear climate control system can be con-trolled independently regardless of thefront climate control system operation.However, the front climate control systemshould be operated together for rear airconditioning;1. Set the front fan speed to the desired

position.2. Push the air conditioning button.3. Set the rear temperature, fan speed

and mode to the desired position.Rear fan speed controlFrom front seatSet the rear fan speed control (REAR)knob in the front climate control panel tothe desired position (except R and 0positions).To change the rear fan speed, turn theknob to the right for higher speed or leftfor lower speed.Setting the knob to the OFF(0) positionturns off the rear fan.

From rear seatSet the rear fan speed control (REAR)knob in the front climate control panel tothe R position and set the rear fan speedcontrol knob on the rear control panel tothe desired position.To change the rear fan speed, turn theknob to the right for higher speed or leftfor lower speed.Setting the knob to the OFF(0) positionturns off the rear fan.

1VQA2170OVQ036079N


1563

Rear temperature controlFrom front seatSet the rear fan speed control (REAR)knob in the front climate control panel tothe desired position (except R and 0positions), and set the rear temperaturecontrol in the front climate control panelto the desired position.To change the rear air temperature, pushthe upper part � of the button for warmerair or push the lower part � of the buttonfor cooler air.

From rear seatSet the rear fan speed control (REAR)knob in the front climate control panel tothe R position and turn the rear tempera-ture control knob on the rear controlpanel to the desired position.To change the rear air temperature, turnthe knob to the right for warmer air or leftfor cooler air.

Rear mode selectionWhen the rear fan speed control (REAR)knob in the front climate control panel isin the any position (except R and 0 posi-tions), the rear mode is selected auto-matically depending on the mode of thefront climate control as follows:• Front climate control is :

Rear air blows from the upper vents onthe rear ceiling.

• Front climate control is :Rear air blows from the upper vents onthe rear ceiling and the lower vents onthe right rear trim together.

• Front climate control is , , : Rear air blows from the lower ventson the right rear trim together.

1VQA2172

1VQA2338

1VQA2174OVQ036080N

3 157


When the rear fan speed control (REAR)knob in the front climate control panel isin the R position, the rear mode is select-ed by pushing the rear mode selectionbutton on the rear ceiling as follows:• : Rear air blows from the upper

vents on the rear ceiling.• : Rear air blows from the upper

vents on the rear ceiling and thelower vents on the right rear trimtogether.

• : Rear air blows from the lowervents on the right rear trimtogether.

Rear ventsIf air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe rear vents on the rear ceiling.The vent can be opened or closed sepa-rately using the control lever. To close thevent, move it to the close position ( ).To open the vent, move it to the openposition ( ).Also, you can adjust the direction of airdelivery from these vents by moving theblade.

System operationVentilation1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the outside



desired speed.

Heating1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the outside



desired speed.5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn

the air conditioning system on.• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode

to the , position.

1VQA2173 1VQA2175


1583

Air conditioning All Kia Air Conditioning Systems arefilled with environmentally friendly R-134a refrigerant which is not damag-ing to the ozone layer.1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-

tioning button.2. Set the mode to the position.3. Set the air intake control to the outside

air or recirculated air position.4. Set the temperature control to the


desired speed.6. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-

perature control to maintain maximumcomfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired, setthe temperature control to the minimumLO (17°C/62°F) and set the air intaketo the recirculated air position, then setthe fan speed control to the highestspeed.

Air conditioning system operation tips • If the vehicle has been parked in direct

sunlight during hot weather, open thewindows for a short time to let the hotair inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of win-dows on rainy humid days, decreasethe humidity inside the vehicle by oper-ating the air conditioning system.

• During air conditioning system opera-tion, you may occasionally notice aslight change in engine speed as theair conditioning compressor cycles on.This is a normal system operationcharacteristics.

• Use the air conditioning system everymonth if only for a few minutes toensure maximum system perfor-mance.

• When using the air conditioning sys-tem, you may notice clear water drip-ping (or even puddling) on the groundunder the passenger side of the vehi-cle. This is a normal system operationcharacteristics.

• Operating the air conditioning systemin the recirculated air position doesprovide maximum cooling, however,continual operation in this mode maycause the air inside the vehicle tobecome stale.

CAUTION• When using the air conditioning

system, monitor the temperaturegauge closely while driving uphills or in heavy traffic when out-side temperatures are high. Airconditioning system operationmay cause engine overheating.Continue to use the blower fanbut turn the air conditioning sys-tem off if the temperature gaugeindicates engine overheating.

• When opening the windows inhumid weather air conditioningmay create water droplets insidethe vehicle. Since excessivewater droplets may cause dam-age to electrical equipment, airconditioning should only be runwith the windows closed.

3 159


Checking the amount of air con-ditioner refrigerant and compres-sor lubricantWhen the amount of refrigerant is low,the performance of the air conditioning isreduced. Overfilling also has a bad influ-ence on the air conditioning system.Therefore, if abnormal operation isfound, have the system inspected by anauthorized Kia dealer.

CAUTIONThe air conditioning system shouldbe serviced by an authorized Kiadealer. Improper service may causeserious injury.

CAUTIONWhen the performance of the airconditioning system is reduced it isimportant that the correct type andamount of oil and refrigerant isused. Otherwise, damage to thecompressor and abnormal systemoperation may occur.


1603

Manual climate control systemTo defog inside windshield 1. Select any fan speed.2. Select desired temperature.3. Select the or position.4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected

automatically.If the outside (fresh) air position are notselected automatically, press the corre-sponding button manually.

To defrost outside windshield 1. Set the fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position.2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot

position.3. Select the position.4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected

automatically.

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

OVQ036082N

WARNINGDo not use the or positionduring cooling operation inextremely humid weather. The dif-ference between the temperature ofthe outside air and that of the wind-shield could cause the outer sur-face of the windshield to fog up,causing loss of visibility. In thiscase, set the mode selection knobto the position and fan speedcontrol knob to the lower speed.OVQ036081N

3 161


Automatic climate control systemTo defog inside windshield 1. Select desired fan speed.2. Select desired temperature.3. Press the defrost button ( ).4. The outside (fresh) air position will be

selected automatically.If the outside (fresh) air position are notselected automatically, adjust the corre-sponding button manually.

To defrost outside windshield 1. Set fan speed to the highest (extreme

right) position.2. Set temperature to the extreme hot

(HI) position.3. Press the defrost button ( ).4. The outside (fresh) air position will be

selected automatically.

• For maximum defrosting, set the tem-perature control to the extreme highesttemperature setting and the fan speedcontrol to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desired whiledefrosting or defogging, set the modeto the floor-defrost position.

• Before driving, clear all snow and icefrom the windshield, rear window, out-side rear view mirrors, and all side win-dows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the hoodand air inlet in the cowl grill to improveheater and defroster efficiency and toreduce the probability of fogging upinside of the windshield.

OVQ036304N

WARNINGDo not use the or positionduring cooling operation inextremely humid weather. The dif-ference between the temperature ofthe outside air and that of the wind-shield could cause the outer sur-face of the windshield to fog up,causing loss of visibility. In thiscase, set the mode selection knobto the position and fan speedcontrol knob to the lower speed.OVQ036083N


1623

Defogging logicManual climate control systemTo reduce the probability of fogging upthe inside of the windshield, the air intakecontrol is set to the outside (fresh) airposition automatically if any of followingoccur.• The mode is selected to the , or

while the system is activated.• The ignition switch is turned on while

the mode is selected to the , or.

• The ignition switch is turned off.• The fan is off.• The fan begins to be operated.Press the air intake control button toselect the recirculated air position whilethe ignition switch is on.

How to cancel or return defogging logicof manual climate control system1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.2. Turn the mode selection knob to the

defrost position ( ).3. Push the air intake control button

( ) at least 5 times within 3 sec-onds.

The indicator light in the air intake controlbutton ( ) will blink 3 times with 0.5second of interval. It indicates that thedefogging logic is canceled or returned tothe programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, it is reset as the defog logicstatus.

Automatic climate control systemTo reduce the probability of fogging upinside of the windshield, the air intakecontrol is set to outside (fresh) air posi-tion automatically if any of followingoccur.• The ignition switch is turned on while

the mode is selected to the , .• The OFF button is pushed.• The mode is selected to the or

position.Press the air intake control button toselect the recirculated air position whilethe ignition switch is on.

OVQ036084N

3 163


How to cancel or return defogging logicof automatic climate control system1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.2. Select the defrost position pressing

defrost button ( ).3. While holding the air conditioning but-

ton (A/C) pressed, press the air intakecontrol button ( ) at least 5 timeswithin 3 seconds.

The display panel blinks 3 times with 0.5second of interval. It indicates that thedefogging logic is canceled or returned tothe programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, it is reset as the defog logicstatus.

To keep items from shifting in the cargoarea, you can use the four holders locat-ed in the cargo area to attach the lug-gage net.Contact your authorized Kia dealer toobtain a luggage net.

LUGGAGE NET HOLDER (IF EQUIPPED)

OVQ036085N1VQA2182


1643

If the vehicle has a roof rack, you canload cargo on top of your vehicle.Crossbars and fixing components need-ed to install the roof rack on your vehiclemay be obtained from an authorized Kiadealer.

ROOF RACK (IF EQUIPPED)

1VQA2206

CAUTION• The crossbars should be placed

in the proper load carrying posi-tions prior to placing items ontothe roof rack.

• If the vehicle is equipped with asunroof, be sure not to positioncargo onto the roof rack in such away that it could interfere withsunroof operation.

(Continued)

WARNING • The following specification is the

maximum weight that can beloaded onto the roof rack.Distribute the load as evenly aspossible across the crossbarsand roof rack and secure the loadfirmly.

• The vehicle center of gravity willbe higher when items are loadedonto the roof rack. Avoid suddenstarts, braking, sharp turns,abrupt maneuvers or high speedsthat may result in loss of vehiclecontrol or rollover causing anaccident.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Always drive slowly and turn cor-

ners carefully when carryingitems on the roof rack. Severewind updrafts, caused by passingvehicles or natural causes, cancause sudden upward pressureon items loaded on the roof rack.This is especially true when car-rying large, flat items such aswood panels or mattresses. Thiscould cause the items to fall offthe roof rack and cause damageto your vehicle or those aroundyou.

• To prevent damage or loss ofcargo while driving, check fre-quently before or while driving tomake sure the items on the roofrack are securely fastened.

CAUTION• If the vehicle has a sunroof, do

not position the roof rack loadsso that they could interfere withthe sunroof.

• Loading cargo or luggage abovespecification on the roof rack maydamage your vehicle.

(Continued)• When carrying cargo on the roof

rack, take the necessary precau-tions to make sure the cargo doesnot damage the roof of the vehicle.

• When carrying large objects onthe roof rack, make sure they donot exceed the overall roof lengthor width.

ROOF 75 kg (165 lbs.)RACK EVENLY DISTRIBUTED

3 165


Your new mirror comes with an integrat-ed HomeLink Universal Transceiver,which allows you to program the mirror toactivate your garage door(s), estate gate,home lighting, etc. The mirror actuallylearns the codes from your various exist-ing transmitters.

ProgrammingYour vehicle may require the ignitionswitch to be turned to the ACC positionfor programming and/or operation ofHomeLink. It is also recommended that anew battery be replaced in the hand-heldtransmitter of the device being pro-grammed to HomeLink for quicker train-ing and accurate transmission of theradio-frequency.Follow these steps to train yourHomeLink mirror:

HOMELINK® WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING• When programming the

HomeLink® Wireless ControlSystem, you may be operating agarage door or gate operator.Make sure that people and objectsare out of the way of the movingdoor or gate to prevent potentialharm or damage.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not use HomeLink with any

garage door opener that lacks thesafety stop and reverse feature asrequired by federal safety stan-dards. (This includes any garagedoor opener model manufacturedbefore April 1, 1982.) A garagedoor opener which cannot detectan object, signaling the door tostop and reverse, does not meetcurrent federal safety standards.Using a garage door opener with-out these features increases riskof serious injury or death. Formore information, call 1-800-355-3515 or on the internet atwww.homelink.com.

• Retain the original transmitter forfuture programming procedures(i.e., new vehicle purchase). It isalso suggested that upon the saleof the vehicle, the programmedHomeLink buttons be erased forsecurity purposes (follow step 1in the “Programming” portion ofthis text).

OVQ036305N

Glare detection sensorIndicator light

Homelink buttons


1663

1. When programming the buttons for thefirst time, press and hold the left andcenter buttons ( , ) simultane-ously until the indicator light begins toflash after approximately 20 seconds.(This procedure erases the factory-setdefault codes. Do Not perform this stepto program additional hand-held trans-mitters.)

✽✽ NOTICEFor non rolling code garage door open-ers, follow steps 2 - 3. For rolling code garage door openers,follow steps 2 - 6. For Canadian Programming, please fol-low the Canadian Programming section.For help with determining whether yourgarage is non-rolling code or rollingcode, please refer to the garage dooropeners owner’s manual or contactHomeLink customer service at 1-800-355-3515.

2. Press and hold the button on theHomeLink system you wish to trainand the button on the transmitter whilethe transmitter is approximately 1 to 3inches away from the mirror. Do notrelease the buttons until step 3 hasbeen completed.

3. The HomeLink indicator light will flash,first slowly and then rapidly. When theindicator light flashes rapidly, both but-tons may be released. (The rapid flash-ing light indicates successful program-ming of the new frequency signal.)

✽✽ NOTICESome gate operators and garage dooropeners may require you to replace step#3 with the “cycling” procedure noted inthe “Canadian Programming” sectionof this document.

OVQ036306N

Flashing

OVQ036307N

Flashing

1-3inc

hes

Transmitter

3 167


Rolling code programmingTo train a garage door opener (or otherrolling code equipped devices) with therolling code feature, follow these instruc-tions after completing the “Programming”portion of this text. (A second personmay make the following training proce-dures quicker & easier.) 4. Locate the “learn” or “smart” button on

the device’s motor head unit. Exactlocation and color of the button mayvary by product brand. If there is diffi-culty locating the “learn” or “smart” but-ton, reference the device’s owner’smanual or contact HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or on the internet atwww.homelink.com.

5. Press and release the “learn” or“smart” button on the device’s motorhead unit. You have 30 seconds tocomplete step number 6.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly pressand release the programmedHomeLink button up to three times.The rolling code equipped deviceshould now recognize the HomeLinksignal and activate when theHomeLink button is pressed. Theremaining two buttons may now beprogrammed if this has not previouslybeen done. Refer to the“Programming” portion of this text.

Operating HomeLink To operate, simply press the pro-grammed HomeLink button. Activationwill now occur for the trained product(garage door, security system, entry doorlock, estate gate, or home or office light-ing). For convenience, the hand-heldtransmitter of the device may also beused at any time. The HomeLinkWireless Controls System (once pro-grammed) or the original hand-heldtransmitter may be used to activate thedevice (e.g. garage door, entry door lock,etc.). In the event that there are still pro-gramming difficulties, contact HomeLinkat 1-800-355-3515 or on the internet atwww.homelink.com.

Erasing programmed HomeLinkbuttonsTo erase the three programmed buttons(individual buttons cannot be erased):• Press and hold the left and center

buttons simultaneously, until the indi-cator light begins to flash (approxi-mately 20 seconds). Release both but-tons. Do not hold for longer than 30seconds.

HomeLink is now in the train (or learning)mode and can be programmed at anytime.

OVQ036306N

Flashing


1683

Reprogramming a singleHomeLink buttonTo program a device to HomeLink usinga HomeLink button previously trained,follow these steps:1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink

button. Do NOT release until step 4has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flashslowly (after 20 seconds), position thehand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inchesaway from the HomeLink surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held trans-mitter button (or press and “cycle” - asdescribed in “Canadian Programming”above).

4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash,first slowly and then rapidly. When theindicator light begins to flash rapidly,release both buttons.

The previous device has now beenerased and the new device can be acti-vated by pushing the HomeLink buttonthat has just been programmed. This pro-cedure will not affect any other pro-grammed HomeLink buttons.

Gate operator programming &canadian programmingDuring programming, your hand-heldtransmitter may automatically stop trans-mitting. Continue to press and hold theHomeLink button (note steps 2 through 4in the “Programming” portion of this text)while you press and re-press (“cycle”)your handheld transmitter every two sec-onds until the frequency signal has beenlearned. The indicator light will flashslowly and then rapidly after several sec-onds upon successful training.

AccessoriesIf you would like additional information onthe HomeLink Wireless Control System,HomeLink compatible products, or topurchase other accessories such as theHomeLink® Lighting Package, pleasecontact HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 oron the internet at www.homelink.com.




CAUTIONIf programming a garage dooropener or gate, it is advised tounplug the device during the“cycling” process to prevent possi-ble motor burn-up. WARNING

Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operatethe equipment.IC: 4112104541A Gentex MODEL/FCC ID: NZLSTDHL3

3 169


These compartments can be used tostore small items required by the driveror passengers.

STORAGE COMPARTMENT

WARNING - Flammablematerials

Do not store cigarette lighters,propane cylinders, or other flamma-ble/explosive materials in the vehi-cle. These items may catch fireand/or explode if the vehicle isexposed to hot temperatures forextended periods.

CAUTION• To avoid possible theft, do not

leave valuables in the storagecompartment.

• Always keep the storage com-partment covers closed while dri-ving. Do not attempt to place somany items in the storage com-partment that the storage com-partment cover can not closesecurely.

1VQA2197/1VQA2313/1VQA2192/1VQA2314/1VQA2193


1703

Center console storage (if equipped)These compartments can be used tostore small items required by the driveror front passenger.

FrontCups or small beverage cans may beplaced in the cup holders.

CenterThe center compartment can be lockedand unlocked with a master key.To open the center compartment, makesure it is unlocked, then pull the lever andraise the cover.To remove the bucket, lift it upward.

RearTo open the rear compartment, pull thelever and the compartment will automati-cally open. Close the compartment afteruse.

The center console storage can beremoved and reinstalled.To remove the storage, pull up the frontportion slightly while pressing the releaselever and move it forward.To reinstall the storage, insert the reartap on the bottom of the storage into therear hole on the floor, put the front por-tion slightly on the floor while pressingthe release lever and release the lever.Make sure the compartment is locked inplace.

1VQA2194 1VQA2195 1VQA2196

3 171


Glove boxThe glove box can be locked andunlocked with a master key.To open the glove box, make sure it isunlocked, then pull the handle (1) andthe glove box will automatically open (2).Close the glove box after use.

WARNINGNever leave the removed centerstorage console in the vehicleunsecured. The storage consolecan be thrown about in the vehiclein a sudden stop or an accidentcausing serious injuries or death tothe vehicle occupants. Alwaysmake sure the storage console islocked in place.

1VQA2191

CAUTIONSince key is not fully inserted intothe center console storage key set,do not apply excessive force. Doingso may damage the parts.

WARNINGTo reduce the risk of injury in anaccident or sudden stop, alwayskeep the center console storagecover closed while driving.


1723

Sunglass holder To open the sunglass holder, press thecover and the holder will slowly open.Place your sunglasses in the compart-ment door with the lenses facing out.Push to close.

Side table (if equipped)The side table is located on the inner por-tion of the passenger’s seat.To use the table, pull the table all the wayup until it locks into place. Verify the tableis locked by trying to push it down. If thetable moves down, it is not locked prop-erly.You can extend it by pulling the rear por-tion backward.To fold down the table, pull up the releaselever and press down the edge of thetable.

1VQA2198 OVQ036339

CAUTIONSince key is not fully inserted intothe glove box key set, do not applyexcessive force. Doing so may dam-age the parts.

WARNING To reduce the risk of injury in anaccident or sudden stop, alwayskeep the glove box door closedwhile driving.

CAUTIONMake sure the sunglass holder isclosed while driving.

3 173


Cigarette lighter (if equipped)To operate the cigarette lighter, press it inand release it. When it is heated, it auto-matically pops out ready for use.If the engine is not running, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACC or ON positionfor the lighter to operate.

Ashtray (if equipped)To use the ashtray, press the cover andrelease it.To remove the ashtray to empty or cleanit, lift it upward and pull it out.

INTERIOR FEATURES

1VQA2185 1VQA2186

CAUTION• Do not hold the lighter in after it is

already heated because it willoverheat.

• Only a genuine Kia lighter shouldbe used in the cigarette lightersocket. The use of plug-in acces-sories (shavers, hand-held vacu-ums, and coffee pots, for exam-ple) may damage the socket orcause electrical failure.

• If the lighter does not pop outwithin 30 seconds, remove it toprevent overheating.


1743

Cup holder

FrontTo use the cup holders, pull the cup hold-er cover out. Push the cover to close afteruse.

WARNING - Hot liquids• Do not place uncovered cups of

hot liquid in the cup holder whilethe vehicle is in motion. If the hotliquid spills, you could be burned.Such a burn to the driver couldcause a loss of control of thevehicle.

• To reduce the risk of personalinjury in the event of sudden stopor collision, do not place uncov-ered or unsecured bottles, glass-es, cans, etc., in the cup holderwhile the vehicle is in motion.

1VQA2199

CAUTIONDo not place heavy cups or cans incup holders. Cup holders could bedamaged.

WARNING - Ashtray use• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtrays

as waste receptacles.• Putting lit cigarettes or matches

in an ashtray with other com-bustible materials may cause afire.

3 175


Center (if equipped)Cups or small beverage cans may beplaced in the cup holders.The storage can be removed and rein-stalled.To remove the storage, pull up the rearportion slightly after moving the lockingtap to the unlock position and move itrearward.To reinstall the storage, insert the fronttap on the bottom of the storage into thefront hole on the floor, put the rear por-tion on the floor and move the locking tapto the lock position. Make sure the com-partment is locked in place.

RearCups or small beverage cans may beplaced in the cup holders.

Shopping bag holder FrontTo use the holder, push the lower portion.

1VQA2202

CAUTIONDo not hang a bag weighing morethan 3 kg (7 lbs.). It may cause dam-age to the shopping bag holder.

OVQ036234N OVQ036090N


1763

Rear✽✽ NOTICEDo not hang heavy bags, since those maydamage the holder.

Clothes hanger SunvisorUse the sunvisor to shield direct lightthrough the front or side windows.To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.To use a sunvisor for a side window, pullit downward, unsnap it from the bracket(1) and swing it to the side (2).Adjust the sunvisor forward or backward(3).To use the vanity mirror, pull down thevisor and pull up the mirror cover (4).

1VQA2201

CAUTIONDo not hang heavy clothes, sincethose may damage the hook.

OVQ036308N OVQ036233N

3 177


CAUTION - Vanity mirror (if equipped)

Close the vanity mirror coversecurely and return the sunvisor toits original position after use. If thevanity mirror is not closed securely,the lamp will stay on and couldresult in battery discharge and pos-sible sunvisor damage.

1VQA2188

1VQA2190

Front (Type B)

Rear1VQA2188A

1VQA2189

Front (Type A)

Center (if equipped)

(1) : It can be used when the ignition switch is in ACC or ON position.(2), (3), (4) : It can be used regardless of the ignition switch position.

Power outletThe power outlets are designed to provide power for mobile telephones or otherdevices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. The devices shoulddraw less than 10 amps with the engine running.


1783

Digital clockWhenever the battery terminals, relatedfuses are disconnected, you must resetthe time.When the ignition switch is in the ACC orON position, the clock buttons operate asfollows:

• HOUR:Pressing the “H” button with your fin-ger, a pencil or similar object willadvance the time displayed by onehour.

• MINUTE:Pressing the “M” button with your fin-ger, a pencil or similar object willadvance the time displayed by oneminute.

• RESET:To clear away minutes, press the “R”button with your finger, a pencil or sim-ilar object. Then the clock will be setprecisely on the hour.For example, if the “R” button ispressed while the time is between 9:01and 9:29, the display will be reset to9:00.9:01 ~ 9:29 display changed to 9:009:30 ~ 9:59 display changed to 10:00

To change the 12 hour format to the 24hour format, press the “R” button formore than 5 seconds.For example, if the “R” button is pressedfor more than 5 seconds while the time is10:15 p.m., the display will be changed to22:15.

CAUTION• Use power outlet only when the

engine is running and remove theaccessory plug after use. Usingthe accessory plug for prolongedperiods of time with the engineoff could cause the battery to dis-charge.

• Only use 12V electric accessorieswhich are less than 10A in elec-tric capacity.

• Adjust the air-conditioner orheater to the lowest operatinglevel when using the power outlet.

• Close the cover when not in use.• Some electronic devices can

cause electronic interferencewhen plugged into a vehicle’spower outlet. These devices maycause excessive audio static andmalfunctions in other electronicsystems or devices used in yourvehicle.

OVQ036092N

3 179


Glass antennaWhen the radio power switch is turned onwhile the ignition key is in either the ONor ACC position, your car will receiveboth AM and FM broadcast signalsthrough the antenna in the rear windowglass or quarter glass.

The steering wheel audio remote controlbutton is installed to promote safe dri-ving.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not operate audio remote controlbuttons simultaneously.

MODEPress the MODE button to select Radio,Tape (if equipped) or CD (compact disc).Each press of the button changes thedisplay as follows:

MUTE• Pull the MUTE button to deactivate the

sound.• Once again pull the MUTE button to

reactivate the sound.

VOL (�/�) • Press the VOL (�) button to increase

volume.• Press the VOL (�) button to decease

volume.

ANTENNA

1VQA2210

CAUTION• Do not clean the inside of the rear

window glass or quarter glasswith a cleaner or use a scraper toremove any foreign deposits asthis may cause damage to theantenna elements.

• Avoid adding metallic coatingsuch as Ni, Cd, and so on. Thesecan interfere with AM/FM recep-tion.

AUDIO REMOTE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

OVQ036091N


1803

How car audio worksAM and FM radio signals are broadcastfrom transmitter towers located aroundyour city. They are intercepted by theradio antenna on your car. This signal isthen received by the radio and sent toyour car speakers.When a strong radio signal has reachedyour vehicle, the precise engineering ofyour audio system ensures the best pos-sible quality reproduction. However, insome cases the signal coming to yourvehicle may not be strong and clear. Thiscan be due to factors such as the dis-tance from the radio station, closeness ofother strong radio stations or the pres-ence of buildings, bridges or other largeobstructions in the area.

AM broadcasts can be received atgreater distances than FM broadcasts.This is because AM radio waves aretransmitted at low frequencies. Theselong, low frequency radio waves can fol-low the curvature of the earth rather thantravelling straight out into the atmos-phere. In addition, they curve aroundobstructions so that they can provide bet-ter signal coverage.

FM broadcasts are transmitted at highfrequencies and do not bend to follow theearth's surface. Because of this, FMbroadcasts generally begin to fade atshort distances from the station. Also,FM signals are easily affected by build-ings, mountains, or other obstructions.These can result in certain listening con-ditions which might lead you to believe aproblem exists with your radio. The fol-lowing conditions are normal and do notindicate radio trouble:

AUDIO SYSTEM

¢ ¢ ¢

JBM001

¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢

JBM002 JBM003

FM reception AM reception FM radio station

3 181


• Fading - As your car moves away fromthe radio station, the signal will weakenand sound will begin to fade. When thisoccurs, we suggest that you selectanother stronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals orlarge obstructions between the trans-mitter and your radio can disturb thesignal causing static or fluttering nois-es to occur. Reducing the treble levelmay lessen this effect until the distur-bance clears.

• Station Swapping - As a FM signalweakens, another more powerful sig-nal near the same frequency maybegin to play. This is because yourradio is designed to lock onto the clear-est signal. If this occurs, select anoth-er station with a stronger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signalsbeing received from several directionscan cause distortion or fluttering. Thiscan be caused by a direct and reflect-ed signal from the same station, or bysignals from two stations with closefrequencies. If this occurs, selectanother station until the condition haspassed.

Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio When a cellular phone is used inside thevehicle, noise may be produced from theaudio equipment. This does not meanthat something is wrong with the audioequipment. In such a case, use the cellu-lar phone at a place as far as possiblefrom the audio equipment.

¢ ¢ ¢

JBM004 JBM005

CAUTIONWhen using a communication sys-tem such a cellular phone or a radioset inside the vehicle, a separateexternal antenna must be fitted.When a cellular phone or a radio setis used with an internal antennaalone, it may interfere with the vehi-cle's electrical system and adverse-ly affect safe operation of the vehi-cle.

WARNINGDon’t use a cellular phone whenyou are driving, You must stop at asafe place to use a cellular phone.


1823

Care of cassette tapes (if equipped)• Because the thickness of a cassette

tape with the total playback time ofover 60 minutes (C-60) are too thin, wesuggest that you do not use any ofthem to avoid having tapes being tan-gled.

• To achieve better sound quality, period-ically clean the tape head using a cot-ton stick with colorless alcohol (onceper month).

• If a tape is too loose, fasten it to reel bywinding with objects like a pencil.

• Because dust or foreign objects on acassette tape may damage the play-back head, always store tapes in theircases when not in use.

• Make sure cassette tapes are keptaway from magnetic devices (TV,stereo system, etc) in order to achievebetter sound quality.

• Be certain that no objects or substancesother than cassette tapes are insertedinto the cassette tape player.

• Because tape media can be distortedwhen exposed to direct sunlight, Donot leave cassette tapes on the seats,dashboard or near the back wind-shield.

Care of disc (if equipped)• If the temperature inside the car is too

high, open the car windows for ventilationbefore using your car audio.

• It is illegal to copy and useMP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE files withoutpermission(If equipped with M465, useonly MP3/WMA, If equipped with M445,use only CD-DA). Use CDs that are cre-ated only by lawful means.

• Do not apply volatile agents such asbenzene and thinner, normal cleanersand magnetic sprays made for ana-logue disc onto CDs.

• To prevent the disc surface from get-ting damaged. Hold and carry CDs bythe edges or the edges of the centerhole only.

• Clean the disc surface with a piece of softcloth before playback (wipe it from thecenter to the outside edge.)

• Do not damage the disc surface orattach pieces of sticky tape or paperonto it.

• Make sure on undesirable matter otherthan CDs are inserted into the CDplayer (Do not insert more than oneCD at a time).

• Keep CDs in their cases after use toprotect them from scratches or dirt.

• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs may not operatenormally according to manufacturingcompanies or making and recordingmethods. In such circumstances, if youstill continue to use those CDs, theymay cause the malfunction of your caraudio system.

✽✽ NOTICE - Playing anIncompatible Copy-ProtectedAudio CD

Some copy-protected CDs, which do notcomply with the international audio CDstandards(Red Book), may not play onyour car audio. Please note that if youtry to play copy protected CDs and theCD player of your car audio is not per-forming to your expectation, this may becaused by those CDs and not a defect inthe device itself. Please replace thoseCDs.

3 183


1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUME Control Knob

2. BAND (AM/FM) Select Buttons

3. TUNE Select/AUDIO Control Knob

4. AUTO SEEK Select Button

5. CD SCAN Button

6. EQ Button

7. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

JBM445UR

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (M445) (IF EQUIPPED)


1843

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob• The radio unit may be operated when

the ignition key is in the “ACC”or “ON”position. Press the knob to switch thepower on. The LCD shows the radiofrequency in radio mode, and displaysthe CD track in CD mode. To switch thepower off, press the knob again.

• Push the FM/AM or CD to turn on thatfunction without pushing the PowerON-OFF control knob.

VOLUME ControlRotate the knob clockwise to increasethe volume and turn the knob counter-clockwise to reduce the volume.

2. BAND SelectorFM Selection Button Pressing the button changes theFM1 and FM2 bands.

AM(MW, LW) Selection Button Pressing the button selects theAM band. AM mode is displayed on theLCD.

3. TUNE Select/AUDIO ControlKnob

Rotate the knob clockwise to increasethe frequency and turn the knob counter-clockwise to reduce the frequency.

Mode Select KnobPressing the MODE knob changes theBASS, MID-RANGE, TREBLE, FADERand BALANCE mode.The mode selected is shown on the dis-play.After selecting each mode, rotate themode select knob clockwise or counter-clockwise.

BASS ControlTo increase the BASS, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the BASS,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

MID-RANGE ControlTo increase the MID-RANGE, rotate theknob clockwise, while to decrease theMID-RANGE, rotate the knob counter-clockwise.

TREBLE ControlTo increase the TREBLE, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the TRE-BLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

FADER ControlRotate the control knob clockwise toemphasize rear speaker sound (frontspeaker sound will be attenuated). Whenthe control knob is turned counterclock-wise, front speaker sound will be empha-sized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-ated).

BALANCE ControlRotate the knob clockwise to emphasizeright speaker sound (left speaker soundwill be attenuated). When the controlknob is turned counterclockwise, leftspeaker sound will be emphasized (rightspeaker sound will be attenuated).

4. AUTO SEEK Select Button(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the AUTO SEEK select button.When the side is pressed, the unitwill automatically tune to the next higherfrequency and when the side ispressed, it will automatically tune to thenext lower frequency.AM

FM

3 185


5. CD SCAN ButtonWhen you Press the button, frequency ischanged and the next channel isreceived automatically.To stay on a station, press the CD SCANbutton again.

6. EQ ButtonPress the EQ button to select the CLAS-SIC, POPS, ROCK, JAZZ and OFFMODE for the desired tone quality. Eachpress of the button changes the displayas follows;

7. PRESET STATION SelectButtons

Six stations for AM, FM1 and FM2respectively can be preset in the elec-tronic memory circuit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONSSix AM and twelve FM stations may beprogrammed into the memory of theradio. Then, by simply pressing the AM/FM band select buttons and/or one of thesix station select buttons, you may recallany of these stations instantly.

To program the stations, follow thesesteps:

• Press AM/FM selector to set the bandfor AM, FM1 and FM2.

• Select the desired station to be storedby seek or manual tuning.

• Determine the preset station selectbutton you wish to use to access thatstation.

• Press and hold the station select but-ton for more than 0.8 seconds. A selectbutton indicator will show in the displayindicating which select button you havedepressed. The frequency display willflash after it has been stored into thememory. You should then release thebutton, and proceed to program thenext desired station. A total of 18 sta-tions can be programmed by selectingone AM and two FM stations per but-ton.

• When completed, any preset stationmay be recalled by selecting AM, FM1or FM2 band and the appropriate sta-tion button.

CAUTION• Do not place beverages close to

the audio system. The audio sys-tem mechanism may be damagedif you spill them.

• Do not strike or allow anything toimpact the audio system, damageto the system mechanisms couldoccur.

CLASSIC➟POPS➟ROCK➟JAZZ➟OFF


1863

1. CD Select Button

2. TRACK UP/DOWN Button

3. FF/REW Button

4. REPEAT (RPT) Button

5. CD SCAN (BSM) Button

6. CD EJECT Button

7. RANDOM (RDM) Button

JBM445NA

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (M445) (IF EQUIPPED)

3 187


1. CD Select Button• Insert the CD with the label facing

upward.• Insert the CD to start CD playback,

during radio operation.• When a disc is in the CD deck, if you

press the CD button the CD player willbegin playing even if the radio player isbeing used.

• The CD player can be used when theignition switch is in either the “ON” or“ACC” position.

• Push the CD button to turn on thatfunction without pushing the PowerON-OFF control knob.

✽✽ NOTICE• Do not stick paper or tape etc., on the

label side or the recording side of anydiscs, as it may cause a malfunction.

• The unit cannot play a CD-R(Recordable CD) and CD-RW(Rewritable CD) that is not final-ized. Please refer to the manual of CD-R/CD-RW recoder or CD-R/CD-RWsoftware for more information onfinalization process.

• Depending on the recording status,some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not beplayed on this unit.

2. TRACK UP/DOWN Button• The desired track on the disc currently

being played can be selected using thetrack number.

• Press button once to skip forwardto the beginning of the next track.Press within a second after play-back begins to quickly move backwardthrough a CD.If you press after more than a sec-ond, it will take you to the beginning ofthe track you are now listening to.

3. FF/REW Button If you want to fast forward or reversethrough the compact disc track, push andhold the FF or REW button.When you release the button, the com-pact disc player will resume playing.

4. REPEAT (RPT) Button• To repeat the track you are currently

listening to, press the RPT button. Tocancel, press it again.

• If you do not release RPT operationwhen the track ends, it will automati-cally be replayed.This process will be continued until youpush the button again or turn thePower OFF then ON.

5. CD SCAN Button• To playback the first 10 seconds of

each track, press the CD SCAN button.• Press the CD SCAN button again with-

in 10 sec. when you have reached thedesired track.

6. CD EJECT ButtonWhen the button is pressed with a CDloaded, the CD will eject.Forcing to eject : To force to eject a CD,press this button for more than 3 sec-onds.(Do this only when a CD is jammed andyou can not eject it in the normal way -e.g.) in case that you have inserted 2CDs by mistake)

7. RANDOM (RDM) ButtonWith random, you can listen to the tracksin random, rather than sequential order.To use random, do the following:Press the RDM button to listen to record-ed tracks in random sequence. PressRDM again to cancel or turn the powerOFF then ON.The unit defaults to playingtracks in sequential order.


1883

✽✽ NOTICE• To assure proper operation of the unit,

keep the vehicle interior temperaturewithin a normal range by using thevehicle's air conditioning or heatingsystem.

• When replacing the fuse, replace itwith a fuse having the correct capaci-ty.

• All stored bookmarks are all erasedwhen the car battery is disconnectedor power to the vehicle is lost. If thisoccurs, the bookmarks will have to bereset.

• This equipment is designed to be usedonly in a 12 volt DC battery systemwith negative ground.

• This unit is made of precision parts.Do not attempt to disassemble oradjust any parts.

• When driving your vehicle, be sure tokeep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

• Do not expose this equipment (includ-ing the speakers and CD) to water orexcessive moisture.

CAUTION• Do not insert warped or poor

quality discs into the CD playeras damage to the unit may occur.

• Do not insert anything like coinsinto the player slot as damage tothe unit may occur.

• Do not place beverages close tothe audio system. The playbackmechanism may be damaged ifyou spill them.


• Off-road or rough surface drivingmay cause the compact disc toskip. Do not use the compactdisc when driving in such condi-tions as damage to the compactdisc face could occur.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not attempt to grab or pull the

compact disc out while the disc isbeing pulled into the audio unitby the self-loading mechanism.Damage to the audio unit andcompact disc could occur.

• Avoid using recorded compactdiscs in your audio unit. Originalcompact discs are recommendedfor best results.

3 189



2. AUDIO Select Button

3. BAND Select Button

4. CD SCAN Button

5. EQ Button


7. TUNE Select/AUDIO Control knob

8. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

JBM455UR



1903



the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON"position. Press the button to switch thepower on. The LCD shows the radiofrequency in the radio mode, the tapedirection indicator in the tape mode orCD/MP3 track in the CD/MP3 mode. Toswitch the power off, press the buttonagain.

• Push the FM/AM, TAPE or CD/MP3 toturn on that function without pushingthe Power ON-OFF control knob.

VOLUME Control Rotate the knob clockwise to increasethe volume and turn the knob counter-clockwise to reduce the volume.

2. AUDIO Select ButtonPressing the AUDIO button changes theBASS, MID-RANGE, TREBLE, FADERand BALANCE mode.The mode selected is shown on the dis-play.After selecting each mode, rotate theAudio control knob clockwise or counter-clockwise.




FADER ControlTurn the control knob clockwise toemphasize rear speaker sound (frontspeaker sound will be attenuated). Whenthe control knob is turned counterclock-wise, front speaker sound will be empha-sized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-ated).

BALANCE ControlRotate the knob clockwise to emphasizeright speaker sound (left speaker soundwill be attenuated). When the controlknob is turned counter clockwise, leftspeaker sound will be emphasized (rightspeaker sound will be attenuated).

3. BAND Select ButtonPressing the FM/AM button changes theAM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The modeselected is shown on the display.

4. CD SCAN ButtonWhen you press the button, frequency ischanged and the next channel isreceived automatically.To stay on a station, press the CD SCANbutton again.



Press the AUTO SEEK select button.When the side is pressed, the unitwill automatically tune to the next higherfrequency and when the side ispressed, it will automatically tune to thenext lower frequency.

3 191


7.TUNE Select/Audio Control KnobRotate the knob clockwise to increasethe frequency and turn the knob counter-clockwise to reduce the frequency.



HOW TO PRESET STATIONSSix AM and twelve FM stations may beprogrammed into the memory of theradio. Then, by simply pressing theAM/FM band select button and/or one ofthe six station select buttons, you mayrecall any of these stations instantly. Toprogram the stations, follow these steps:

• Press AM/FM selector to set the bandfor AM, FM1 and FM2.

• Select the desired station to be storedby seek or manual tuning.

• Determine the preset station selectbutton you wish to use to access thatstation.

• Press and hold the station select but-ton for more than 0.8 seconds. A selectbutton indicator will show in the displayindicating which select button you havedepressed. The frequency display willflash after it has been stored in to thememory. You should then release thebutton, and proceed to program thenext desired station. A total of 18 sta-tions can be programmed by selectingone AM and two FM stations per but-ton.



the audio system. The playbackmechanism may be damaged ifyou spill them.



1923

1. TAPE PROGRAM Button

2. TAPE EJECT Button

3. AUTO MUSIC SEARCH (AMS) Button

4. FF/REW Button


6. DOLBY Button

7. EQ Button

JBM455UR

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (M455) (IF EQUIPPED)

3 193


1. TAPE PROGRAM Button• This allows you to play the reverse side

of the tape by merely depressing theprogram button. An arrow will appear inthe display to show tape direction.

• Push the TAPE button while the tape isin the tape deck, to turn on that func-tion without pushing the Power ON-OFF control knob.

2. TAPE EJECT Button• When the button is pressed with a

cassette loaded, the cassette will eject.• When the button is pressed during

FF/REW mode, the cassette will eject.

3. AUTO MUSIC SEARCH (AMS)Button

Press the button to find the starting pointof each song in a prerecorded musictape. The quiet space between songs(must have at least 4 sec. gap) can beidentified by the AUTO MUSIC SEARCHbutton.

• Pressing the button will play thebeginning of the next music segment.

• Pressing the button will start replayat the beginning of the music just lis-tened to.

• To stop FF or REW action, press thebutton again.

4. FF/REW Button• Forward tape winding starts when the

FF button is pressed during PLAY orREW mode.

• Tape PLAY starts when the FF buttonis pressed again during FF mode.

• Tape rewinding starts when the REWbutton is pressed during PLAY or FFmode.

• Tape PLAY starts when the REW but-ton pressed again during REW mode.


listening to, press the RPT button. Tocancel, press again.

• If you do not release RPT operationwhen the track ends, it will automati-cally be replayed.This process will be continued until youpush the button again or turn thepower OFF then ON.

6. DOLBY ButtonIf you get background noise during tapePLAY, you can reduce this considerablyby merely pressing the DOLBY button. Ifyou want to cancel the DOLBY feature,press the button again.




1943




• The preset station frequencies are allerased when the car battery is discon-nected. Therefore, all data will have tobe set again if this should occur.

• Do not add any oil to the rotatingparts. Keep magnets, screwdriversand other metallic objects away fromthe tape mechanism and head.



(Continued)

(Continued)• When driving your vehicle, be sure to

keep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

• Do not expose this equipment (includ-ing the speakers and tape) to water orexcessive moisture.

CAUTION• Do not insert anything like coins

into the player slot as damage tothe unit may occur.



3 195


1. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button


3. FF/REW Button



6. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button

7. SCROLL Button

8. EQ Button

9. CD EJECT Button

10. CD SCAN Button

11. FILE SEARCH Knob

(TUNE Select Knob)

12. DIRECTORY SEARCH (DIR) Button

JBM455UR

COMPACT DISC PLAYER (M455) (IF EQUIPPED) - Compatible with MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE


1963

1. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button• Insert the CD with the label facing

upward.• Insert the CD to start CD playback,

during radio operation or cassette tapeplayback.

• If you press the CD button while a discis in the CD deck, the CD player willbegin playing even if the radio or cas-sette player is being used.





• The unit can play a multi-session CD-R (recordable CD) and CD-RW(rewritable CD) that consists of morethan two sessions.Please refer to the manual of CD-R/CD-RW recoder or CD-R/CD-RWsoftware for more information onfinalization process.

• Depending on the recording status,some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not beplayed on this unit.

✽✽ NOTICEPlayback of MP3, AAC and WMA fileformats are supported. Load to playtime for these formats may be longerdue to the compressed nature of thesediscs.



• Press button once to skip forwardto the beginning of the next track.Press within a second after play-back begins to quickly move backwardthrough a CD.If you press after more than a sec-ond, it will take you to the beginning ofthe file you are now listening to.

3. FF/REW Button If you want to fast forward or reversethrough the compact disc track, push andhold the FF or REW button.When you release the button, the compactdisc player will resume playing.


listening to, press the RPT button. Tocancel, press it again.

• To repeat the music within selectedfolder, press the RPT button for morethan 0.8 seconds. To cancel, press itagain. (MP3 CD only)

• If you do not release RPT operationwhen the track ends, it will automati-cally be replayed.This process will be continued until youpush the button again or turn the powerOFF then ON.

5. RANDOM (RDM) ButtonWith random, you can listen to the tracksin random, rather than sequential order.To use random, do the following:• Press the RDM button to listen to

recorded tracks in random sequence.Press RDM again to cancel or turn thepower OFF then ON. The unit defaultsto playing tracks in sequential order.

• To listen to the music within the select-ed folder in random order, press theRDM button within a second. To can-cel, press it again or turn the powerOFF then ON. (MP3 CD only)

3 197


6. BOOKMARK (MARK) ButtonWhen the CD player unit is operating, thedesired track on the disc can be book-marked by using the MARK button.(MP3CD only)

• Press the MARK button for more than0.8 seconds to bookmark the desiredtrack.“M” will be displayed on the LCD and“MEMORY(1~50)” will display forapproximately five seconds with beepsound.To play a bookmarked track, press theMARK button within 0.8 seconds andselect the bookmarked track to play.

• To erase a bookmarked track, pressthe MARK button for more than 0.8seconds. The unit will beep once whenthe bookmark is erased.

✽✽ NOTICETracks stored on Mark Memory will beautomatically erased after you eject CDsthat contain those tracks.

7. SCROLL ButtonPress the button, and you can check thefile names with more than 16 characterson MP3 CD(max 34 caracters.).

The button doesn’t work on file namesless than 16 characters.


9. CD EJECT ButtonWhen the button is pressed with a CDloaded, the CD will eject.Forcing to eject : To force to eject a CD,press this button for more than 3 sec-onds.(Do this only when a CD is jammed andyou can not eject it in the normal way -e.g.) in case that you have inserted 2CDs by mistake)


each track, press the CD SCAN buttonmore than 0.8 seconds.

• To playback the first 10 seconds ofeach track in the selected folder, pressthe CD SCAN button within 0.8 sec-onds. (MP3 CD only)

• Press the CD SCAN button again with-in 10 sec. when you have reached thedesired track.

11. FILE SEARCH Knob (TUNE Select Knob)

• You can skip the track (file) by turningthe FILE SEARCH knob clockwise orcounterclockwise.After selecting the desired track (file),press the FILE SEARCH knob to play-back the track (file).If you do not press the FILE SEARCHknob within five seconds, the searchwill stop.

12. DIRECTORY SEARCH (DIR)Button

• You can move through the folder bypushing the DIR button to up ( ) anddown( ).

• After moving the desired folder, pressthe FILE SEARCH knob to play back inthe selected folder. If you do not pressthe FILE SEARCH knob within 5 sec-onds, the folder searching function willbe released. It can not be operated in asingle folder.



1983




• All stored bookmarks are all erasedwhen the car battery is disconnectedor power to the vehicle is lost. If thisoccurs, the bookmarks will have to bereset.










• Off-road or rough surface drivingmay cause the compact disc toskip. Do not use the compact discwhen driving in such conditionsas damage to the compact discface could occur.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not attempt to grab or pull the

compact disc out while the disc isbeing pulled into the audio unitby the self-loading mechanism.Damage to the audio unit andcompact disc could occur.

• Avoid using recorded compactdiscs in your audio unit. Originalcompact discs are recommendedfor best resnlts.

3 199



2. BAND Select Button

3. AUDIO Select Button

4. TUNE Select/AUDIO Control Knob


6. CD SCAN Button

7. EQ Button or AUX Button

8. PRESET Station Select Buttons

(or Button)

JBM465UR



2003


the ignition key is in the "ACC" or “ON”position. Press the knob to switch thepower on. The LCD shows the radiofrequency in the radio mode, the tapedirection indicator in the tape mode orCD/MP3 track in the CD/MP3 mode orCD AUTO CHANGER mode. To switchthe power off, press the knob again.

• Push the FM/AM, TAPE or CD/MP3 toturn on that function without pushingthe Power ON-OFF control knob.

VOLUME ControlRotate the knob clockwise to increasethe volume and turn the knob counter-clockwise to reduce the volume.

2. BAND Select ButtonPressing the FM/AM button changes theAM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The modeselected is shown on the display.

3. AUDIO Select ButtonPressing the AUDIO button changes theBASS, MID-RANGE, TREBLE, FADER andBALANCE mode. The mode selected isshown on the display.

After selecting the each mode, rotate theAudio control knob clockwise or counter-clockwise.




FADER ControlRotate the control knob clockwise toemphasize rear speaker sound (frontspeaker sound will be attenuated). Whenthe control knob is turned counterclock-wise, front speaker sound will be empha-sized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-ated).

BALANCE ControlRotate the knob clockwise to emphasizeright speaker sound (left speaker soundwill be attenuated). When the controlknob is turned counterclockwise, leftspeaker sound will be emphasized (rightspeaker sound will be attenuated).

4. TUNE Select/AUDIO ControlKnob

Rotate the knob clockwise to increasethe frequency and turn the knob counter-clockwise to reduce the frequency.


Press the AUTO SEEK select button.When the side is pressed, the unitwill automatically tune to the next higherfrequency and when the side ispressed, it will automatically tune to thenext lower frequency.

6. CD SCAN ButtonWhen you press the button, frequency ischanged and the next channel isreceived automatically.To stay on a station, press the CD SCANbutton again.

3 201


7. EQ Button or AUX ButtonPress the EQ button to select the CLAS-SIC, POPS, ROCK, JAZZ and OFFMODE for the desired tone quality. Eachpress of the button changes the displayas follows;

• If the button is written AUX, it willchange to AUX mode when you pressthe button, and the button has no EQfunction.

• The AUX button is functional only ifRSE unit is on.

• You can enjoy the RSE audio throughthe speakers in AUX mode.

• The speaker volume level is adjustableby VOLUME(+,-) key, on RSE unit orwireless remote control.

* Refer to the “RSE” in this section fordetails RSE operation.

* RSE : Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem(A/V).



HOW TO PRESET STATIONSSix AM and twelve FM stations may beprogrammed into the memory of theradio. Then, by simply pressing the AM/FM band select button and/or one of thesix station select buttons, you may recallany of these stations instantly. To pro-gram the stations, follow these steps:• Press AM/FM selector to set the band

for AM, FM1 and FM2.• Select the desired station to be stored

by seek or manual tuning.• Determine the preset station select

button you wish to use to access thatstation.

• Press and hold the station select but-ton for more than 0.8 seconds. A selectbutton indicator will show in the displayindicating which select button you havedepressed. The frequency display willflash after it has been stored into thememory. You should then release thebutton, and proceed to program thenext desired station. A total of 18 sta-tions can be programmed by selectingone AM and two FM stations per but-ton.




the audio system. The audio sys-tem mechanism may be damagedif you spill them.



2023

1. TAPE PROGRAM Button

2. TAPE EJECT Button

3. AUTO MUSIC SEARCH (AMS) Button

4. FF/REW Button


6. DOLBY Button


JBM465UR

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (M465) (IF EQUIPPED)

(or Button)

3 203


1. TAPE PROGRAM Button• This allows you to play the reverse side

of the tape by merely depressing theprogram button. An arrow will appear inthe display to show tape direction.

• Push the TAPE button while the tape isin the tape deck, to turn on that func-tion without pushing the Power ON-OFF control knob.

2. TAPE EJECT Button• When the button is pressed with a

cassette loaded, the cassette will eject.• When the button is pressed during

FF/REW mode, the cassette will eject.

3. AUTO MUSIC SEARCH (AMS)Button

Press the button to find the starting pointof each song in a prerecorded musictape. The quiet space between songs(must have at least 4 sec. gap) can beidentified by the AUTO MUSIC SEARCHbutton.

• Pressing the button will play thebeginning of the next music segment.

• Pressing the button will start replayat the beginning of the music just lis-tened to.

• To stop FF or REW action, press thebutton again.

4. FF/REW Button• Forward tape winding starts when the

FF button is pressed during PLAY orREW mode.

• Tape PLAY starts when the FF buttonis pressed again during FF mode.

• Tape rewinding starts when the REWbutton is pressed during PLAY or FFmode.

• Tape PLAY starts when the REW but-ton pressed again during REW mode.


listening to, press the RPT button. Tocancel, press again.

• If you do not release RPT operationwhen the track ends, it will automati-cally be replayed.This process will be continued until youpush the button again or turn thepower OFF then ON.

6. DOLBY ButtonIf you get background noise during tapePLAY, you can reduce this considerablyby merely pressing the DOLBY button. Ifyou want to cancel the DOLBY feature,press the button again.


• If the button is labeled AUX, it willchange to AUX mode when you pressthe button, and the button has no EQfunction.

• The AUX button is functional only ifRSE unit is on .

• You can enjoy the RSE audio throughthe speakers in AUX mode.

• The speaker volume level is adjustableby VOLUME(+,-) key, on RSE unit orwireless remote control.





2043




• The preset station frequencies are allerased when the car battery is discon-nected. Therefore, all data will have tobe set again if this should occur.

• Do not add any oil to the rotatingparts. Keep magnets, screwdriversand other metallic objects away fromthe tape mechanism and head.



(Continued)

(Continued)• When driving your vehicle, be sure to

keep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.


CAUTION• Do not insert anything like coins

into the player slot as damage tothe unit may occur.



3 205


1. LOAD Button

2. Playing CD Button

3. CD EJECT Button


5. SCROLL Button

6. FF/REW Button


8. CD SCAN Button

9. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button



12. DISC UP/DOWN Button

13. FILE SEARCH Knob

(TUNE Select Knob)

14. DIRECTORY SEARCH (DIR) Button

JBM465UR

COMPACT DISC PLAYER/CD AUTO CHANGER OPERATION (M465) (IF EQUIPPED)- Compatiable with MP3/WMA

(or Button)


2063

1. LOAD ButtonThis compact disc player will accommo-date up to six compact discs.To insert multiple discs into the player,perform the following:

1.Press and release the LOAD Button.2.Green light on the slot will be illuminat-

ed and the lowest number of emptyslot will blink on the display.After “WAIT” is displayed on the LCD,the slot will open with “INSERT” dis-played on the LCD.

3. Insert a disc partway into the slot, labelside up. The player will pull the disc in.

When the disc is inserted, the disc willbegin to play automatically.

✽✽ NOTICE• The disc can be only inserted while the

green light is blinking on the slot.• This CD player is suitable only for 12

cm discs, do not use irregular shapedCDs.

To insert multiple discs do the followings:1.Press and hold the LOAD button for

one second or more.You will then hear a beep sound andthe green light on the slot will be illumi-nated, and the numbers of empty discwill blink on the display.

2.After “WAIT” is displayed on the LCDwith the lowest number of empty slotblinking, the slot will open with “INSERT”displayed on the LCD.

3. Insert a disc partway into the slot, labelside up. The player will pull the disc in.Once the disc is loaded, the numbersof the empty disc will blink on the dis-play continuously.If the next “DISC NO.” is displayed whenthe slot is illuminated, you can then loadanother disc.

4.Load the remaining disc by followingthe same procedures 1 and 2. Whenyou finished loading 6 discs, the CDplayer will begin to play the last CDloaded.

5.To load more than one disc but lessthan six, complete Steps 1 and 2.

When you have finished loading discs,press LOAD button to cancel the loadingfunction or wait for 10 seconds. The CDplayer will begin to play the last CDloaded. As each CD starts to play, theDISC number will appear on the display.

✽✽ NOTICEThe disc player takes up to six discs. Donot try to load more than six.

2. Playing CD Button• Press the CD Button to start CD play-

back, during radio operation or cas-sette tape playback.

• When discs are in the CD deck, if youpress the CD button, the CD player willbegin playing even if the radio or cas-sette player is being used.





• The unit can play a multi-session CD-R (recordable CD) and CD-RW(rewritable CD) that consists of morethan two sessions.Please refer to the manual of CD-R/CD-RW recorder or CD-R/CD-RWsoftware for more information onfinalization process.

• Depending on the recording status,some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not playon this unit.

3 207


✽✽ NOTICEPlayback of MP3 and WMA file formatsare supported. Load to play time forthese formats may be longer due to thecompressed nature of these discs.

3. CD EJECT Button• When the button is pressed with a

CD loaded, the CD will eject.• To eject all of the discs, press this but-

ton for one second or more.



• Press once to skip forward to thebeginning of the next track.

• Press once to skip back to thebeginning of the track.

• Press before playback begins toquickly move backward through a CD.

5. SCROLL ButtonPress the button, and you can check the filenames with more than 16 characters onMP3 CD(max 34 characters).The button doesn’t work on file namesless than 16 characters.

6. FF/REW ButtonIf you want to fast forward or reversethrough the compact disc track, push andhold the FF or REW button.When you release the button, the compactdisc player will resume playing.


• If the button is labeled AUX, it willchange to AUX mode when you pressthe button, and the button has no EQfunction.

• The AUX button is functional only ifRSE unit is on.

• You can enjoy the RSE audio through thespeakers in AUX mode.

• The speaker volume level is adjustable byVOLUME(+,-) key, on RSE unit or wire-less remote control.




each track, press the CD SCAN buttonmore than 0.8 seconds.

• To playback the first 10 seconds ofeach track in the selected folder, pressthe CD SCAN button within 0.8 sec-onds. (MP3 CD only)

• Press the CD SCAN button again with-in 10 sec. when you have reached thedesired track.



2083

9. BOOKMARK (MARK) ButtonWhen the CD player unit is operating, thedesired track on the disc can be book-marked by using the MARK button.

• Press the MARK button for more than0.8 seconds to bookmark the desiredtrack.“M” will be displayed on the LCD and“MEMORY(1~50)” will display forapproximately five seconds with beepsound.To play the bookmarked tracks, pressthe MARK button within 0.8 secondsand select the bookmarked track toplay.

• To erase a bookmarked track, press theMARK button for more than 0.8 sec-onds. The unit will beep once when thebookmark is erased.

If you want to delete all tracks stored onMark Memory, press FILE SEARCH Knobin the Mark Play mode for more than 0.8seconds.You will hear a beep sound and alltracks will be deleted from Mark Memorywith “MARK DELETE ALL” displayed on theLCD.

✽✽ NOTICETracks stored on Mark Memory will beautomatically erased after you eject CDsthat contain those tracks.


listening to, press the RPT button.To cancel, press it again.

• To repeat the music within selectedCD, press the RPT button for morethan 0.8 seconds.To cancel, press it again for more than0.8 seconds.

• To repeat the music within currentlyplayed folder, press the RPT button formore than 0.8 seconds.To cancel, press it again(MP3 CDonly).

• If you do not release RPT operationafter all the tracks are played back, theunit will play back again from the firsttrack.This process will be continued until youpush the button again or turn the powerOFF then ON.

11. RANDOM (RDM) ButtonWith random, you can listen to the tracksin random, rather than sequential orderon one disc.

To use random, do the following:

• Press the RDM button to listen torecorded tracks in random sequence.Press RDM again to cancel or turn thepower OFF then ON. The unit defaultsto playing tracks in sequential order.

• To listen to the music within the select-ed folder in random order, press theRDM button within a second. To can-cel, press it again or turn the powerOFF then ON. (MP3 CD only)

12. DISC UP/DOWN Button• By pressing "DISC "/"DISC "

while CD changer is playing you canmove backward or forward to the nextdisc and playback automaticallybegins.

• If any of the slots do not contain a CD,your car audio will skip the empty slotand play only those that contain a CD.When switching CD’s, the LCD dis-plays the selected CD’s number.

3 209


13. FILE SEARCH Knob (TUNE Select Knob)

• You can skip the track (file) by turningthe FILE SEARCH knob clockwise orcounterclockwise.After selecting the desired track (file),press the FILE SEARCH knob to play-back the track (file).If you do not press the FILE SEARCHknob within five seconds, the searchwill stop.

14. DIRECTORY SEARCH (DIR)Button

• You can move through the folder bypushing the DIR button to up ( ) anddown( ).

• After moving the desired folder, pressthe FILE SEARCH knob to play back inthe selected folder. If you do not pressthe FILE SEARCH knob within 5 sec-onds, the folder searching function willbe released. It can not be operated in asingle folder.




• Stored bookmarks are all erased whenthe car battery is disconnected orpower to the vehicle is lost. If thisoccurs, the bookmarks will have to bereset.










• Off-road or rough surface drivingmay cause the compact disc toskip. Do not use the compactdisc when driving in such condi-tions as damage to the compactdisc face could occur.

• Do not attempt to grab or pull thecompact disc out while the disc isbeing pulled into the audio unitby the self-loading mechanism.Damage to the audio unit andcompact disc could occur.

• Avoid using recorded compactdiscs in your audio unit. Originalcompact discs are recommendedfor best results.


2103

WelcomeThe Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System is a compact, built-in, easy-to-useentertainment system designed to providefamily fun while you are on the road. Enjoygreat quality sound from the 11 speakers,or have a private, quiet viewing with thewireless headphones.The display unit is mounted to the ceilingin the rear passenger area of the vehicle,allowing rear-seat passengers to playDVD movies, video CDs or music CDs.Users may also plug in a game platform orVHS player. Headphones, game car-tridges and other accessories can be keptneatly out of the way in the 3rd-row arm-rest compartment.

System OverviewThe RSE System includes a mountedcolor monitor with a built-in audio/videocontrol panel and a DVD player. It alsoincludes a remote control and two (2)sets of battery-operated wireless head-phones (batteries are included).

Connections / SetupThe RSE system is designed to makeyour time on the road more enjoyable.Please follow these instructions carefullyto get the most out of your RSE.

✽✽ NOTICERSE operation is prevented during thefirst 2 seconds after the ignition switch isturned to ignition on or accessory mode.

The RSE system is already set up andready for use. The system is always“awake” when the vehicle's ignition isturned on or when the vehicle is in“accessory power mode.”

REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

CAUTION• Refrain from using food or drinks

near the RSE, the wireless head-phones or the remote control.

• Direct sunlight may interfere withthe headphone's operation andperformance.

• Normal RSE operation cannot beguaranteed with unofficial dupli-cated discs.

• In order to prevent inadvertentbattery discharge, the RSE willremain in standby mode whenignition switch is turn to ignitionON or accessory mode.

• Use of rear seat entertainmentsystem without the engine run-ning will reduce battery power.

CAUTIONDisclaimer: The RSE system is pro-grammed to the regional displayformats for your region (NTSC orPAL). Please note that your RSE willnot read DVDs from a differentregion.

3 211


Viewing/Adjusting the MonitorTo view the monitor, locate the latch onthe bottom center of the mounted unitand pull it forward. This will release themonitor from its locked, stow-away posi-tion. Use your hands to adjust the moni-tor into optimal viewing position. Do nottouch the LCD panel itself to avoid dam-age or smudging.

To close the monitor, pull the bottomedge forward and push it up until it clicksinto the stow-away position.

HeadphonesThe RSE comes with two (2) sets of wire-less headphones and four (4) AAA 1.5Vbatteries. Install the batteries by openingthe compartment on the right side of theheadphones. Each set of headphonesrequires two (2) AAA 1.5V batteries.

RES_OPEN_8111

RES_CLOSED_8111

HEADPHONE8112

HEADPHONE8111

Folded

Spread

Close

Open


2123

To turn the headphones on, push the but-ton (�) once. Push the button again toturn the headphones off. The red LEDindicator on the headphone identifies theOn/Off status. The power status indicatoris located on the left headphone.The sound level of the headphones iscontrolled by the volume up[down] knob(�) located on the side of the head-phones.The headphones can be stored by fold-ing the headphones.

✽✽ NOTICE• Conserve the energy of your batteries

by turning the headphones off whenthey are not in use. The on/off buttonis located on the left side of the head-phones.

• The headphone has an automaticshutoff feature if an IR signal fromthe RSE units is not received after 20seconds. This feature is used to pre-vent inadvertent battery dischargingof the headphones.

• The life cycle of headphone's batteryis usually 48 hours.

• In case of poor reception perfor-mance, please check the battery con-dition.

• The headphones are best used within2-6 feet (0.6-1.8 m) of the RSE unit.Getting too close or too far away willcause poor audio reception.

• Audio from the vehicle's CD/radiocannot be heard through the head-phones.

Audio Via Vehicle SpeakersTo hear the audio from the RSE throughthe vehicle's speakers, the RSE must beselected by the Head Unit in the front ofthe vehicle. To select the RSE, pressAUX button.To end the RSE audio troughthe vehicle’s speakers, press AUX buttonagain. When RSE is de-selected by theHead Unit, the headphones can still beused to hear audio.

HEADPHONE8112 ICDX_VQ-465_1

3 213


Connecting Other Devices to the RSEElectronic devices such as video gamesystems, VHS players, Camcorder or etc,can be played through the RSE. Theseexternal devices can be connected to theunit via RCA plugs available throughoutthe vehicle. DC power for additional elec-tronic equipment is provided by one ofthe 12-volt power outlets located in thedash, third row and cargo areas.Additional information can be found inthe vehicle manual.Press the SOURCE (SRC) Button toswitch to the externally connecteddevice. (AUX mode)

The RSE unit has an automatic videodetection feature that will automaticswitch to external device when the deviceis plugged into the auxiliary jacks in thevehicle.Once the RSE has switched to the exter-nal device, you can make your selectionsby using the buttons on the externaldevice.The RSE controls will not work forexternal devices. For example, to select avideo game after the RSE has recog-nized the source, you must use the gamecontrols, not the RSE controls, to choosea selection.The RSE unit will automatically switch tothe RSE mode when the external deviceis unplugged from the auxiliary jacks.The display mode can be changed byDISP( ) button.

✽✽ NOTICEOnly external devices that have anactive video source - such as video gamesystems or VHS players - can be read bythe RSE. The RSE will not play anexternal device that only has an audiosource, such as a cassette player or otherCD player.

Cleaning of DisplayIf the LCD display becomes dusty ordirty, clean it by wiping gently with a soft,dry, clean cloth.

CAUTIONConnect only appropriate inputsources to the RSE jacks.Connecting an incorrect input maycause damage to the player and/orthe external electronic device.

AUX_INPUT_8111

RCA plug

12V Power outlet


2143

Using the DVD playerDisc compatibilityYour RSE player accepts and plays allDVDs in 4:3 (normal) and 16:9 (widescreen) video formats. With DVDs thatoffer multiple formats, the default formatis 16:9 and will stay that way unless theuser changes the format. (See “Display”to learn how to adjust the format.)

✽✽ NOTICE• The DVD player has the capability to

play DVD-Video, DVD-R, DVD-RW,CD-DA, CD-R, CD-RW and Video-CD.

• The DVD player has the capability toplay CD-DA, DVD, VCD, PCM,Dolby Digital and DTS formats.

• Please refer to the appendix for theerror messages.

Loading a DiscInsert the disc part way into the load slot.The player will automatically grip the discand pull it in the rest of the way. The play-er will display “reading” on the screenand show the “Kia Motors” logo beforebeginning the DVD.

The player is only capable of reading thebottom side of a disc. When inserting asingle-sided disc, the label side shouldbe up. When inserting a two-sided disc,the desired play side should be down.

✽✽ NOTICE• Because there is no universal standard

for DVD programming, your disc maybehave differently than below. SomeDVDs may present warning messagesabout unauthorized duplication, somewill go directly to a menu and othersmay start playing the movie immedi-ately.

• When the vehicle's ignition is active,the loading of any playable disc willcause the player to initialize and auto-matically play the disc. If a disc wasplaying prior to the ignition beingturned off, it will not automaticallyreplay once the ignition is turned onagain. Instead, it will go into standbymode. Press the SRC orPLAY/PAUSE( ) button to “wakeup” the unit and resume disc play.

Disc ProtectionThe player has an Auto-Reload DiscProtection feature to protect discs fromaccidental damage. If an ejected disc isnot removed within 25 seconds afterbeing ejected, it will be pulled back intothe player.The disc will not begin playing.Disc can be played by the SRC orPLAY/PAUSE( ) buttons.

DVD ControlsYou can control your DVD by using thebuttons on the unit's control panel or byusing the remote control. Instructions forthe controls listed below are the samewhether you are using the control panelor the remote control. However, there arefunctions that are only available from theremote control. These buttons and theirfunctionality are discussed in the“REMOTE CONTROL” section begin-ning.

3 215


VIDEO MODE OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)

1. STOP/EJECT

2. SPEAKER VOLUME CONTROL

3. PLAY/PAUSE

4. DISPLAY

5. FORWARD

6. REVERSE

7. NEXT CHAPTER

8. PREVIOUS CHAPTER

9. ENTER

10. MENU

11. SOURCE

RES_OPEN_8111


2163

✽✽ NOTICEThe RSE will enter standby mode whenthe vehicle ignition is turned off andback on. Press the SRC orPLAY/PAUSE( ) button to “wakeup” the unit and resume disc play.

1. Stop/Eject While the disc is playing, press theSTOP/EJECT ( ) button to stop discplay. When the disc has stopped, pressthe button again to eject the disc.

✽✽ NOTICEThe player has an Auto-Reload DiscProtection feature to protect discs fromaccidental damage. If an ejected disc isnot removed within 25 seconds afterbeing ejected, it will be pulled back intothe player. This is to protect the discfrom accidental damage.

2. Speaker Volume Control You can adjust the volume one of twoways. First, if you are adjusting the vol-ume for audio through the vehicle speak-ers, you can use the VOLUME button onthe control panel or the remote control.This button is reserved for sending a sig-nal to the vehicle speakers only, and willnot adjust the headphone volume. Press“+” to increase the volume and “-” todecrease the volume.Second, the volume on the wirelessheadphones can be adjusted by turningthe VOL knob located on the left side ofthe headphones.

3. Play/Pause You do not need to press the play buttonafter first loading a DVD or VCD; it willstart automatically by playing the firsttrack or bringing up the disc menu.If the disc does not automatically load,press PLAY/PAUSE( ) to play theDVD.While playing a DVD, press PLAY/PAUSE( ) to pause the DVD. Pressthe button again to resume play.

4. Display When the player is in DVD mode, pressthe DISP button to view the DVD title,chapter number and elapsed time andother information about the DVD current-ly playing.It will also display brightness. There are“Day Time” brightness with brightest leveland “Night Time” brightness which has70% level of “Day Time” brightness.Adjust the level of brightness by pressingthe REV(dimmer) or FWD(brighter) but-tons.The next time the player is turned on, itwill return to the brightness level it wasadjusted to when last used.The RSE unit has two presets of displaybrightness. When the headlamp is turnedon, the display brightness level will bedimmed as the preset. However, whenthe headlamp is turned off, the displaybrightness will return to the daytimebrightness.Press DISP to adjust the image format.The image format, also known as theaspect ratio, is a ratio of the height towidth of the image on the screen. Forexample, a 4:3 ratio would mean animage that is 4 units by 3 units.

3 217


You have two options: 4:3 (normal) and16:9 (widescreen). Press the display but-ton to select the preferred aspect ratio.When the RSE unit receives video sig-nals from the AUX, the aspect ratio canbe changed to 16:9 or 4:3 by the DISPbutton.The aspect ratio information will auto-matically disappear if no button ispressed for three seconds.

5. ForwardThere are three DVD and VCD fast for-ward speeds. Press and hold the FWDbutton for up to 2 seconds and the playerwill fast forward at 4 times the normalspeed (8 times for VCDs). Hold the but-ton for more than 2 seconds but less than4 seconds and the player will fast forwardat about 8 times the normal speed (20times for VCDs). Hold the button for morethan 4 seconds and the fast forward willincrease to about 32 times the normalspeed for both DVDs and VCDs. Pressthe FWD button again to stop fast for-warding and return to normal speed play.

6. ReverseThere are three DVD and VCD fastreverse speeds. Press and hold the REVbutton for up to 2 seconds and the playerwill reverse through the DVD at 4 timesthe normal speed (8 times for VCDs).Hold the button for more than 2 secondsbut less than 4 seconds and the playerwill reverse at about 8 times the normalspeed (20 times for VCDs). Hold the but-ton for more than 4 seconds and thereverse will increase to 32 times the nor-mal speed for both DVDs and VCDs.Press the REV button again to stopreversing and return to normal speedplay.

7. Next ChapterWhile a DVD is playing, press the NEXTbutton to skip to the next chapter. Thecurrent chapter number is shown on thescreen. Press and hold the NEXT buttonto move quickly through the chapters.

✽✽ NOTICEDepending on the DVD, if NEXT ispressed during the last chapter on aDVD, a red circle with a “Invalidicon[ ]” may be displayed, indicatingan invalid button press.

8. Previous ChapterPress the PREV button to skip to thebeginning of the previous chapter. Pressand hold the PREV button to move quick-ly through the chapters.Depending on your DVD, if the PREVbutton is pressed during the first 8 sec-onds of the first chapter, the player willskip to the beginning of the last chapterof the DVD.

9. EnterA momentary press shall initiate a selector enter function of a selected menuitem.

10. Menu DVDs may contain special programmingor features that are accessed by usingthe menu. To use the menu with a DVDthat is playing, press the MENU buttononce to display the DVD disc menu.Press the button a second time to exit themenu and return to the DVD program.The menu is not available during disc ini-tialization, the beginning credits or anycopyright FBI warnings.


2183

When viewing a menu, pressing theMENU button again will automaticallyreturn to the movie at the point it wasbeing viewed.You can also select “play” orany other option by using the NEXT,PREV, FWD and REV buttons.Press the NEXT button to move the cursorup and the PREV button to move the cur-sor down the menu.Press the FWD button to move the cursorto the right, and the REV button to movethe cursor to the left.

✽✽ NOTICEYou must repeatedly push any button tomove through several items. Pressingand holding any button will not advancethe cursor beyond the position justmoved.

Press ENTER to select the desired menuchoice.

11. SourcePress the SOURCE button to switch fromthe RSE’s internal DVD player to anexternal device such as a VCR or videogame. The sound and images from theexternal source will be presentedthrough the RSE.

Pressing the SRC button will switchbetween the following RSE states:

Playback state - will play DVDs, VCDs, andCDs

Auxiliary (AUX) state - will play videogames and other external devices

When an external source is selected, theRSE’s internal DVD player turns off.Press the SRC button to switch backfrom the external source to the internalDVD player.If a disc is present in the DVD player, thedisc will begin to play. If another sourcehas been detected, such as a VCR orvideo game, the RSE will enter the AUXmode automatically and shall remain sountil a disc is inserted or until the PLAY/SRC button is pressed on the RSE's frontpanel or on the remote control. If thevehicle ignition is on but the player isn'tbeing used, the display will power off.The DVD mechanism will be in sleepmode, but the main RSE's controller willstay up to accept commands from thefront panel controls or the remote control.

✽✽ NOTICEThe external device must be correctlyconnected to the RSE in order to playproperly.

Using the CD PlayerThe RSE will play audio CDs in both thestandard (12 cm) and mini-disc (8 cm)format.

✽✽ NOTICEWhile the player will accept DVDROMs and CD ROMs discs, the RSEcannot play discs in these formats andwill eject them.

With power applied to your unit, insertthe disc part way into the load slot. Theplayer will automatically grip the CD disc,pull it the rest of the way in and beginplaying.

CD ControlsThe following functions are availablewhen playing audio CDs.

3 219


AUDIO MODE OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)

1. STOP/EJECT

2. VOLUME CONTROL

3. PLAY/PAUSE

4. DISPLAY

5. FORWARD

6. REVERSE

7. NEXT TRACK

8. PREVIOUS TRACK

RES_CLOSED_8111


2203

1. Stop/Eject While the disc is playing, press theSTOP/EJECT( ) button to stop discplay.While the disc is stopped, press theSTOP/EJECT( ) button again to ejectthe disc.

2. Volume Control You can adjust the volume one of twoways. First, if you are adjusting the vol-ume for audio through the vehicle speak-ers, you can use the VOLUME ()button on the control panel or theremote control. Press “+” to increase thevolume and “-” to decrease the volume.The volume level will be displayed on thehead-unit, when the RSE unit volumelevel is adjusted from its control panel orremote control. This button does notaffect headphone volume.Second, you can adjust the volume onthe wireless headphones by locating theVOL control wheel on the left side of theheadphones. Roll the control wheel toadjust the volume.

3. Play/Pause When an audio CD is inserted, the RSEwill display the KIA logo, then automati-cally begin playing the first track. Thetrack number and time elapsed for thecurrent track is displayed.If a CD is loaded and playing, press thePLAY/PAUSE( ) button to pause theCD. Press the button again to resumeplay.If a CD is already loaded, stopping andplaying the CD by pressingPLAY/PAUSE( ) button on the remotecontrol; cycling the ignition and pressingplay; or changing the source will causethe CD to begin playing at the pointwhere it was stopped during the previousplay. The player will automatically playthis previous play position unless theSTOP/EJECT( ) button is pressed.At the end of the CD, the player will auto-matically return to the first track and con-tinue playing.

4. Display When the player is in DVD mode, pressthe DISP button to view the DVD title,chapter number and elapsed time andother information about the DVD currentlyplaying.The next time the player is turned on, it willreturn to the brightness level it was adjust-ed to when last used.The RSE unit has two presets of displaybrightness. When the headlamp is turnedon, the display brightness level will bedimmed as the preset. However, when theheadlamp is turned off, the display bright-ness will return to the daytime brightness.Press DISP to adjust the image format.The image format, also known as theaspect ratio, is a ratio of the height towidth of the image on the screen. Forexample, a 4:3 ratio would mean an imagethat is 4 units by 3 units. You have twooptions: 4:3 (normal) and 16:9(widescreen). Press the display button toselect the preferred aspect ratio.When the RSE unit receives video signalsfrom the AUX, the aspect ratio can bechanged to 16:9 or 4:3 by the DISP but-ton.The aspect ratio information will automati-cally disappear if no button is pressed forthree seconds.

3 221


5. ForwardThere are two CD fast forward speeds.Press and hold the FWD button for up to2 seconds and the player will fast forwardat 3 times the normal speed. Hold thebutton for more than 2 seconds and theplayer will fast forward at about 10 timesthe normal speed. When the holding but-ton is released, the RSE unit will auto-matically return to a play mode.

6. ReverseThere are two fast reverse speeds. TheRSE unit will fast reverse at 3 times thenormal speed, if the REV button ispressed. Hold the button for more than 2seconds and the RSE unit will fastreverse at about 10 times the normalspeed. When the button is released, theRSE unit will automatically return to aplay mode.

7. Next TrackPress the NEXT button to skip to thebeginning of the next track. The nexttrack number is displayed on the screen.Press and hold the NEXT button for 2seconds or more to move quickly throughthe tracks.

8. Previous TrackPress the PREV button to skip to thebeginning of the current track.Press the PREV button during the first 8seconds of the current track to skip to thebeginning of the previous track.Press the PREV button during the first 8seconds of the first track to skip to thebeginning of the last track on the CD.Press and hold the PREV button for 2seconds or more to move quickly throughthe tracks.


2223

REMOTE CONTROL

1. STOP

2. SPEAKER VOL (+, -)

3. PLAY/PAUSE

4. DISPLAY

5. FORWARD

6. REVERSE

7. NEXT

8. PREVIOUS

9. ENTER

10. MENU

11. SOURCE

12. ANGLE

13. SUBSCRIPT

14. LANGUAGE

15. SLOW PLAY

16. ON/OFF

REMOTE_CONTROL_8111

3 223


Using the Remote ControlIn addition to having all the buttons andfunctionality listed in the DVD and CDControls section, the remote control hasseveral other buttons that offer additionalfunctions. It is an infrared remote control,and must be pointed at the face of theRSE at a 45° angle for best results. Itrequires a CR2025 battery (included).The remote control has the followingadditional buttons:

✽✽ NOTICEThe RSE system is always “awake”when the vehicle's ignition is turned onor when the vehicle is in “accessorypower mode.”

1. StopPressing this button once will stop DVDor CD play. To eject a disc, you must usethe eject button on the control panel.

2. Speaker Volume “+” and “-”These buttons control the volume of theaudio of a DVD or CD through the vehiclespeakers, not the volume from head-phones. Press “+” to turn the volume upand “-” to turn the volume down.

3. Play/PauseWhen an audio CD(VCD/DVD) is insert-ed, the RSE will display the KIA logo,then automatically begin playing the firsttrack.The track number and time elapsedfor the current track is displayed.If a CD(VCD/DVD) is loaded and playing,press the PLAY/PAUSE( ) button topause the CD(VCD/DVD). Press the but-ton again to resume play.If a CD(VCD/DVD) is already loaded,stopping and playing the CD(VCD/ DVD)by pressing PLAY/PAUSE( ) buttonon the remote control; cycling the ignitionand pressing play; or changing thesource will cause the CD(VCD/DVD) tobegin playing at the point where it wasstopped during the previous play. Theplayer will automatically play this previ-ous play position unless theSTOP/EJECT( ) button is pressed.At the end of the CD(VCD/DVD), theplayer will automatically return to the firsttrack and continue playing.

4. DisplayWhen the player is in DVD mode, pressthe DISP button to view the DVD title,chapter number and elapsed time andother information about the DVD current-ly playing.

It will also display brightness. There are“Day Time” brightness with brightest leveland “Night Time” brightness which has70% level of “Day Time” brightness.Adjust the level of brightness by pressingthe REV(dimmer) or FWD(brighter) but-tons.The next time the player is turned on, itwill return to the brightness level it wasadjusted to when last used.The RSE unit has two presets of displaybrightness. When the headlamp is turnedon, the display brightness level will bedimmed as the preset. However, whenthe headlamp is turned off, the displaybrightness will return to the daytimebrightness.Press DISP to adjust the image format.The image format, also known as theaspect ratio, is a ratio of the height towidth of the image on the screen. Forexample, a 4:3 ratio would mean animage that is 4 units by 3 units. You havetwo options: 4:3 (normal) and 16:9(widescreen). Press the display button toselect the preferred aspect ratio.When the RSE unit receives video signalsfrom the AUX, the aspect ratio can bechanged to 16:9 or 4:3 by the DISP button.The aspect ratio information will auto-matically disappear if no button ispressed for three seconds.


2243

5. ForwardThere are three DVD and VCD fast for-ward speeds. Press and hold the FWDbutton for up to 2 seconds and the playerwill fast forward at 4 times the normalspeed (8 times for VCDs). Hold the but-ton for more than 2 seconds but less than4 seconds and the player will fast forwardat about 8 times the normal speed (20times for VCDs). Hold the button for morethan 4 seconds and the fast forward willincrease to about 32 times the normalspeed for both DVDs and VCDs. Pressthe FWD button again to stop fast for-warding and return to normal speed play.

6. ReverseThere are three DVD and VCD fastreverse speeds. Press and hold the REVbutton for up to 2 seconds and the playerwill reverse through the DVD at 4 timesthe normal speed (8 times for VCDs).Hold the button for more than 2 secondsbut less than 4 seconds and the playerwill reverse at about 8 times the normalspeed (20 times for VCDs). Hold the but-ton for more than 4 seconds and thereverse will increase to 32 times the nor-mal speed for both DVDs and VCDs.Press the REV button again to stopreversing and return to normal speedplay.

7. Next While a DVD is playing, press the NEXTbutton to skip to the next chapter. Thecurrent chapter number is shown on thescreen. Press and hold the NEXT buttonto move quickly through the chapters.

✽✽ NOTICEDepending on the DVD, if NEXT ispressed during the last chapter on aDVD, a red circle with a “Invalidicon[ ]” may be displayed, indicatingan invalid button press.

8. PreviousPress the PREV button to skip to thebeginning of the previous chapter. Pressand hold the PREV button to move quick-ly through the chapters.Depending on your DVD, if the PREVbutton is pressed during the first 8 sec-onds of the first chapter, the player willskip to the beginning of the last chapterof the DVD.

9. EnterA momentary press shall initiate a selector enter function of a selected menuitem.

10. Menu DVDs may contain special programmingor features that are accessed by using themenu. To use the menu with a DVD that isplaying, press the MENU button once todisplay the DVD disc menu. Press the but-ton a second time to exit the menu andreturn to the DVD program.The menu is not available during disc ini-tialization, the beginning credits or anycopyright FBI warnings.When viewing a menu, pressing theMENU button again will automaticallyreturn to the movie at the point it wasbeing viewed.You can also select “play” orany other option by using the NEXT,PREV, FWD and REV buttons.Press the NEXT button to move the cursorup and the PREV button to move the cur-sor down the menu.Press the FWD button to move the cursorto the right, and the REV button to movethe cursor to the left.

3 225


✽✽ NOTICEYou must repeatedly push any button tomove through several items. Pressingand holding any button will not advancethe cursor beyond the position justmoved.

Press ENTER to select the desired menuchoice.

11. SourcePress the SOURCE button to switch fromthe RSE’s internal DVD player to anexternal device such as a VCR or videogame. The sound and images from theexternal source will be presentedthrough the RSE.

Pressing the SRC button will switchbetween the following RSE states:

Playback state - will play DVDs, VCDs,and CDs

Auxiliary (AUX) state - will play videogames and other external devices

When an external source is selected, theRSE’s internal DVD player turns off.Press the SRC button to switch backfrom the external source to the internalDVD player.If a disc is present in the DVD player, thedisc will begin to play. If another sourcehas been detected, such as a VCR orvideo game, the RSE will enter the AUXmode automatically and shall remain sountil a disc is inserted or until the PLAY/SRC button is pressed on the RSE’s frontpanel or on the remote control. If thevehicle ignition is on but the player isn'tbeing used, the display will power off.The DVD mechanism will be in sleepmode, but the main RSE's controller willstay up to accept commands from thefront panel controls or the remote control.

✽✽ NOTICEThe external device must be correctlyconnected to the RSE in order to playproperly.

12. AngleSome DVDs offer different scene angles.If available on the DVD, the ANGLE but-ton will show you the other availablescene angles. If angle scenes are notavailable, then “Invalid icon[ ]” will bedisplayed. Pressing the ANGLE buttonduring CD play will do nothing.

13. SubscriptThe SUBSC button allows you to displayor remove language subtitles. If no lan-guage subtitles are available, the displaywill show an invalid icon[ ]. Pressing theSUBSC button during CD play will donothing.

14. LanguagePressing the LANG button will allow youto select your preferred language, if avail-able. Select the language and then pressenter. If no other languages are available,the display will show an invalid icon[ ].Pressing the LANG button during CDplay will do nothing.


2263

15. Slow PlayThere are 3 slow forward and 3 slowreverse speeds available when viewingDVDs. To review a DVD in slow motion,first press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) buttonto pause the DVD, then press either REVor FWD (( ) or ( ) on the remote con-trol) to select slow playback in eitherreverse or forward.Pressing either the REV or FWD (( ) or( ) on the remote control) button oncechanges the player to 1/8 of normalspeed. Press the button again to return topause mode.Press and hold either button for morethan 2 seconds but less than 4 secondsand the player will switch to 1/4 of thenormal speed. Hold either button formore than 4 seconds and the player willswitch to 1/2 of the normal speed.

From the remote control for DVD, you canimmediately switch to 1/8 forward orbackward speed with the ( , ) but-tons. Press either button again to returnto normal play.While using the Slow Play feature, thecurrent play speed is displayed on thescreen.Press PLAY again to resume normalplay.

16. On/OffThis button will only turn off the DVD orCD and display, not the system itself. Thesystem will remain on standby.

3 227


AppendixMessages

Technical Specifications

NON PLAYABLE MEDIA An incompatible format disc is inserted, or the disc is not playable.

[INVALID ICON] Invalid button press: The PREV button was pressed during the first chapter of a DVD, or theNEXT button was pressed during the last chapter of a DVD.

NO DISC Displayed with the PLAY button is pressed but not disc is in the player.

READING The player is searching the disc to determine its format and check for any special program-ming.

STOP A disc is inserted in the RSE but not playing.

DISC ERROR The inserted disc is either scratched or otherwise damaged, and cannot be played.

REGION ERROR The region code of the disc is different from the RSE DVD region setting. The RSE unit canonly play disc from the intent region. (ie, Korean Region, US region, European region, etc…)

Input power requirements 12 volts nominal (10.5 to 15.5 volts) @ 5 amps nominal (10amps peak max)

A/V inputs - Audio Input : 1 volts nominal (0.8 to 1.2 V)- Video Input : 1 volts nominal (0.7 to 1.4 V)


2283

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible causes / solutions

Press the STOP/EJECT button to release the disc. The player will attempt to eject the discup to three times before performing the Auto-Reload function. Once the Auto-Reload func-tion is complete, press the STOP/EJECT button again to release the disc from the player.If a disc is still stuck or blocked in the RSE unit, turn the ignition off and then on again to resetthe RSE unit.

Verify that the headphone is equipped with batteries, and that the batteries are charged.Insert or replace 2 AAA batteries to resume headphone function.

If the display does not show “NO DISC”, then there is no power. Check the vehicle fuse. If theRSE still does not work, contact your authorized Kia dealer.

Make sure you are pointing the remote control at the face of the RSE at a 45° angle. Changethe battery. [Device requires one (1) CR2025 battery.] Use the control buttons on the RSEdisplay panel. If the remote control still does not work, contact your authorized Kia dealer.

Invalid button press. The function you are trying to perform is not available.

The disc becomes stuck orblocked.

There is no audio in the head-phones.

The RSE does not work.

The remote control does notwork.

Continue receiving an invalidicon[ ] when a button ispressed

4

Before driving / 4-2Key positions / 4-3Starting the engine / 4-4Automatic transaxle / 4-5Cruise control system / 4-11Brake system / 4-14Electronic stability control / 4-19Back warning system / 4-22Economical operation / 4-25

Special driving conditions / 4-26Winter driving / 4-28Trailer towing / 4-28Overloading / 4-34Label information / 4-35



24

Before entering vehicle:• Be sure that all windows, outside mir-

ror(s), and outside lights are clean.• Check the condition of the tires.• Check under the vehicle for any sign of

leaks.• Be sure there are no obstacles behind

you if you intend to back up.

Necessary inspections Fluid levels, such as engine oil, enginecoolant, brake fluid, and washer fluidshould be checked on a regular basis,with the exact interval depending on thefluid. Further details are provided inSection 6, Maintenance.

Before starting • Close and lock all doors.• Position the seat so that all controls are

easily reached.• Adjust the inside and outside rearview

mirrors.• Be sure that all lights work.• Check all gauges.• Check the operation of warning lights

when the ignition switch is turned tothe ON position.

• Release the parking brake and makesure the brake warning light goes out.

For safe operation, be sure you are famil-iar with your vehicle and its equipment.

BEFORE DRIVING

WARNING - Driving underthe influence of alcohol ordrugs

Drinking and driving is dangerous.Drunk driving is the number onecontributor to the highway deathtoll each year. Even a small amountof alcohol will affect your reflexes,perceptions and judgement. Drivingwhile under the influence of drugsis as dangerous or more dangerousthan driving drunk.You are much more likely to have aserious accident if you drink or takedrugs and drive.If you are drinking or taking drugs,don’t drive. Do not ride with a driv-er who has been drinking or takingdrugs. Choose a designated driveror call a cab.

4 3


Illuminated ignition switch Whenever front door is opened, the igni-tion switch will be illuminated for yourconvenience, provided the ignition switchis not in the ON position. The light will gooff approximately 10 seconds after clos-ing the door or when the ignition switch isturned on.

Ignition switch and anti-theftsteering column lock Ignition switch positionLOCKThe steering wheel locks to protectagainst theft. The ignition key can beremoved only in the LOCK position.When turning the ignition switch to theLOCK position, push the key inward atthe ACC position and turn the key towardthe LOCK position.

ACC (Accessory)The steering wheel is unlocked and elec-trical accessories are operative.

ONThe warning lights can be checkedbefore the engine is started. This is thenormal running position after the engineis started.Do not leave the ignition switch ON if theengine is not running to prevent batterydischarge.

STARTTurn the ignition key to the START posi-tion to start the engine. The engine willcrank until you release the key; then itreturns to the ON position. The brakewarning lamp can be checked in thisposition.If difficulty is experienced in turning theignition key to the START position, turnthe steering wheel right and left torelease the tension and then turn the key.

KEY POSITIONS

1VQA3017 1VQA3018


44

STARTING THE ENGINE 1. Make sure the parking brake is

applied.2. Place the transaxle shift lever in P

(Park). Depress the brake pedal fully.You can also start the engine whenthe shift lever is in the N (Neutral)position.

3. Turn the ignition switch to START andhold it there until the engine starts (amaximum of 10 seconds), thenrelease the key.

4. In extremely cold weather (below -18°C / 0°F) or after the vehicle hasnot been operated for several days, letthe engine warm up without depress-ing the accelerator.

Whether the engine is cold or warm, itshould be started without depressingthe accelerator.

WARNING - Ignition key• Never turn the ignition switch to

LOCK or ACC while the vehicle ismoving.This would result in loss ofdirectional control and brakingfunction, which could cause anaccident.

• The anti-theft steering column lockis not a substitute for the parkingbrake. Before leaving the driver’sseat, always make sure the shiftlever is engaged in P (Park) forautomatic transaxle, set the park-ing brake fully and shut the engineoff. Unexpected and sudden vehi-cle movement may occur if theseprecautions are not taken.

• Never reach for the ignition switch,or any other controls through thesteering wheel while the vehicle isin motion. The presence of yourhand or arm in this area couldcause a loss of vehicle control, anaccident and serious bodily injuryor death.

• Do not place any movable objectsaround the driver’s seat as theymay move while driving, interferewith the driver and lead to an acci-dent.

CAUTIONIf the engine stalls while you are inmotion, do not attempt to move theshift lever to the P (Park) position. Iftraffic and road conditions permit,you may put the shift lever in the N(Neutral) position while the vehicleis still moving and turn the ignitionswitch to the START position in anattempt to restart the engine.

CAUTIONDo not engage the starter for morethan 10 seconds. If the engine stallsor fails to start, wait 5 to 10 secondsbefore re-engaging the starter.Improper use of the starter maydamage it.

4 5


AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

1VQA3024

The lock release button must be depressed while moving the shift lever.

Depress the brake pedal and push the button when shifting.

The shift lever can be moved without depressing the lock release button.

+ (UP)

- (DOWN)

Sports modeAutomatic mode

Lock release button prevents shift levermovement without first depressing the button.


64

Automatic transaxle operationAll normal forward driving is done withthe shift lever in the D (Drive) position.To move the shift lever from the P (Park)position, the brake pedal must bedepressed and the lock release buttonmust be depressed.

For smooth operation, depress the brakepedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to aforward or reverse gear.

WARNING - Automatictransaxle

Before leaving the driver’s seat,always make sure the shift lever isin the P (PARK) position; then setthe parking brake fully and shut theengine off. Unexpected and suddenvehicle movement can occur ifthese precautions are not followedin the order identified.

1VQA3024

Automaticmode

CAUTION• To avoid damage to your

transaxle, do not accelerate theengine in R (Reverse) or any for-ward gear position with thebrakes on.

• When stopped on an upgrade, donot hold the vehicle stationarywith engine power. Use the serv-ice brake or the parking brake.

• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P(Park) into D (Drive), or R(Reverse) when the engine isabove idle speed.

4 7


Transaxle rangesP (park)Always come to a complete stop beforeshifting into P. This position locks thetransaxle and prevents the front wheelsfrom rotating.

R (reverse)Use this position to drive the vehiclebackward.

N (neutral)The wheels and transaxle are not locked.The vehicle will roll freely even on theslightest incline unless the parking brakeor service brakes are applied.

D (drive)This is the normal forward driving posi-tion. The transaxle will automatically shiftthrough a 5-gear sequence, providing thebest fuel economy and power.

For extra power when passing anothervehicle or climbing grades, depress theaccelerator fully, at which time thetransaxle will automatically downshift tothe next lower gear.

(Continued)• Before leaving the driver’s seat,

always make sure the shift leveris in the P (PARK) position. Setthe parking brake fully, shut theengine off and take the key withyou. Unexpected and suddenvehicle movement can occur ifyou do not follow these precau-tions in the order specified.

• Never leave a child unattended ina vehicle.

WARNING• Shifting into P (Park) while the

vehicle is in motion will cause thedrive wheels to lock which willcause you to lose control of thevehicle.

• Do not use the P (Park) positionin place of the parking brake.Always make sure the shift leveris latched in the P (Park) positionso that it cannot be moved unlessthe lock release button is pushedin, AND set the parking brakefully.

(Continued)

CAUTIONThe transaxle may be damaged ifyou shift into P (Park) while thevehicle is in motion.

CAUTIONAlways come to a complete stopbefore shifting into or out of R(Reverse); you may damage thetransaxle if you shift into R whilethe vehicle is in motion, except asexplained in “Rocking the Vehicle”,in this manual.


84

Sports modeWhether the vehicle is stationary or inmotion, sports mode is selected by push-ing the shift lever from the “D” positioninto the manual gate. To return to “D”range operation, push the shift lever backinto the main gate.

In sports mode, moving the shift leverbackwards and forwards will allow you tomake gearshifts rapidly. In contrast to amanual transaxle, the sports modeallows gearshifts with the acceleratorpedal depressed.

Up (+) : Push the lever forward once toshift up one gear.

Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards onceto shift down one gear.

✽✽ NOTICE• In sports mode, the driver must exe-

cute upshifts in accordance with roadconditions, taking care to keep theengine speed below the red zone.

• In sports mode, only the five forwardgears can be selected. To reverse orpark the vehicle, move the shift leverto the “R” or “P” position as required.

• In sports mode, downshifts are madeautomatically when the vehicle slowsdown. When the vehicle stops, 1st gearis automatically selected.

(Continued)

(Continued)• In sports mode, when the engine rpm

approaches the red zone, shift pointsare varied to upshift automatically.

• To maintain the required levels ofvehicle performance and safety, thesystem may not execute certaingearshifts when the shift lever is oper-ated.

• When driving on a slippery road,push the shift lever forward into the+(up) position. This causes thetransaxle to shift into the 2nd gearwhich is better for smooth driving ona slippery road. Push the shift lever tothe -(down) side to shift back to the1st gear.

1VQA3025

+ (UP)

- (DOWN)

Sports mode

4 9


Moving up a steep grade from astanding startTo move up a steep grade from a stand-ing start, depress the brake pedal, shiftthe shift lever to D (Drive). Select theappropriate gear depending on loadweight and steepness of the grade, andrelease the parking brake. Depress theaccelerator gradually while releasing theservice brakes.When accelerating from a stop on asteep hill, the vehicle may have a ten-dency to roll backwards. Shifting theshift lever into 2 (Second Gear) whilein Sports mode will help prevent thevehicle from rolling backwards.

Shift lock system For your safety, the automatic transaxlehas a shift lock system which preventsshifting the transaxle out of P (Park)unless the brake pedal is depressed.To shift the transaxle out of P (Park):1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.2. Start the engine or turn the ignition to

the ON position.3. Depress the lock release button and

move the shift lever.If the brake pedal is repeatedlydepressed and released with the shiftlever in the P (Park) position, a chatteringnoise near the shift lever may be heard.This is a normal condition.

Shift-lock overrideIf the shift lever should fail to move fromthe P (Park) position with the brake pedaldepressed, continue depressing thebrake, then do the following:1. Carefully remove the cap covering the

S/Lock override access hole which islocated on the right side of the shiftlever.

1VQA3026


104

2. Insert the screwdriver into the accesshole and press down on the screwdriv-er.

3. Depress the lock release button andmove the shift lever.

4. Have your vehicle inspected by anauthorized Kia dealership immediately.

Ignition key interlock system The ignition key cannot be removedunless the shift lever is in the P (Park)position. If the ignition switch is in anyother position, the key cannot beremoved.

1VQA3027 1VQA3028

4 11


The cruise control system allows you toprogram the vehicle to maintain a con-stant speed without resting your foot onthe accelerator pedal.With cruise control, you can set andautomatically maintain any speed ofbetween 40 km/h (24 mph) and 160 km/h(96 mph).

To set cruise control speed:1. Pull the CRUISE ON-OFF button on

the steering wheel to turn the systemon. The CRUISE indicator light in theinstrument cluster will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed, whichmust be more than 40 km/h (24 mph)and less than 160 km/h (96 mph).

3. Push the COAST/SET switch, andrelease it at the desired speed.The SETindicator light in the instrument clusterwill illuminate. Release the acceleratorat the same time.The desired speed willautomatically be maintained.

The SET function cannot be activated untilapproximately 2 seconds after theCRUISE ON-OFF button has beenengaged.On a steep grade, the vehicle maymomentarily slow down while going down-hill.

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING - Cruise control

Do not use the cruise control fea-ture under the following conditions:• Heavy or unsteady traffic• Slippery or winding roads• Situations that involve varying

speeds

WARNINGIf the cruise control is left on,(CRUISE indicator light in theinstrument cluster illuminated) thecruise control can be switched onaccidentally. Keep the cruise con-trol system off (CRUISE indicatorlight OFF) when cruise control isnot in use.

OVQ046003NOVQ046002N


124

To cancel cruise control, do oneof the following:• Press the brake pedal.• Shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic

transaxle.• Push the CANCEL switch.Each of these actions will cancel cruisecontrol operation (the SET indicator lightin the instrument cluster will go OFF), butit will not turn the system off. If you wishto resume cruise control operation, pushthe RES/ACCEL switch located on yoursteering wheel. You will return to yourpreviously preset speed.

To turn cruise control off, do oneof the following:• Pull the CRUISE ON-OFF button (the

CRUISE indicator light in the instru-ment cluster will go OFF).

• Turn the ignition off.Both of these actions cancel cruise con-trol operation. If you want to resumecruise control operation, repeat the stepsprovided in “To Set Cruise ControlSpeed” on the previous page.

To increase cruise control setspeed:Follow either of these procedures:• Push the RES/ACCEL switch and hold

it. Your vehicle will accelerate. Releasethe switch at the speed you want.

• Push the RES/ACCEL switch andrelease it immediately. The cruisingspeed will increase by 1.6 km/h (1 mph)each time the RES/ACCEL switch isoperated in this manner.

OVQ046004N OVQ046005N

4 13


To temporarily accelerate with thecruise control on:If you want to speed up temporarily whenthe cruise control is on, depress theaccelerator pedal. Increased speed willnot interfere with cruise control operationor change the set speed.To return to the set speed, take your footoff the accelerator.

To decrease the cruising speed:Follow either of these procedures:• Push the COAST/SET switch and hold

it. Your vehicle will gradually slowdown. Release the switch at the speedyou want to maintain.

• Push the COAST/SET switch andrelease it immediately. The cruisingspeed will decrease by 1.6 km/h (1mph) each time the COAST/SET switchis operated in this manner.

To resume cruising speed atmore than 40 km/h (24 mph):If any method other than the CRUISEON-OFF switch was used to cancelcruising speed and the system is stillactivated, the most recent set speed willautomatically resume when theRES/ACCEL switch is pushed.It will not resume, however, if the vehiclespeed has dropped below 40 km/h (24mph).

OVQ046003N OVQ046005N


144

Power brakes Your vehicle has power-assisted brakesthat adjust automatically through normalusage.In the event that the power-assistedbrakes lose power because of a stalledengine or some other reason, you canstill stop your vehicle by applying greaterforce to the brake pedal than you nor-mally would. The stopping distance, how-ever, will be longer.When the engine is not running, thereserve brake power is partially depletedeach time the brake pedal is applied. Donot pump the brake pedal when thepower assist has been interrupted.Pump the brake pedal only when neces-sary to maintain steering control on slip-pery surfaces.

In the event of brake failure If service brakes fail to operate while thevehicle is in motion, you can make anemergency stop with the parking brake.The stopping distance, however, will bemuch greater than normal.

BRAKE SYSTEM

(Continued)• When descending a long or steep

hill, shift to a lower gear andavoid continuous application ofthe brakes. Continuous brakeapplication will cause the brakesto overheat and could result in atemporary loss of braking per-formance.

• Wet brakes may result in the vehi-cle not slowing down at the usualrate and pulling to one side whenthe brakes are applied. Applyingthe brakes lightly will indicatewhether they have been affectedin this way. Always test yourbrakes in this fashion after driv-ing through deep water.To dry thebrakes, apply them lightly whilemaintaining a safe forward speeduntil brake performance returnsto normal.

WARNING - Parking brakeApplying the parking brake whilethe vehicle is moving at normalspeeds can cause a sudden loss ofcontrol of the vehicle. If you mustuse the parking brake to stop thevehicle, use great caution in apply-ing the brake.

WARNING - Brakes• Do not drive with your foot rest-

ing on the brake pedal. This willcreate abnormal high brake tem-peratures, excessive brake liningand pad wear, and increasedstopping distances.

(Continued)

4 15


Disc brakes wear indicator Your vehicle has disc brakes.When your brake pads are worn andnew pads are required, you will hear ahigh-pitched warning sound from yourfront brakes or rear brakes (if equipped).You may hear this sound come and go orit may occur whenever you depress thebrake pedal.Please remember that some driving con-ditions or climates may cause a brakesqueal when you first apply (or lightlyapply) the brakes. This is normal anddoes not indicate a problem with yourbrakes.

Parking on curbed streets • When parking your vehicle on an uphill

grade, park as close to the curb aspossible and turn the front wheelsaway from the curb so that the frontwheels will contact the curb if the vehi-cle moves backward.

• When parking your vehicle on a down-hill grade, park as close to the curb aspossible and turn the front wheelstoward the curb so that the frontwheels will contact the curb if the vehi-cle moves forward.

WARNING - Brake wearThis brake wear warning soundmeans your vehicle needs service.If you ignore this audible warning,you will eventually lose braking per-formance, which could lead to aserious accident.

CAUTIONAlways replace brake pads as com-plete front or rear axle sets.

CAUTIONTo avoid costly brake repairs, donot continue to drive with wornbrake pads.


164

Parking brake To apply the parking brake, depress theparking brake pedal fully and firmlydownward while applying the servicebrake.

To release the parking brake, pull theparking brake release lever while apply-ing the service brake.The pedal will auto-matically extend to the fully releasedposition. If the parking brake pedal doesnot release or does not release all theway, have the system checked by anauthorized Kia dealer.CAUTION

Driving with the parking brakeapplied will cause excessive brakepad and brake rotor wear.

WARNING - Parking brake• To prevent unintentional move-

ment when stopped and leavingthe vehicle, do not use thegearshift lever in place of theparking brake. Set the parkingbrake AND make sure thegearshift lever is securely posi-tioned in P (Park) for automatictransaxle equipped vehicles.

• Never allow a person who is unfa-miliar with the vehicle or childrento touch the parking brake. If theparking brake is released unin-tentionally, serious injury mayoccur.

1VQA3030 1VQA3031

4 17


Check the brake warning light by turningthe ignition switch ON (do not start theengine). This light will be illuminatedwhen the parking brake is applied withthe ignition switch in the START or ONposition.Before driving, be sure the parking brakeis fully released and the brake warninglight is off.If the brake warning light remains onafter the parking brake is released, theremay be a malfunction in the brake sys-tem. Immediate attention is necessary.If at all possible, cease driving the vehi-cle immediately. If that is not possible,use extreme caution while operating thevehicle and only continue to drive thevehicle until you can reach a safe loca-tion or repair shop.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) The ABS continuously senses the speedof the wheels. If the wheels are going tolock, the ABS system repeatedly modu-lates the hydraulic brake pressure to thewheels.When you apply your brakes under con-ditions which may lock the wheels, youmay hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from thebrakes, or feel a corresponding sensationin the brake pedal. This is normal and itmeans your ABS is active.In order to obtain the maximum benefitfrom your ABS in an emergency situa-tion, do not attempt to modulate yourbrake pressure and do not try to pumpyour brakes. Press your brake pedal ashard as possible or as hard as the situa-tion warrants and allow the ABS to con-trol the force being delivered to thebrakes.

W-75

WARNING - ABSYour ABS is not a substitute forgood driving judgement. You canstill have an accident. In fact, yourABS will probably not be able toprevent an accident in the followingdriving conditions:• Dangerous driving, such as

neglecting safety precautions,speeding, or driving too close tothe vehicle in front of you.

• Driving at high speed in situa-tions providing considerably lesstraction, such as wet conditionswhere hydroplaning could occur.

• Driving too fast on poor road sur-faces. The ABS is designed toimprove maximum braking effec-tiveness on typical highways androads in good condition. On poorroad surfaces in poor condition,the ABS may actually reducebraking effectiveness.


184

• Even with the anti-lock brake system,your vehicle still requires sufficientstopping distance. Always maintain asafe distance from the vehicle in frontof you.

• Always slow down when cornering.The anti-lock brake system cannot pre-vent accidents resulting from exces-sive speeds.

• On loose or uneven road surfaces,operation of the anti-lock brake systemmay result in a longer stopping dis-tance than for vehicles equipped with aconventional brake system.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen you jump start your vehiclebecause of a drained battery, the enginemay not run as smoothly and the ABSwarning light may turn on at the sametime. This happens because of the lowbattery voltage. It does not mean yourABS is malfunctioning.• Do not pump your brakes!• Have the battery recharged before

driving the vehicle.

W-78

CAUTION• If the ABS warning light is on and

stays on, you may have a problemwith the ABS. In this case, howev-er, your regular brakes will worknormally.

• The ABS warning light will stay onfor approximately 3 seconds afterthe ignition switch is ON. Duringthat time, the ABS will go throughself-diagnosis and the light will gooff if everything is normal. If thelight stays on, you may have aproblem with your ABS. Contactan authorized Kia dealer as soonas possible.

CAUTION• When you drive on a road having

poor traction, such as an icy road,and operate your brakes continu-ously, the ABS will be active con-tinuously and the ABS warninglight may illuminate. Pull your carover to a safe place and stop theengine.

• Restart the engine. If the ABSwarning light is off, then yourABS system is normal.Otherwise, you may have a prob-lem with the ABS. Contact anauthorized Kia dealer as soon aspossible.

4 19


The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)monitors information from various vehiclesensors and then compares the driver'scommands with the actual behavior of thevehicle. If an unstable condition occurs - asudden evasive movement for example -ESC intervenes within fractions of asecond via the engine computer andbrake system and attempts to stabilizethe vehicle.

ESC operationESC ON condition

• When the ignition is turnedON, ESC and ESC OFF indi-cator lights illuminate forapproximately 3 seconds,then ESC is turned on.

• Press the ESC OFF buttonfor at least half a second afterturning the ignition ON to turnESC off. (ESC OFF indicatorwill illuminate). To turn theESC on, press the ESC OFFbutton (ESC OFF indicatorlight will go off).

• When starting the engine,you may hear a slight tickingsound. This is the ESC per-forming an automatic systemself-check and does not indi-cate a problem.

When operatingWhen the ESC is in operation,ESC indicator light blinks.• When the Electronic Stability

Control is operating properly,you can feel a slight pulsationin the vehicle. This is only theeffect of brake control and indi-cates nothing unusual.

• When moving out of the mudor slippery road, pressing theaccelerator pedal may notcause the engine rpm (revo-lutions per minute) toincrease.

ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

- ESC

❈ The location of the ESC OFF button maybe changed depending on your model.

OVQ046001N


204

ESC operation offESC OFF state

• To cancel ESC operation,press the ESC OFF button(ESC OFF indicator light illu-minates).

• If the ignition switch is turnedto LOCK position when ESCis off, ESC remains off. Uponrestarting the engine, theESC will automatically turnon again. Indicator light

When ignition switch is turned to ON, theindicator light illuminates, then goes off ifESC system is operating normally.The ESC indicator light blinks wheneverESC is operating.ESC OFF indicator light comes on wheneither the ESC is turned off with the but-ton, or ESC fails to operate when turnedon.

ESC

ESCOFF

� ESC indicator light (blinks)

� ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)

WARNINGThe Electronic Stability Controlsystem is only a driving aid; useprecautions for safe driving byslowing down on curved, snowy, oricy roads. Drive slowly and don’tattempt to accelerate whenever theESC indicator light is blinking, orwhen the road surface is slippery.

ESCOFF

4 21


ESC OFF usageWhen driving• It’s a good idea to keep the ESC turned

on for daily driving whenever possible.• To turn ESC off while driving, press the

ESC OFF button while driving on a flatroad surface.

Never press ESC OFF button while ESCis operating (ESC indicator light blinks).If ESC is turned off while ESC is operat-ing, the vehicle may slip out of control.

✽✽ NOTICE• When operating the vehicle on a

dynamometer, ensure that the ESC isturned off (ESC OFF light illuminat-ed). If the ESC is left on, it may pre-vent the vehicle speed from increas-ing, and result in false diagnosis.

• Turning the ESC off does not affectABS or brake system operation.

WARNINGNever press the ESC OFF buttonwhile ESC is operating.If the ESC is turned off while ESC isoperating, the vehicle may go out ofcontrol.To turn ESC off while driving, pressthe ESC OFF button while drivingon a flat road surface.


224

The back warning system assists thedriver during backward movement of thevehicle by chiming if any object is sensedwithin a distance of 120 cm (47 in.)behind the vehicle. This system is a sup-plemental system and it is not intendedto nor does it replace the need forextreme care and attention of the driver.The sensing range and objectsdetectable by the back sensors are limit-ed. Whenever backing-up, pay as muchattention to what is behind you as youwould in a vehicle without a back warningsystem.

Operation of the back warningsystemOperating condition• This system will activate when backing

up with the ignition key ON.If the vehicle is moved at speed over 5 km/h (3 mph), the system may notactivated correctly.

• The sensing distance while the BackWarning System is in operation isapproximately 120 cm (47 in.).

• When more than two objects aresensed at the same time, the closestone will be recognized first.

Types of warning sound• When an object is 120 cm to 81 cm (47

in. to 32 in.) from the rear bumper :Buzzer beeps intermittently

• When an object is 80 cm to 41 cm (31in. to 16 in.) from the rear bumper :Buzzer beeps more frequently

• When an object is within 40 cm (15 in.)of the rear bumper : Buzzer soundscontinuously.

BACK WARNING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNINGThe Back Warning System is a sup-plementary function only. The oper-ation of the Back Warning Systemcan be affected by several factors(including environmental condi-tions). It is the responsibility of thedriver to always check the areabehind the vehicle before backingup.

1VQA2098

4 23


Non-operational conditions ofback warning systemBack warning system may not oper-ate normally when:1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will

operate normally when moisturemelts.)

2. Sensor is covered with foreign matter,such as snow or water, or the sensorcover is blocked. (It will operate nor-mally when the material is removed orthe sensor is no longer blocked.)

3. Driving on uneven road surfaces(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, gradi-ent).

4. Objects generating excessive noise(vehicle horns, loud motorcycleengines, or truck air brakes) are withinrange of the sensor.

5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.6. Wireless transmitters or mobile phones

are within range of the sensor.7. Sensor is covered with snow.8. Trailer towing

Detecting range may decrease when:1. Sensor is stained with foreign matter

such as snow or water. (Sensing rangewill return to normal when removed.)

2. Outside air temperature is extremelyhot or cold.

Following objects may not be recog-nized by the sensor:1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,

chains or small poles.2. Objects which tend to absorb sensor

frequency such as clothes, spongymaterial or snow.

3. Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m(40 in.) and narrower than 14 cm (6 in.)in diameter.

CAUTION1. The back warning may not sound

sequentially depending on thespeed and shapes of the objectsdetected.

2. The back warning system maymalfunction if the vehicle bumperheight or sensor installation hasbeen modified or damaged. Anynon-factory installed equipmentor accessories may also interferewith the sensor performance.

3. Sensor may not recognizeobjects less than 40 cm (15 in.)from the sensor, or it may sensean incorrect distance. Use cau-tion.

4. When sensor is frozen or stainedwith snow, dirt, or water, sensormay be inoperative until thestains are removed using a softcloth.

5. Do not push, scratch or strike thesensor. Sensor damage couldoccur.


244

✽✽ NOTICEIf you don’t hear an audible warningsound or if the buzzer sounds intermit-tently when shifting the gear to “R” posi-tion, this may indicate a malfunction inthe back warning system. If this occurs,have your vehicle checked by an author-ized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

WARNINGPay close attention when the vehi-cle is driven close to objects on theroad, particularly pedestrians,especially children. Be aware thatsome objects may not be detectedby the sensors, due to the object’sdistance, size or material, all ofwhich can limit the effectiveness ofthe sensor. Always perform a visu-al inspection to make sure the vehi-cle is clear of all obstructionsbefore moving the vehicle in anydirection.

CAUTIONThis system can only sense objectswithin the range and location of thesensors; It can not detect objects inother areas where sensors are notinstalled. Also, small or slimobjects, such as poles or objectslocated between sensors may notbe detected by the sensors.Always visually check behind thevehicle when driving back up.Be sure to inform any drivers in thevehicle that may be unfamiliar withthe system regarding the systemscapabilities and limitations.Your new vehicle warranty does notcover any accidents or damage tothe vehicle or its occupants due toback warning system malfunction.Always drive safely and cautiously.

4 25


Your vehicle's fuel economy dependsmainly on your style of driving, where youdrive and when you drive.Each of these factors affects how manykilometers (miles) you can get from aliter (gallon) of fuel. To operate your vehi-cle as economically as possible, use thefollowing driving suggestions to helpsave money in both fuel and repairs:• Avoid lengthy warm-up idling. Once the

engine is running smoothly, begin driv-ing. Remember, engine warm-up maytake a little longer on cold days.

• Save fuel by accelerating slowly afterstopping.

• Keep the engine in tune and follow therecommended periodic maintenanceschedule. This will increase the life ofall parts and lower your operatingcosts.

• Do not use the air conditioner unnec-essarily.

• Slow down when driving on roughroads.

• For longer tire life and better fuel econ-omy, always keep the tires inflated tothe recommended pressures.

• Maintain a safe distance from othervehicles to avoid sudden stops. Thiswill reduce wear on brake linings andpads. Driving in such a way will alsosave fuel because extra fuel is requiredto accelerate back to driving speed.

• Do not carry unnecessary weight in thevehicle.

• Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal while driving. This can causeneedless wear, possible damage to thebrakes, and poor fuel economy.

• Improper wheel alignment results infaster tire wear and lower fuel econo-my.

• Open windows at high speeds canreduce fuel economy.

• Fuel economy is less in crosswindsand headwinds. To help offset some ofthis loss, slow down when driving inthese conditions.

Keeping a vehicle in good operating con-dition is important both for economy andsafety. Therefore, have an authorized Kiadealer perform scheduled inspectionsand maintenance.

ECONOMICAL OPERATION

WARNING - Engine off dur-ing motion

Never turn the engine off to coastdown hills or anytime the vehicle isin motion. The power steering andpower brakes will not functionproperly without the engine run-ning. Instead, keep the engine onand downshift to an appropriategear for engine braking effect. Inaddition, turning off the ignitionwhile driving could engage thesteering wheel lock resulting inloss of vehicle steering which couldcause serious injury or death.


264

Hazardous driving conditions When hazardous driving conditions areencountered such as water, snow, ice,mud, sand, or similar hazards, followthese suggestions:• Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-

tance for braking.• Avoid sudden movements in braking or

steering.• When braking with non-ABS brakes

pump the brake pedal with a light up-and-down motion until the vehicle isstopped.

• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, usesecond gear. Accelerate slowly toavoid spinning the drive wheels.

• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, orother non-slip material under the drivewheels to provide traction when stalledin ice, snow, or mud.

Rocking the vehicle If it is necessary to rock the vehicle tofree it from snow, sand, or mud, first turnthe steering wheel right and left to clearthe area around your front wheels. Then,shift back and forth between R (Reverse)and any forward gear in vehiclesequipped with an automatic transaxle. Donot race the engine, and spin the wheelsas little as possible. If you are still stuckafter a few tries, have the vehicle pulledout by a tow vehicle to avoid engine over-heating and possible damage to thetransaxle.

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

WARNING - DownshiftingDownshifting with an automatictransaxle, while driving on slipperysurfaces can cause an accident.The sudden change in tire speedcould cause the tires to skid. Becareful when downshifting on slip-pery surfaces.

WARNING - ABSDo not pump the brake pedal on avehicle equipped with ABS.

CAUTIONProlonged rocking may causeengine over-heating, transaxle dam-age or failure, and tire damage.

CAUTIONThe ESC system (if equipped)should be turned OFF prior to rock-ing the vehicle.

WARNING - Spinning tiresDo not spin the wheels, especiallyat speeds more than 56 km/h (35mph). Spinning the wheels at highspeeds when the vehicle is station-ary could cause a tire to overheat,explode and injure bystanders.

4 27


Driving at night Because night driving presents morehazards than driving in the daylight, hereare some important tips to remember:• Slow down and keep more distance

between you and other vehicles, as itmay be more difficult to see at night,especially in areas where there maynot be any street lights.

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glarefrom other driver's headlights.

• Keep your headlights clean and prop-erly aimed on vehicles not equippedwith the automatic headlight aimingfeature. Dirty or improperly aimedheadlights will make it much more diffi-cult to see at night.

• Avoid staring directly at the headlightsof oncoming vehicles. You could betemporarily blinded, and it will takeseveral seconds for your eyes to read-just to the darkness.

Driving in the rain Rain and wet roads can make drivingdangerous, especially if you’re not pre-pared for the slick pavement. Here are afew things to consider when driving in therain:• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to

see and will increase the distanceneeded to stop your vehicle, so slowdown.

• Keep your windshield wiping equip-ment in good shape. Replace yourwindshield wiper blades when theyshow signs of streaking or missingareas on the windshield.

• If your tires are not in good condition,making a quick stop on wet pavementcan cause a skid and possibly lead toan accident. Be sure your tires are ingood shape.

• Turn on your headlights to make it eas-ier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large puddlescan affect your brakes. If you must gothrough puddles, try to drive throughthem slowly.

• If you believe you may have gottenyour brakes wet, apply them lightlywhile driving until normal braking oper-ation returns.

Driving in flooded areas Avoid driving through flooded areasunless you are sure the water is no high-er than the bottom of the wheel hub.Drive through any water slowly. Allowadequate stopping distance becausebrake performance may be affected.After driving through water, dry thebrakes by gently applying them severaltimes while the vehicle is moving slowly.


284

• We recommend that you carry emer-gency equipment, including a windowscraper, windshield de-icer, a bag ofsand or salt, flares, a small shovel andjumper cables.

• Make sure you have sufficient ethyl-ene-glycol coolant in the radiator.

• Check the battery condition andcables. Cold temperatures reduce thecapacity of any battery, so it must be inexcellent condition to provide enoughwinter starting power.

• Make sure the engine oil viscosity issuitable for cold weather.

• Check the ignition system for looseconnections and damage.

• Use antifreeze-formulated windshieldwasher fluid. (Do not use enginecoolant antifreeze.)

• Do not use the parking brake if it mightfreeze. When parking, shift to P (Park)with an automatic transaxle and blockthe rear wheels.

Snow tires If you mount snow tires on your Kia,make sure they are radial tires of thesame size and load range as the originaltires. Mount snow tires on all four wheelsto balance your vehicle’s handling in allweather conditions. Keep in mind that thetraction provided by snow tires on dryroads may not be as high as your vehi-cle's original equipment tires. You shoulddrive cautiously even when the roads areclear. Check with the tire dealer for max-imum speed recommendations.

Do not install studded tires without firstchecking local, state and municipal regu-lations for possible restrictions againsttheir use.

WINTER DRIVING

WARNING - Snow tire sizeSnow tires should be equivalent insize and type to the vehicle's stan-dard tires. Otherwise, the safety andhandling of your vehicle may beadversely affected.

TRAILER TOWING

WARNING - Towing a trail-er

If you don't use the correct equip-ment and drive improperly, you canlose control when you pull a trailer.For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not work well- or even at all. You and your pas-sengers could be seriously or fatal-ly injured. Pull a trailer only if youhave followed all the steps in thissection.

WARNING - Weight limitsBefore towing, make sure the totaltrailer weight, gross combinationweight, gross vehicle weight, grossaxle weight and trailer tongue loadare all within the limits.

4 29


Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identifywhat the vehicle trailering capacity is foryour vehicle, you should read the infor-mation in “Weight of the Trailer” thatappears later in this section.

Remember that trailering is different thanjust driving your vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes in handling,durability, and fuel economy. Successful,safe trailering requires correct equip-ment, and it has to be used properly.

This section contains many time-tested,important trailering tips and safety rules.Many of these are important for yoursafety and that of your passengers.Please read this section carefully beforeyou pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as theengine, transaxle, wheel assemblies, andtires are forced to work harder againstthe load of the added weight. The engineis required to operate at relatively higherspeeds and under greater loads. Thisadditional burden generates extra heat.The trailer also adds considerably towind resistance, increasing the pullingrequirements.

Hitches It's important to have the correct hitchequipment. Crosswinds, large trucksgoing by, and rough roads are a few rea-sons why you’ll need the right hitch. Hereare some rules to follow:• Will you have to make any holes in the

body of your vehicle when you install atrailer hitch? If you do, then be sure toseal the holes later when you removethe hitch.If you don’t seal them, deadly carbonmonoxide (CO) from your exhaust canget into your vehicle, as well as dirt andwater.

• The bumpers on your vehicle are notintended for hitches. Do not attachrental hitches or other bumper-typehitches to them. Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does not attach tothe bumper.

Item kg (lbs.)

Maximum trailer Without trailer brakes 453 (1000)

weight With trailer brakes 1587 (3500)

Maximum permissible static vertical

load on the coupling device 158 (350)

CAUTIONPulling a trailer improperly candamage your vehicle and result incostly repairs not covered by yourwarranty. To pull a trailer correctly,follow the advice in this section.


304

Safety chains You should always attach chainsbetween your vehicle and your trailer.Cross the safety chains under the tongueof the trailer so that the tongue will notdrop to the road if it becomes separatedfrom the hitch.Instructions about safety chains may beprovided by the hitch manufacturer or bythe trailer manufacturer. Follow the man-ufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety chains. Always leave just enoughslack so you can turn with your trailer.And, never allow safety chains to drag onthe ground.

Trailer brakes If your trailer weighs more than the max-imum trailer weight without trailer brakesloaded, then it needs its own brakes andthey must be adequate. Be sure to readand follow the instructions for the trailerbrakes so you’ll be able to install, adjustand maintain them properly.• Don’t tap into your vehicle's brake sys-

tem.

Driving with a trailer Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Before setting outfor the open road, you must get to knowyour trailer. Acquaint yourself with thefeel of handling and braking with theadded weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you aredriving is now a good deal longer and notnearly so responsive as your vehicle isby itself.Before you start, check the trailer hitchand platform, safety chains, electricalconnector(s), lights, tires and mirroradjustment. If the trailer has electricbrakes, start your vehicle and trailer mov-ing and then apply the trailer brake con-troller by hand to be sure the brakes areworking. This lets you check your electri-cal connection at the same time.During your trip, check occasionally to besure that the load is secure, and that thelights and any trailer brakes are still work-ing.

WARNING - Trailer brakesDo not use a trailer with its ownbrakes unless you are absolutelycertain that you have properly setup the brake system. This is not atask for amateurs. Use an experi-enced, competent trailer shop forthis work.

4 31


Following distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehi-cle ahead as you would when drivingyour vehicle without a trailer. This canhelp you avoid situations that requireheavy braking and sudden turns.

Passing You’ll need more passing distance upahead when you’re towing a trailer. And,because of the increased vehicle length,you’ll need to go much farther beyond thepassed vehicle before you can return toyour lane.

Backing up Hold the bottom of the steering wheelwith one hand. Then, to move the trailerto the left, just move your hand to the left.To move the trailer to the right, move yourhand to the right. Always back up slowlyand, if possible, have someone guideyou.

Making turns When you’re turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do this so yourtrailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs,road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoidjerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal wellin advance.

Turn signals when towing a trailer When you tow a trailer, your vehicle hasto have a different turn signal flasher andextra wiring. The green arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash whenever yousignal a turn or lane change. Properlyconnected, the trailer lights will also flashto alert other drivers you’re about to turn,change lanes, or stop.When towing a trailer, the green arrowson your instrument panel will flash forturns even if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. Thus, you may think driversbehind you are seeing your signalswhen, in fact, they are not. It’s importantto check occasionally to be sure the trail-er bulbs are still working. You must alsocheck the lights every time you discon-nect and then reconnect the wires.Do not connect a trailer lighting systemdirectly to your vehicle’s lighting system.Use only an approved trailer wiring har-ness.Your Authorized Kia Dealer can assistyou in installing the wiring harness.

Driving on grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gearbefore you start down a long or steepdowngrade. If you don’t shift down, youmight have to use your brakes so muchthat they would get hot and no longeroperate efficiently.On a long uphill grade, shift down andreduce your speed to around 70 km/h (45mph) to reduce the possibility of engineand transaxle overheating.If your trailer weighs more than the max-imum trailer weight without trailer brakesand you have an automatic transaxle,you should drive in D (Drive) when tow-ing a trailer.Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) whentowing a trailer will minimize heat build upand extend the life of your transaxle.

WARNING Failure to use an approved trailerwiring harness could result in dam-age to the vehicle electrical systemand/or personal injury.


324

Parking on hills Generally, you should not park your vehi-cle, with a trailer attached, on a hill.People can be seriously or fatally injured,and both your vehicle and the trailer canbe damaged if they begin a downhill tra-jectory.

However, if you ever have to park yourtrailer on a hill, here’s how to do it:1. Apply your brakes, but don’t shift into

gear.2. Have someone place chocks under

the trailer wheels.3. When the wheel chocks are in place,

release the brakes until the chocksabsorb the load.

4. Reapply the brakes. Apply your park-ing brake, and then shift to P (Park) foran automatic transaxle.

5. Release the brakes.

When you are ready to leave afterparking on a hill 1. With the automatic transaxle in P

(Park), apply your brakes and hold thebrake pedal down while you:• Start your engine;• Shift into gear; and• Release the parking brake.

2. Slowly remove your foot from thebrake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear ofthe chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up andstore the chocks.

CAUTION• When towing a trailer on steep

grades (in excess of 6%) payclose attention to the enginecoolant temperature gauge toensure the engine does not over-heat. If the needle of the coolanttemperature gauge moves acrossthe dial towards “H” (HOT), pullover and stop as soon as it is safeto do so, and allow the engine toidle until it cools down. You mayproceed once the engine hascooled sufficiently.

• You must decide driving speeddepending on trailer weight anduphill grade to reduce the possi-bility of engine and transaxleoverheating.

WARNING - Parking on ahill

Parking your vehicle on a hill with atrailer attached could cause seriousinjury or death, should the trailerbreak lose.

WARNING - Parking brakeIt can be dangerous to get out ofyour vehicle if the parking brake isnot firmly set.If you have left the engine running,the vehicle can move suddenly. Youor others could be seriously orfatally injured.

4 33


Maintenance when trailer towing Your vehicle will need service more oftenwhen you regularly pull a trailer.Important items to pay particular atten-tion to include engine oil, automatictransaxle fluid, axle lubricant and coolingsystem fluid. Brake condition is anotherimportant item to frequently check. Eachitem is covered in this manual, and theIndex will help you find them quickly. Ifyou’re trailering, it’s a good idea to reviewthese sections before you start your trip.Don’t forget to also maintain your trailerand hitch. Follow the maintenanceschedule that accompanied your trailerand check it periodically. Preferably, con-duct the check at the start of each day’sdriving. Most importantly, all hitch nutsand bolts should be tight.

If you do decide to pull a trailerHere are some important points if youdecide to pull a trailer:• State, provincial, county and municipal

government have varying traileringlaws. Make sure your hitch, mirrors,lights and wiring arrangements arelegal, not only where you live, but alsowhere you’ll be driving. A good sourcefor this information is provincial or locallaw enforcement agencies.

• Consider using a sway control.You canask a hitch dealer about sway control.

• After your odometer indicates 800 km(500 miles) or more, you can tow atrailer. For the first 800 km (500 miles)that you tow a trailer, don’t drive over80 km/h (50 mph) and don’t makestarts at full throttle. This helps yourengine and other parts of your vehicle“wear” in at the heavier loads.

• Always drive your vehicle at a moder-ate speed (less than 100 km/h (60mph)).

• On a long uphill grade, do not exceed70 km/h (45 mph) or the posted towingspeed limit, whichever is lower.

• The important considerations have todo with weight:

CAUTION• Due to higher load during trailer

usage, overheating might occurin hot days or during uphill driv-ing. If the coolant gauge indicatesover-heating, switch off the A/Cand stop the vehicle in a safe areato cool down the engine.

• When towing check transaxlefluid more frequently.

• If your vehicle is not equippedwith the air conditioner, youshould install a condenser fan toimprove engine performancewhen towing a trailer.


344

Weight of the trailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be? Itshould never weigh more than the maxi-mum trailer weight with trailer brakes. Buteven that can be too heavy.It depends on how you plan to use yourtrailer. For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature and howmuch your vehicle is used to pull a trailerare all important. The ideal trailer weightcan also depend on any special equip-ment that you have on your vehicle.

Weight of the trailer tongueThe tongue load of any trailer is animportant weight to measure because itaffects the total gross vehicle weight(GVW) of your vehicle. This weightincludes the curb weight of the vehicle,any cargo you may carry in it, and thepeople who will be riding in the vehicle.And if you will tow a trailer, you must addthe tongue load to the GVW becauseyour vehicle will also be carrying thatweight.

The trailer tongue should weigh a maxi-mum of 10% of the total loaded trailerweight. After you've loaded your trailer,weigh the trailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights are prop-er. If they aren’t, you may be able to cor-rect them simply by moving some itemsaround in the trailer.

WARNING - Trailer• Never load a trailer with more

weight in the rear than in thefront. The front should be loadedwith approximately 60% of thetotal trailer load; the rear shouldbe loaded with approximately40% of the total trailer load.

• Never exceed the maximumweight limits of the trailer or trail-er towing equipment. Improperloading can result in damage toyour vehicle and/or personalinjury. Check weights and loadingat a commercial scale or highwaypatrol office equipped withscales.

• An improperly loaded trailer cancause loss of vehicle control.

WARNING - Vehicle weightThe gross axle weight rating(GAWR) and the gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR) for your vehi-cle are on the manufacturer's labelattached to the driver's door.Exceeding these ratings can causean accident or vehicle damage. Youcan calculate the weight of yourload by weighing the items (andpeople) before putting them in thevehicle. Be careful not to overloadyour vehicle.

OVERLOADING

4 35


Vehicle identification number(VIN)

Tire specification / pressure label

Engine number

LABEL INFORMATION There are several important labels and identification numbers located on your vehicle. The label locations are identified in the illus-trations shown.

OVQ076001N

OVQ066023N

OVQ076002NIdentification label (if equipped)

Frame number VIN (if equipped)

OVQ076003N

OVQ066022N

5

Road warning / 5-2Emergency starting / 5-2If the engine overheats / 5-5Tires pressure monitoring system (TPMS) / 5-6If you have a flat tire / 5-10Towing / 5-19



25

ROAD WARNING

Hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher serves as awarning to other drivers to exerciseextreme caution when approaching,overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emergencyrepairs are being made or when the vehi-cle is stopped near the edge of a road-way.Depress the flasher switch with the igni-tion switch in any position. The flasherswitch is located in the center consoleswitch panel. All turn signal lights willflash simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher operateswhether your vehicle is running or not.

• The turn signals do not work when thehazard flasher is on.

• Care must be taken when using thehazard warning flasher while the vehi-cle is being towed.

Jump starting Jump starting can be dangerous if doneincorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm toyourself or damage to your vehicle orbattery, follow the jump starting proce-dures. If in doubt, we strongly recom-mend that you have a competent techni-cian or towing service jump start yourvehicle.

EMERGENCY STARTING

CAUTIONUse only a 12-volt jumper system.You can damage a 12-volt startingmotor, ignition system, and otherelectrical parts beyond repair byuse of a 24-volt power supply (eithertwo 12-volt batteries in series or a24-volt motor generator set).

OVQ036059N

OVQ036060N

Type A

Type B

5 3


Connecting jumper cables

WARNING - Battery• Keep all flames or sparks away

from the battery. The battery pro-duces hydrogen gas which mayexplode if exposed to flame orsparks.

• Do not attempt to jump start thevehicle if the discharged batteryis frozen or if the electrolyte levelis low; the battery may rupture orexplode.

WARNING - BatteryNever attempt to check the elec-trolyte level of the battery as thismay cause the battery to rupture orexplode causing serious injury.

1VQA4001

Connect cables in numerical order anddisconnect in reverse order.

Discharged battery

Jumper Cables

Booster battery

(-)

(+)

(+)(-)


45

Jump starting procedure 1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-

volt and that its negative terminal isgrounded.

2. If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, do not allow the vehicles totouch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary electricalloads.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the exactsequence shown in the previous illus-tration. First connect one end of ajumper cable to the positive terminal ofthe discharged battery (1), then con-nect the other end to the positive ter-minal on the booster battery (2).Proceed to connect one end of theother jumper cable to the negative ter-minal of the booster battery (3), thenthe other end to a solid, stationary,metallic point (for example, the enginelifting bracket) away from the battery(4). Do not connect it to or near anypart that moves when the engine iscranked.

Do not allow the jumper cables to con-tact anything except the correct bat-tery terminals or the correct ground.Do not lean over the battery whenmaking connections.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with thebooster battery and let it run at 2,000rpm, then start the engine of the vehi-cle with the discharged battery.

If the cause of your battery discharging isnot apparent, you should have your vehi-cle checked by an Authorized Kia Dealer.

Push-starting Vehicles equipped with automatictransaxle cannot be push-started.Follow the directions in this section forjump-starting.

CAUTIONNever tow a vehicle to start itbecause the sudden surge forwardwhen the engine starts could causea collision with the tow vehicle.

CAUTION - Battery cablesDo not connect the jumper cablefrom the negative terminal of thebooster battery to the negative ter-minal of the discharged battery.This can cause the discharged bat-tery to overheat and crack, releas-ing battery acid.

5 5


IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS If your temperature gauge indicates over-heating, if you experience a loss ofpower, or if you hear a loud knocking orpinging noise, the engine has probablyoverheated. Should any of these symp-toms occur, use the following procedure:1. Turn on the hazard warning flasher,

then drive to the nearest safe locationand stop your vehicle; set the auto-matic transaxle in P (Park) and applythe parking brake.

2. Make sure the air conditioner is off.3. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the

radiator, stop the engine and call anAuthorized Kia Dealer for assistance.If coolant is not boiling out, allow theengine to idle and open the hood topermit the engine to cool gradually.If the temperature does not go downwith the engine idling, stop the engineand allow sufficient time for it to cool.

4. The coolant level should then bechecked. If the level in the reservoir islow, look for leaks at the radiatorhoses and connections, heater hosesand connections, radiator, and waterpump. If you find a major leak oranother problem that may havecaused the engine to overheat, do notoperate the engine until it has beencorrected. Call an Authorized KiaDealer for assistance. If you do notfind a leak or other problem, carefullyadd coolant to the reservoir.

If the engine frequently overheats, havethe cooling system checked and repairedby an Authorized Kia Dealer.

WARNING - Removingradiator cap

Do not remove the radiator capwhen the engine and radiator arehot. Scalding hot coolant and steammay blow out under pressure. Thiscould cause serious injury.


65

TIRES PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

(1) Low Tire Pressure Indicator(2) Low Tire Pressure Position

Indicator(3) TPMS Malfunction Indicator

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when cold andinflated to the inflation pressure rec-ommended by the vehicle manufac-turer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehi-cle has tires of a different size thanthe size indicated on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressurelabel, you should determine theproper tire inflation pressure forthose tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with aTire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure indicator and a low tirepressure position indicator when oneor more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated. Accordingly, when thelow tire pressure indicator and a lowtire pressure indicator position indi-cator illuminate, you should stop andcheck your tires as soon as possible,and inflate them to the proper pres-sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-heat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-ciency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire mainte-nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-bility to maintain correct tire pres-sure, even if under-inflation has notreached the level to trigger illumina-tion of the TPMS low tire pressureand position indicators.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMS mal-function indicator is provided by aseparate indicator, which displaysthe symbol "TPMS" when illuminat-ed. When the malfunction indicatoris illuminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tire pres-sure as intended. TPMS malfunc-tions may occur for a variety of rea-sons, including the installation ofreplacement or alternative tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctionindicator after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alter-nate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to function proper-ly.

OVQ036414N

Type A

Type B

5 7


Low tire pressureindicator

Low tire pressureposition indicator

When the tire pressure monitoringsystem warning indicators are illumi-nated, one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. And thelow tire pressure position indicatorlight will indicate which tire is signifi-cantly under-inflated by illuminatingthe corresponding position light.Immediately reduce your speed,avoid hard cornering and anticipateincreased stopping distances. Youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible. Inflate the tires tothe proper pressure as indicated onthe vehicle’s placard or tire inflationpressure label located on the driver’sside center pillar outer panel. If youcannot reach a service station or ifthe tire cannot hold the newly addedair, replace the low pressure tire withthe compact spare tire.

The Low Tire Pressure and Positionindicators will remain on when thelow pressure tire is in the vehiclebefore you have the low pressure tirerepaired and replaced on the vehicle.However, if the low pressure tire isnot in the vehicle, the Low TirePressure and Position indicators willgo off and the TPMS malfunctionindicator will go on after a few min-utes because the compact spare tireis not equipped with a tire pressuresensor.

CAUTIONIn winter or cold weather, the lowtire pressure indicator may beilluminated if the tire pressurewas adjusted to the recommend-ed tire inflation pressure in warmweather. It does not mean yourTPMS is malfunctioning becausethe decreased temperature leadsto a proportional lowering of tirepressure.When you drive your vehiclefrom a warm area to a cold areaor from a cold area to a warmarea, or the outside temperaturesignificantly increases ordecreases, you should checkthe tire inflation pressure andadjust the tires to the recom-mended tire inflation pressure.


85

TPMS (Tire pressuremonitoring system)malfunction indicatorThe TPMS malfunction indicatorcomes on and stays on when there isa problem with the Tire PressureMonitoring System. If Front Left sen-sor fails, the TPMS malfunction indica-tor comes on, but if Front Right, RearLeft, or Rear Right tire is under-inflat-ed, the low tire pressure and positionindicators may come on together withthe TPMS malfunction indicator.Have the system checked by anauthorized Kia dealer as soon aspossible to determine the cause ofthe problem.

✽✽ NOTICE• The TPMS malfunction indicator

may be illuminated if the vehicle ismoving around electric powersupply cable or radio transmittersuch as police stations, govern-ment and public offices, broad-casting stations, military installa-tions, airports, or transmittingtower, etc. this can interfere withnormal operation of the TireMonitoring System (TPMS).

• The TPMS malfunction indicatormay be illuminated if some elec-tronic devices, such as notebookcomputer, are used in the vehicle.This can interfere with normaloperation of the Tire MonitoringSystem (TPMS).

Changing a tire with TPMSIf you have a flat tire, the Low TirePressure and Position indicators willcome on. Have the flat tire repairedby an authorized Kia dealer as soonas possible or replace the flat tirewith the compact spare tire. NEVERuse a puncture-repairing agent torepair and/or inflate a low pressuretire. If used, you will have to replacethe tire pressure sensor.

Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside thetire behind the valve stem. You mustuse TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-ommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by an authorizedKia dealer as soon as possible.Even if you replace the low pressuretire with the compact tire, the LowTire Pressure and Position indicatorswill remain on when the low pressuretire is in the vehicle. However, if thelow pressure tire is not in the vehicle,the Low Tire Pressure and Positionindicators will go off and the TPMSmalfunction indicator will go on aftera few minutes because the compactspare tire does not have a sensor.Once the low pressure tire is re-inflated to the recommended pres-sure and installed on the vehicle, theTPMS malfunction indicator and thelow tire pressure and position indica-tors will extinguish within a few min-utes.If the indicators are not extinguishedafter a few minutes, please visit anauthorized Kia dealer.

TPMS

WARNING - Low tirepressure

Significantly low tire pressuremakes the vehicle unstable andcan contribute to loss of vehiclecontrol and increased brakingdistances.Continued driving on low pres-sure tires will cause the tires tooverheat and fail.

5 9


You may not be able identify a lowtire by simply looking at it. Alwaysuse a good quality tire pressuregauge to measure the tire's inflationpressure. Please note that a tire thatis hot (from being driven) will have ahigher pressure measurement than atire that is cold (from sitting station-ary for at least 3 hours and drivenless than 1.6 km (1 mile) during that3 hour period). Allow the tire to coolbefore measuring the inflation pres-sure.Always be sure the tire is cold beforeinflating to the recommended pres-sure.A cold tire means the vehicle hasbeen sitting for 3 hours and driven forless than 1.6 km (1 mile) in that 3hour period.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not use any tire sealant if yourvehicle is equipped with a TirePressure Monitoring System. Theliquid sealant can damage the tirepressure sensors.

This device complies withIndustry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause inter-

ference, and 2. This device must accept any inter-

ference, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation ofthe device.

WARNING - TPMS• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire dam-age caused by external fac-tors.

• If you feel any vehicle instabil-ity, immediately take your footoff the accelerator and slowlymove to a safe position off theroad.

WARNINGTampering with, modifying, ordisabling the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)components may interfere withthe system's ability to warn thedriver of low tire pressure con-ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-tions. Tampering with, modify-ing, or disabling the TirePressure Monitoring System(TPMS) components may voidthe warranty for that portion ofthe vehicle.

WARNINGChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliancecould void the user’s authorityto operate the equipment.


105

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

The spare tire, jack, jack handle,wheel lug nut wrench are stored inthe luggage compartment. Removethe panel indicated in the illustration.

Removing the spare tire Your spare tire is stored underneathyour vehicle, directly below the rightsliding door.1. Open the right sliding door and

find the plastic hex bolt cover onthe floor.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Use the wheel lug nut wrench toloosen the bolt enough to lowerthe spare tire.

1VQA4035

OVQ056002N

OVQ056003N OVQ056004N

5 11


4. Turn the wrench counterclockwiseuntil the spare tire reaches theground. After the spare tire reach-es the ground, continue to turn thewrench counterclockwise, anddraw the spare tire outside. Neverrotate the wrench excessively, oth-erwise the spare tire carrier maybe damaged.

5. Remove the retainer from the cen-ter of the spare tire.

Storing the spare tire 1. Lay the tire on the ground with the

valve stem facing down.2. Place the wheel under the vehicle

and install the retainer through thewheel center.

3. Turn the wrench clockwise until itclicks.

WARNINGEnsure the spare tire retainer isproperly aligned with the centerof the spare tire to prevent thespare tire “rattling”. Otherwise, itmay cause the spare tire to falloff the carrier and lead to anaccident.

OVQ056005N OVQ056006N


125

Important - use of compactspare tireYour vehicle is equipped with a com-pact spare tire. This compact sparetire takes up less space than a regu-lar-size tire. This tire is smaller than aconventional tire and is designed fortemporary use only.

The compact spare should be inflat-ed to 420 kPa (60 psi).

✽✽ NOTICECheck the inflation pressure afterinstalling the spare tire. Adjust it tothe specified pressure, as necessary.

When using a compact spare tire,observe the following precautions:• Under no circumstances should

you exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); ahigher speed could damage thetire.

• Ensure that you drive slowlyenough for the road conditions toavoid all hazards. Any road hazard,such as a pothole or debris, couldseriously damage the compactspare.

• Any continuous road use of this tirecould result in tire failure, loss ofvehicle control, and possible per-sonal injury.

• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-mum load rating or the load-carry-ing capacity shown on the sidewallof the compact spare tire.

• Avoid driving over obstacles. Thecompact spare tire diameter issmaller than the diameter of a con-ventional tire and reduces theground clearance approximately25 mm (1 inch), which could resultin damage to the vehicle.

CAUTION• You should drive carefully

when the compact spare is inuse. The compact spareshould be replaced by theproper conventional tire andrim at the first opportunity.

• The operation of this vehicleis not recommended withmore than one compact sparetire in use at the same time.

WARNINGThis spare tire should be usedonly for VERY short distances.Compact spares should NEVERbe used for long drives orextended distances.

5 13


• Do not take this vehicle through anautomatic car wash while the com-pact spare tire is installed.

• Do not use tire chains on the com-pact spare tire. Because of thesmaller size, a tire chain will not fitproperly. This could damage thevehicle and result in loss of thechain.

• The compact spare tire should notbe installed on the front axle if thevehicle must be driven in snow oron ice.

• Do not use the compact spare tireon any other vehicle because thistire has been designed especiallyfor your vehicle.

• The compact spare tire’s tread lifeis shorter than a regular tire.Inspect your compact spare tireregularly and replace worn com-pact spare tires with the same sizeand design, mounted on the samewheel.

Changing tires Jacking instructions The jack is provided for emergencytire changing only.To prevent the jack from “rattling”while the vehicle is in motion, lowerthe jack to the lowest position, placethe jack in the luggage side trim andturn the wing bolt (1) clockwise firmly.Make sure the jack is secured firmlyby trying to move the jack forwardand backward.

Follow jacking instructions to reducethe possibility of personal injury.

WARNING - Changingtires

• Never attempt vehicle repairsin the traffic lanes of a publicroad or highway.

• Always move the vehicle com-pletely off the road and ontothe shoulder before trying tochange a tire. The jack shouldbe used on level firm ground.If you cannot find a firm, levelplace off the road, call a tow-ing service company forassistance.

• Be sure to use the correctfront and rear jacking posi-tions on the vehicle; never usethe bumpers or any other partof the vehicle for jack support.

(Continued)

OVQ056007N


145

Tire replacement 1. Park on a level surface and apply

the parking brake firmly.2. Shift the shift lever into P (Park)

with automatic transaxle.3. Activate the hazard warning flash-

er.

4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,jack, jack handle, and spare tirefrom the vehicle.

5. Block both the front and rear of thewheel that is diagonally oppositethe jack position.

1VQA4022 1VQA4023

(Continued)• The vehicle can easily roll off

the jack causing seriousinjury or death. No personshould place any portion oftheir body under a vehicle thatis supported only by a jack;use vehicle support stands.

• Do not start or run the enginewhile the vehicle is on thejack.

• Do not allow anyone to remainin the vehicle while it is on thejack.

• Make sure any children pres-ent are in a secure place awayfrom the road and from thevehicle to be raised with thejack.

5 15


6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-terclockwise one turn each, but donot remove any nut until the tirehas been raised off the ground.

7. Place the jack at the front or rearjacking position closest to the tireyou are changing. Place the jackat the designated locations underthe frame. The jacking positionsare plates welded to the framewith two tabs and a raised dot toindex with the jack.

WARNING - Jack locationTo reduce the possibility ofinjury, be sure to use only thejack provided with the vehicleand in the correct jack position;never use any other part of thevehicle for jack support.

1VQA4024 1VQA4025

WARNING - Changing a tire• To prevent vehicle movement

while changing a tire, alwaysset the parking brake fully, andalways block the wheel diago-nally opposite the wheel beingchanged.

• We recommend that thewheels of the vehicle bechocked, and that no personremain in a vehicle that isbeing jacked.


165

8. Insert the jack handle into the jackand turn it clockwise, raising thevehicle until the tire just clears theground. This measurement isapproximately 30 mm (1.2 in).Before removing the wheel lugnuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-ble and that there is no chance formovement or slippage.

9. Remove the wheel lug nuts byturning them counterclockwise,then remove the wheel.

10. Mount the spare tire into positionand install the wheel lug nutswith the beveled edge inward.

11. Once the wheel lug nuts havebeen tightened, lower the vehiclefully to the ground and continue totighten the lug nuts until they arefully secured. Tighten the wheellug nuts firmly in a “ ” pattern.If you are unsure of the tightnessof the wheel lug nuts, have themchecked at the nearest servicestation. The specified tighteningtorque is 9~11 kg•m (65-79 lb•ft,88-107 N•m). Improperly tight-ened wheel lug nuts could causebrake pedal vibration while brak-ing.

CAUTIONYour vehicle has metric threadson the wheel studs and nuts.Make certain during wheelremoval that the same nutsremoved are reinstalled - or, ifreplaced, that nuts with metricthreads and the same chamferconfiguration are used.Installation of a non-metricthread nut on a metric stud orvice-versa will not secure thewheel to the hub properly andwill damage the stud so that itmust be replaced.Note that most lug nuts do nothave metric threads. Be sure touse extreme care in checkingfor thread style before installingaftermarket lug nuts or wheels.If in doubt, consult anAuthorized Kia Dealer.

OVQ056008N1VQA4026

X

5 17


To prevent the jack, jack handle,wheel lug nut wrench and spare tirefrom rattling while the vehicle is inmotion, store them properly. Carrying a flat tire

Do not store the flat tire on the com-pact spare tire carrier underneathyour vehicle. The full size flat tireshould be stored and fixed in thevehicle until you reach a service sta-tion.

To place a flat tire in the vehicle:1. Put the flat tire into the cover with

the valve stem facing up.

WARNING - Wheel studsIf the studs are damaged, theymay lose their ability to retainthe wheel.This could lead to theloss of the wheel and a collisionresulting in serious injuries.

WARNING - Inadequatespare tire pressure

Check the inflation pressures assoon as possible after installingthe spare tire. Adjust it to thespecified pressure, if necessary.Refer to Section 8, Specifications.

OVQ056009N OVQ056010N


185

2. Place the flat tire in the cargo areawhen the 3rd row seat is uprightposition or on the floor when the3rd row seat is stowed in the cargoarea.

3. Pass one end of the strap throughthe wheel center and connect bothstrap hooks to each striker of the3rd row seat on the floor.

4. Tighten the strap firmly using theratchet.

5. Make sure the flat tire is properlysecured by trying to move it.

WARNING - Flat tireNever leave the flat tire unfixedin the vehicle to prevent the tire“rattling”. Otherwise, the unse-cured flat tire may be thrownabout inside the vehicle whichcan cause damage to the vehi-cle and serious injury or deathto the vehicle occupants in caseof a sharp turn, a sudden stopor an accident.

OVQ056013N

OVQ056014N

OVQ056300N

OVQ056011N

OVQ056012N

5 19


TOWING

If emergency towing is necessary, werecommend having it done by an author-ized Kia dealer or a commercial tow-truckservice. Proper lifting and towing proce-dures are necessary to prevent damageto the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies orflatbed is recommended.For trailer towing guidelines information,refer to section 4 “Driving your vehicle”.

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with therear wheels on the ground (without dol-lies) and the front wheels off the ground.When being towed by a commercial towtruck and wheel dollies are not used, thefront of the vehicle should always be lift-ed, not the rear.

1VQA40291VQA4028

1VQA4030

1GHA4105A

CAUTION• Do not tow the vehicle backwards

with the front wheels on theground as this may cause dam-age to the vehicle.

• Do not tow with sling-type equip-ment. Use wheel lift or flatbedequipment.


205

CAUTION• Attach a towing strap to the tow

hook.• Using a portion of the vehicle

other than the tow hooks for tow-ing may damage the body of yourvehicle.

• Use only a cable or chain specifi-cally intended for use in towingvehicles. Securely fasten thecable or chain to the towing hookprovided.

When towing your vehicle in an emer-gency without wheel dollies :1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi-

tion.2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N

(Neutral).3. Release the parking brake.

If your car must be towedTowing with a vehicle other than atow truck If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by an AuthorizedKia dealer or a commercial tow truckservice.If towing service is not available in anemergency, your vehicle may be tem-porarily towed using a cable or chainsecured to the emergency towing hookunder the rear of the vehicle. Useextreme caution when towing the vehicle.A driver must be in the vehicle to steer itand operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done onlyon hard-surfaced roads for a short dis-tance and at low speeds. Also, thewheels, axles, power train, steering andbrakes must all be in good condition.• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehi-

cle out of mud, sand or other condi-tions from which the vehicle cannot bedriven out under its own power.

• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than thevehicle doing the towing.

• The drivers of both vehicles shouldcommunicate with each other frequent-ly.

CAUTIONFailure to place the transaxle shiftlever in N (Neutral) may cause inter-nal damage to the transaxle. OVQ056016N

5 21


• Before emergency towing, check thatthe hook is not broken or damaged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chainsecurely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady andeven force.

• To avoid damaging the hook, do notpull from the side or at a vertical angle.Always pull straight ahead.

Tips for towing a stuck vehicleThe following methods are effectivewhen your vehicle is stuck in mud, sandor similar substances that prevent thevehicle from being driven out under itsown power.• Remove the soil and sand, etc. from

the front and the back of the tires.• Place a stone or wood under the tires.

Tie-down hook (for flatbed towing)

(Continued)• Tow the vehicle as straight ahead

as possible.• Keep away from the vehicle dur-

ing towing.

WARNING Use extreme caution when towingthe vehicle.• Avoid sudden starts or erratic

driving maneuvers which wouldplace excessive stress on theemergency towing hook and tow-ing cable or chain. The hook andtowing cable or chain may breakand cause serious injury or dam-age.

• If the disable vehicle is unable tobe moved, do not forcibly contin-ue the towing. Contact anAuthorized Kia dealer or a com-mercial tow truck service forassistance.

(Continued)

CAUTIONTo prevent internal damage to thetransaxle, never tow your vehiclefrom the rear (backwards) with allfour tires in contact with the sur-face.

1VQA4033

WARNING Do not use the hooks under thefront of the vehicle for towing pur-poses. These hooks are designedONLY for transport tie-down. If thetie-down hooks are used for towing,the tie-down hooks or front bumperwill be damaged and this could leadto serious injury.

6

Maintenance services / 6-2Maintenance schedule / 6-3Owner maintenance / 6-7Engine compartment / 6-9Engine oil / 6-10Engine coolant / 6-11Air cleaner / 6-13Automatic transaxle / 6-13Brakes / 6-15Lubricants and fluids / 6-16Power steering / 6-17Air conditioner air filter / 6-17Wiper blades / 6-18Fuses / 6-20Battery / 6-28

Tires and wheels / 6-30Lubricant / 6-42Appearance care / 6-43Emission control system / 6-46

Maintenance

Maintenance

26

MAINTENANCE SERVICESYou should exercise the utmost care toprevent damage to your vehicle andinjury to yourself whenever performingany maintenance or inspection proce-dures.Should you have any doubts concerningthe inspection or servicing of your vehi-cle, we strongly recommend that youhave an Authorized Kia Dealer performthis work.An Authorized Kia Dealer has factory-trained technicians and genuine Kiaparts to service your vehicle properly. Forexpert advice and quality service, see anAuthorized Kia Dealer.Inadequate, incomplete or insufficientservicing may result in operational prob-lems with your vehicle that could lead tovehicle damage, an accident, or person-al injury.

Owner’s responsibility

Maintenance Service and RecordRetention are the owner's responsibil-ity.

You should retain documents that showproper maintenance has been performedon your vehicle in accordance with thescheduled maintenance service chartsshown on the following pages. You needthis information to establish your compli-ance with the servicing and maintenancerequirements of your Kia warranties.Detailed warranty information is providedin your Warranty & Consumer Informationmanual.

Repairs and adjustments required as aresult of improper maintenance or a lackof required maintenance are not covered.We strongly recommend that all vehiclemaintenance be performed by an author-ized Kia dealer using genuine Kia parts.

6 3

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

MAINTENANCEINTERVALS

MAINTENANCE ITEM

Engine control system

Kilometers or time in months, whichever comes first

× 1,000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128

# Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64

Engine oil & engine oil filter (1) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R

Drive belts (tension) I I I I

Cooling system hoses & connections I I I I I

Engine coolant (1) I I I I I R I I I I I R I I I I

Fuel filter R R

Fuel tank cap, lines, EVAP canister and hoses I I

Fuel tank air filter I R I R I

Air cleaner element (2) I I I I I R I I I I I R I I I I

Ignition wires I I

Spark plugs

PCV valve (if equipped) I I I I

Idle speed I I I I I

Valve clearance (3) I

Replace every 160,000 km

Maintenance

46

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONTINUED)


× 1,000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128

# Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64

Air conditioner compressor operation & I I I I I

refrigerant amount (if equipped)

Exhaust pipes, heat shield & mountings I I I I I I I I

Front suspension ball joints I I I I

Brakes fluid (1) I I I I I I I R I I I I I I I R

Front brake pads & discs (4) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Rear brake pads & discs (4) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Parking brake I I I I I I I I

Brake lines & connections I I I I I

(including booster)

Brake pedal free play I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I


MAINTENANCE ITEM

Chassis and body

6 5

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONTINUED)


× 1,000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128

# Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64

Automatic transaxle fluid (1) I I I R I I I R I I I R I I I R

Chassis & underbody bolts & nuts I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Tire condition & inflation pressure I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Wheel alignment (5)

Tire rotation

Steering operation & linkage I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Power steering fluid & lines I I I I I I I I

Driveshaft dust boots I I I I I

Safety belts, buckles & anchors I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Lock, hinges & hood latch L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L


MAINTENANCE ITEM

Inspect when abnormal condition noted

Rotate the tires every 12,000 km

Chassis and body (Continued)

Maintenance

66

Chart symbols:I- Inspect these items and their related parts. If necessary, correct, clean, refill, adjust of replace.R- Replace or changeL- Lubricate.

(1) Refer to the lubricant and coolant specifications in the Owner’s Manual(2) More frequent maintenance is required if driving under dusty conditions.(3) Inspect excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. A qualified technician should perform the oper-

ation.(4) More frequent maintenance is required if the vehicle is operated under any of the following conditions:a. Short-distance drivingb. Driving on dusty roads.c. Extensive idling or slow-speed driving in stop-and-go traffic.

(5) If necessary, rotate and balance the wheels.

* Note: Check the engine oil and coolant levels every week.

6 7

Maintenance

OWNER MAINTENANCE Owner maintenance schedule The following lists are vehicle checks andinspections that should be performed bythe owner or an Authorized Kia Dealer atthe frequencies indicated to help ensuresafe, dependable operation of your vehi-cle.Any adverse conditions should bebrought to the attention of your dealer assoon as possible.These Owner Maintenance Checks aregenerally not covered by warranties andyou may be charged for labor, parts andlubricants used.

When you stop for fuel:• Check the engine oil level.• Check coolant level in coolant reser-

voir.

• Check the windshield washer fluidlevel.

• Look for low or under-inflated tires.

While operating your vehicle:• Note any changes in the sound of the

exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumesin the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steeringwheel. Notice any increased steeringeffort or looseness in the steeringwheel, or change in its straight-aheadposition.

• Notice if your vehicle constantly turnsslightly or “pulls” to one side when trav-eling on smooth, level road.

• When stopping, listen and check forunusual sounds, pulling to one side,increased brake pedal travel or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in the oper-ation of your transaxle occurs, checkthe transaxle fluid level.

• Check automatic transaxle P (Park)function.

• Check parking brake.• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle

(water dripping from the air condition-ing system during or after use is nor-mal).

At least monthly:• Check coolant level in the coolant

recovery reservoir.• Check the operation of all exterior

lights, including the stoplights, turn sig-nals and hazard warning flashers.

• Check the inflation pressures of alltires including the spare.

At least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall):• Check radiator, heater and air condi-

tioning hoses for leaks or damage.• Check windshield washer spray and

wiper operation. Clean wiper bladeswith clean cloth dampened with wash-er fluid.

• Check headlight alignment.• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields

and clamps.• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear

and function.• Check for worn tires and loose wheel

lug nuts.

WARNING Be careful when checking yourengine coolant level when theengine is hot. Scalding hot coolantand steam may blow out underpressure.This could cause burns orother serious injury.

Maintenance

86

At least once a year:• Clean body and door drain holes.• Lubricate door hinges and checks, and

hood hinges.• Lubricate door and hood locks and

latches.• Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips.• Check the air conditioning system

before the warm weather season.• Check the power steering fluid level.• Inspect and lubricate automatic

transaxle linkage and controls.• Clean battery and terminals.• Check the brake fluid level.

Owner maintenance precautions Improper or incomplete service mayresult in problems. This section givesinstructions only for the maintenanceitems that are easy to perform.As explained earlier in this section, sev-eral procedures can be done only by anAuthorized Kia Dealer with special tools.

Improper owner maintenance duringthe warranty period may affect war-ranty coverage. For details, read theseparate Kia Warranty & ConsumerInformation Manual provided with thevehicle. If you're unsure about anyservicing or maintenance procedure,have it done by an Authorized KiaDealer.

WARNING - Maintenancework

• Performing maintenance work ona vehicle can be dangerous. Youcan be seriously injured while per-forming some maintenance pro-cedures. If you lack sufficientknowledge and experience or theproper tools and equipment to dothe work, have it done by anAuthorized Kia Dealer.

• Working under the hood with theengine running is dangerous. Itbecomes even more dangerouswhen you wear jewelry or looseclothing. These can becomeentangled in moving parts andresult in injury. Always remove allloose or hanging clothing and alljewelry before working on theengine.

6 9

Maintenance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

OVQ066001N

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse box

6. Negative battery terminal

7. Positive battery terminal

8. Auto transaxle oil dipstick

9. Radiator cap

10. Engine oil dipstick

11. Power steering fluid reservoir

12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

Maintenance

106

ENGINE OIL

Checking the engine oil level 1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.2. Start the engine and allow it to reach

normal operating temperature.3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few

minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil toreturn to the oil pan.

4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, andre-insert it fully.

5. Pull the dipstick out again and checkthe level. The level should be betweenF and L.

If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bringthe level to F. Do not overfill.

Use a funnel to refill the new oil com-fortably.

Use only the specified engine oil. (Referto “Recommended Lubricants” later inthis section.)

Have engine oil and filter changed by anAuthorized Kia Dealer according to theMaintenance Schedule at the beginningof this section.

WARNINGUsed engine oil may cause irritationor cancer of the skin if left in con-tact with the skin for prolongedperiods of time. Used engine oilcontains chemicals that havecaused cancer in laboratory ani-mals. Always protect your skin bywashing your hands thoroughlywith soap and warm water as soonas possible after handling used oil.

WARNING - Radiator hoseBe very careful not to touch theradiator hose when checking oradding the engine oil as it may behot enough to burn you.

OVQ066002N OVQ066003N

6 11

Maintenance

ENGINE COOLANTThe high-pressure cooling system has areservoir filled with year-round antifreezecoolant. The reservoir is filled at the fac-tory.Check the antifreeze protection andcoolant level at least once a year, at thebeginning of the winter season, andbefore traveling to a colder climate.

Checking the coolant level

Check the condition and connections ofall cooling system hoses and heaterhoses. Replace any swollen or deterio-rated hoses.

WARNING - Removingradiator cap

• Never attempt to remove the radi-ator cap while the engine is oper-ating or hot. Doing so might leadto cooling system and enginedamage and could result in seri-ous personal injury from escap-ing hot coolant or steam.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Turn the engine off and wait until

it cools down. Use extreme carewhen removing the radiator cap.Wrap a thick towel around it, andturn it counterclockwise slowly tothe first stop. Step back while thepressure is released from thecooling system. When you aresure all the pressure has beenreleased, press down on the cap,using a thick towel, and continueturning counterclockwise toremove it.

• Even if the engine is not operat-ing, do not remove the radiatorcap or the drain plug while theengine and radiator are hot. Hotcoolant and steam may still blowout under pressure, causing seri-ous injury.

OVQ066004N

Maintenance

126

The coolant level should be filledbetween F and L marks on the side of thecoolant reservoir when the engine iscool.If the coolant level is low, add enoughspecified coolant to provide protectionagainst freezing and corrosion. Bring thelevel to F, but do not overfill. If frequentadditions are required, see an AuthorizedKia Dealer for a cooling system inspec-tion.

Have coolant changed by an AuthorizedKia Dealer according to the MaintenanceSchedule at the beginning of this section.• Use only soft (de-mineralized) water in

the coolant mixture.• The engine in your vehicle has alu-

minum engine parts and must be pro-tected by an ethylene-glycol-basedcoolant to prevent corrosion and freez-ing.

• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanolcoolant or mix them with the specifiedcoolant.

• Do not use a solution that containsmore than 60% antifreeze or less than35% antifreeze, which would reducethe effectiveness of the solution.

For mixture percentage, refer to the fol-lowing table.

-15°C (5°F) 35 65

-25°C (-13°F) 40 60

-35°C (-31°F) 50 50

-45°C (-49°F) 60 40

AmbientTemperature

Mixture Percentage (volume)

CoolantSolution

Water

WARNING - Radiator capDo not remove the radiator capwhen the engine and radiator arehot. Scalding hot coolant and steammay blow out under pressure caus-ing serious injury.

OVQ066010NOVQ066021N

6 13

Maintenance

AIR CLEANER

Element replacement Have the air cleaner element checkedand replaced in accordance with themaintenance schedule.

Checking the automatic transaxlefluid level The automatic transaxle fluid levelshould be checked regularly.The volume of the transaxle fluidchanges with temperature. Although it isbest to check the level after having driv-en the vehicle for at least 30 minutes, thelevel can be checked after warming thefluid using the following procedure.

1. Park the vehicle on level ground andfirmly apply the parking brake.

2. Allow the engine to idle for about 2minutes.

3. Depress the brake pedal and move theshift lever slowly through all rangesthen set it in P (Park) or N (Neutral).

4. With the engine still idling, pull out thedipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert itfully.

5. Pull out the dipstick again and checkthe fluid level.

OVQ066005N

WARNING - EngineDriving without an air cleanerencourages backfiring, which couldcause a fire in the engine compart-ment.

CAUTION - EngineDo not drive with the air cleanerremoved; this will result in exces-sive engine wear.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

WARNING - Transaxle fluidThe transaxle fluid level should bechecked when the engine is at nor-mal operating temperature. Thismeans that the engine, radiator,radiator hose and exhaust systemetc., are very hot. Exercise greatcare not to burn yourself during thisprocedure.

OVQ066011N

Maintenance

146

If the fluid has been warmed to normaloperating temperature of approximately70~80°C (158~176°F), the fluid levelshould be within “HOT” range.

“COLD” scale is for reference onlyand should NOT be used to determinetransaxle fluid level.

New automatic transaxle fluid shouldbe red. The red dye is added so theassembly plant can identify it as auto-matic transaxle fluid and distinguish itfrom engine oil or antifreeze. The reddye, which is not an indicator of fluidquality, is not permanent. As the vehi-cle is driven, the automatic transaxlefluid will begin to look darker. Thecolor may eventually appear lightbrown.

✽✽ NOTICEHave an Authorized Kia dealer changethe automatic transaxle fluid accordingto the Scheduled Maintenance at thebeginning of this section.

Use only the specified automatictransaxle fluid. (Refer to "RecommendedLubricants" later in this section.)

WARNING - Parking brakeTo avoid sudden movement of thevehicle, apply parking brake anddepress the brake pedal beforemoving the shift lever.

CAUTION• Low fluid level causes transaxle

slippage. Overfilling can causefoaming, loss of fluid andtransaxle malfunction.

• The use of a non-specified fluidcould result in transaxle malfunc-tion and failure.

1VQA5008

6 15

Maintenance

BRAKES

Checking brake fluid level Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri-odically. The fluid level should bebetween MAX and MIN marks on theside of the reservoir.Before removing the reservoir cap andadding brake fluid, clean the area aroundthe reservoir cap thoroughly to preventbrake fluid contamination.If the level is low, add fluid to the MAXlevel. The level will fall with accumulatedmileage. This is a normal condition asso-ciated with the wear of the brake linings.If the fluid level is excessively low, havethe brake system checked by anAuthorized Kia Dealer.

Use only the specified brake fluid. (Referto “Recommended Lubricants” later inthis section.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

WARNING - Brake fluidWhen changing and adding brakefluid, handle it carefully. Do not let itcome in contact with your eyes. Ifbrake fluid should come in contactwith your eyes, immediately flushthem with a large quantity of freshtap water. Have your eyes examinedby a doctor as soon as possible.

WARNING - Loss of brakefluid

In the event the brake systemrequires frequent additions of fluid,the vehicle should be inspected byan Authorized Kia Dealer.1VQA5020

CAUTION Do not allow brake fluid to contactthe vehicle's body paint, as paintdamage will result. Brake fluid,which has been exposed to open airfor an extended time should neverbe used as its quality cannot beguaranteed. It should be thrownout. Don't put in the wrong kind offluid. A few drops of mineral-basedoil, such as engine oil, in your brakesystem can damage brake systemparts.

Maintenance

166

LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS

Checking the washer fluid level The reservoir is translucent so that youcan check the level with a quick visualinspection.Check the fluid level in the washer fluidreservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plainwater may be used if washer fluid is notavailable. However, use washer solventwith antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-mates to prevent freezing.

This warning light indicatesthe washer fluid reservoir isnear empty. Refill the washerfluid as soon as possible.

Body lubrication All moving points of the body, such asdoor hinges, hood hinges, and locks,should be lubricated each time theengine oil is changed. Use a non-freez-ing lubricant on locks during cold weath-er.Make sure the engine hood secondarylatch keeps the hood from opening whenthe primary latch is released.

WARNING - Coolant• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluidreservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severelyobscure visibility when sprayedon the windshield and may causeloss of vehicle control or damageto paint and body trim.

• Windshield washer fluid agentscontain some amounts of alcoholand can be flammable under cer-tain circumstances. Do not allowsparks or flame to contact thewasher fluid or the washer fluidreservoir. Damage to the vehicleor it's occupants could occur.

• Windshield washer fluid is poi-sonous to humans and animals.Do not drink and avoid contactingwindshield washer fluid. Seriousinjury or death could occur.

OVQ066013N

6 17

Maintenance

POWER STEERING

Checking the power steering fluidlevel With the vehicle on level ground, checkthe fluid level in the power steering reser-voir periodically. The fluid should bebetween MAX and MIN marks on theside of the reservoir at the normal tem-perature.Before adding power steering fluid, thor-oughly clean the area around the reser-voir cap to prevent power steering fluidcontamination.If the level is low, add fluid to the MAXlevel.In the event the power steering systemrequires frequent addition of fluid, thevehicle should be inspected by anAuthorized Kia Dealer.

Use only the specified power steeringfluid. (Refer to "RecommendedLubricants" later in this section.)

Power steering hosesCheck the connections for oil leaks,severe damage and twists in the powersteering hose before driving.

The air conditioner air filter installedbehind the glove box filters the dust orother pollutants that come into the vehi-cle from the outside through the heatingand air conditioning system. If dust orother pollutants accumulate in the filterover a period of time, the air flow from theair vents may decrease, resulting inmoisture accumulation on the inside ofthe windshield even when the outside(fresh) are position is selected. If thishappens, have the air conditioner air filterreplaced by an Authorized Kia Dealer.

CAUTION• To avoid damage to the power

steering pump, do not operate thevehicle for prolonged periodswith a low power steering fluidlevel.

• Never start the engine when thereservoir tank is empty.

• When adding fluid, be careful thatdirt does not get into the tank.

• Too little fluid can result inincreased steering effort and/ornoise from the power steering sys-tem.

• The use of the non-specified fluidcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe power steering system andcause damage to it.

OVQ066012N

AIR CONDITIONER AIR FILTER

1LDA5047

Outside air

Recirculatedair

Air conditionerair filter

Blower

Evaporatorcore

Heater core

Maintenance

186

The air filter should be replaced every15,000 km (10,000 miles). If the vehicleis operated in the severely air-pollutedcities or on dusty rough roads for a longperiod, it should be inspected more fre-quently and replaced earlier. When youtry to replace the air filter by owner main-tenance, replace it performing the follow-ing procedure, and in this case, be care-ful to avoid damaging other components.

Maintenance Commercial hot waxes applied byautomatic car washes have beenknown to make the windshield diffi-cult to clean.

Contamination of either the windshield orthe wiper blades with foreign matter canreduce the effectiveness of the wind-shield wipers. Common sources of con-tamination are insects, tree sap, and hotwax treatments used by some commer-cial car washes. If the blades are not wip-ing properly, clean both the window andthe blades with a good cleaner or milddetergent, and rinse thoroughly withclean water.

Replacement When the wipers no longer clean ade-quately, the blades may be worn orcracked, and require replacement.

WIPER BLADES

1VQA5022

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the wiperblades, do not use gasoline,kerosene, paint thinner, or othersolvents on or near them.

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the wiperarms or other components, do notattempt to move the wipers manual-ly.

CAUTIONThe use of a non-specified wiperblade could result in wiper malfunc-tion and failure.

6 19

Maintenance

Front windshield wiper blade1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper

blade assembly to expose the plasticlocking clip.

2. Compress the clip and slide the bladeassembly downward.

3. Lift it off the arm.4. Install the blade assembly in the

reverse order of removal.

Rear window wiper blade replace-ment To prevent damage to the wiper arms orother components, have an authorizedKia dealer replace the wiper blade.

1LDA5023

1LDA5024

1LDA5025

CAUTIONDo not allow the wiper arm to fallagainst the windshield, since it maychip or crack the windshield.

Maintenance

206

FUSES

A vehicle’s electrical system is protectedfrom electrical overload damage byfuses.

This vehicle has three fuse panels, onelocated in the driver’s side panel bolster,another in the cargo area, the other inthe engine compartment near the bat-tery.If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-sories, or controls do not work, check theappropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse hasblown, the element inside the fuse will bemelted.If the electrical system does not work,first check the driver’s side fuse panel.Always replace a blown fuse with one ofthe same rating.If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-cates an electrical problem. Avoid usingthe system involved and immediatelyconsult an Authorized Kia Dealer.Three kinds of fuses are used: blade typefor lower amperage rating and cartridgetype, fusible link for higher amperage rat-ings.

Fuse replacement

1VQA4037

Normal

Normal

Blade type

Cartridge type

Fusible link

Blown

Blown

Normal Blown

WARNING - Fuse replace-ment

• Never replace a fuse with any-thing but another fuse of thesame rating.

• A higher capacity fuse couldcause damage possibly a fire.

• Never install a wire instead of theproper fuse - even as a temporaryrepair. It may cause extensivewiring damage and possibly a fire.

CAUTIONDo not use a screwdriver or anyother metal object to remove fusesbecause it may cause a short circuitand damage the system.

6 21

Maintenance

Engine compartment1. Turn the ignition switch and all other

switches off.2. Remove the fuse box cover by press-

ing the tap and pulling up.3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it

is blown. To remove or insert the fuse,use the fuse puller in the main fusebox in the engine compartment.

4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an Authorized KiaDealer. Inner panel

1. Turn the ignition switch and all otherswitches off.

2. Open the fuse panel cover.

1VQA4006

CAUTIONAfter checking the fuse box in theengine compartment, securelyinstall the fuse box cover. If not,electrical failures may occur fromwater leaking in.

1VQA4002

OVQ066016N

Driver’s side panel

Rear cargo area panel

Maintenance

226

3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.Use the removal tool provided on themain fuse box in the engine compart-ment.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if itis blown.Spare fuses are provided in the mainfuse box in the engine compartment.

5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an Authorized KiaDealer.If you do not have a spare, use a fuse ofthe same rating from a circuit you maynot need for operating the vehicle, suchas the cigar lighter fuse.

If the headlights or other electrical com-ponents do not work and the fuses areOK, check the fuse block in the enginecompartment. If a fuse is blown, it mustbe replaced.

Main fuseIf the main fuse is blown, it must beremoved as follows:1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.2. Remove the nuts shown in the picture

above.3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the

same rating.4. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the main fuse is blown, consult anAuthorized Kia Dealer.

1VQA40081VQA4004

6 23

Maintenance

Driver’s side panel Engine compartment

1VQA4009/OVQ066017N/1VQA4011/OVQ046010N


Fuse/Relay panel descriptionInside the fuse/relay box covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relayname and capacity.

Maintenance

246

Driver's side fuse panel

Description Fuse rating Protected componentAUDIO 15A Audio, Step lampMEMORY 7.5A Climate control module, Clock, Cluster, Trip computer, Front area module, Power sliding door module, Power

tailgate module, Driver's door module, Front passenger door module, Driver's power seat module, Driver position memory system unit

VRS 10A Variable rack stroke system module, Variable rack stroke system control buttonIG2-1 7.5A Air conditioner control module, Multi function switch, Inside relay box, ECM mirror, Rain sensor, Seat WarmerIG2-2 7.5A Rear climate control button, Front area module, Power sliding door module, Power tailgate module, Driver's door

module, Front passenger door module, Driver's power seat module, Driver position memory system unitOBD-II 7.5A OBD-II, Diagonosis connectorROOM 7.5A Vanity mirror, Map lamp, Overhead console, Room lamp switch, Climate control module, HomelinkK/LOCK 7.5A Key interlock solenoidILLUMI 7.5A Instrument panel illuminationAMP 25A AmplifierSEAT WARMER 20A Inside relay box(Seat warmer)SUNROOF 25A Sunroof moduleDDM 30A Driver's door moduleTPMS 7.5A Tire pressure monitoring systemPEDAL 15A Power adjustable pedal relay(None-driver position memory system only)P/OUTLET 1 15A Power outlet(Front)ASS P/SEAT 20A Front passenger's power seat moduleDRV P/SEAT 30A Driver's power seat moduleADM 30A Front passenger door moduleACC 7.5A Audio, Clock, Outside rearview mirror control and folding switchP/OUTLET 2 15A Cigar lighter, Power outletSTART 7.5A Start relayAIRBAG IND 7.5A Cluster

6 25

Maintenance

Description Fuse rating Protected componentENG 7.5A Automatic shift lever switch, Vehicle speed sensor, Inhibitor switch, Transaxle control module,

Input speed sensor, Output speed sensor, Back-up lamp switch, Fuel filterIG1 7.5A Trip computer, Buzzer(Back warning system), Cluster, ESC switch, Ambient temperature sensor, GeneratorABS 7.5A ABS control module, ESC control module, Yaw rate sensor, Steering angle sensorAIRBAG 15A Air bag control moduleALTERNATOR - Generator relaySHUNT - Shunt connector

Description Fuse rating Protected componentRR D/LOCK 20A Sliding door lock relay, Sliding door unlock relay, Sliding door lock actuator, Tailgate lock actuatorRR WIPER 15A Rear wiper relay, Rear wiper motorRR DEFOG 25A Rear window defroster relay, Rear window defrosterPOWER TAIL GATE 30A Power tailgate moduleP/QUARTER 10A Power rear quarter glass open relay, Power rear quarter glass close relay, Power rear quarter glass motorRR P/WIN-RH 25A Sliding door power window relay(Right), Sliding door power window motor(Right)RR P/WIN-LH 25A Sliding door power window relay(Left), Sliding door power window motor(Left)PSD-RH 30A Power sliding door module(Right)PSD-LH 30A Power sliding door module(Left)LUGGAGE 7.5A Step lamp, Power tailgate ON/OFF switch, Tailgate lampFUEL DOOR 15A Fuel filler lid relay, Fuel filler lid actuatorRR P/OTLT-LH 15A Rear power outlet(Left)RR P/OTLT-RH 15A Rear power outlet(Right)RR DEFOG RELAY - Rear window defroster relay


Maintenance

266

Description Fuse rating Protected componentP/TRAIN 7.5A Theft alarm relay, Main relay,

TCM, Generator, ECM, Injector15A, ECU 2 15A, ECU 1 10A,Air conditioner compressor relay,Inlet metering valve, EGR sole-noid valve, Air flow sensor, Diesel box, Immobilizer module

FUEL PUMP 15A Fuel pump motorSP 7.5A Spare fuseSP 10A Spare fuseSP 15A Spare fuseSP 20A Spare fuseSP 25A Spare fuseABS 1 40A ABS control module,

ESC control moduleABS 2 20A ABS control module,

ESC control moduleFRT WIPER 30A Front wiper ON relayKEY SW 2 30A Start relay, IG2 Load(Variable

rack stroke, ECM mirror, Rainsensor, Seat warmer)

RAM 1 50A Rear area moduleRAM 2 50A Rear area moduleRAM 3 50A Rear area module

Engine compartment

Description Fuse rating Protected componentFRT/RR WASHER 10A Front washer motor relay,

Rear washer motor relayIG 2 7.5A AQS sensor, fuel filterSTOP LAMP 20A Stop lamp,

High mounted stop lampFUEL HEATER 20A Fuel filter heaterKEY SW 1 25A Instrument panel moduleSTOP SIGNAL 7.5A TCU, PCU/ECU, ABS/ESC UnitA/C COMP 7.5A Air conditioner compressor relayATM 15A ATM solenoidFRT DEICER 15A Front deicerHORN 15A Horn relayECU 1 10A PCU/ECU, A/C comp relay, Mass

air flow sensor, Immobilizer unitO2 DN 10A O2 sensor(RL, RR)ECU 2 15A PCU/ECU, Oil control valve 1/2,

Variable intake manifold valve 1/2,Canister purge solenoid valve,Canister close valve, Pulse width modulation relay

O2 UP 10A O2 sensor(FL, FR)IGN COIL 20A Ignition coil 1/2/3/4/5/6, CondensorINJECTOR 15A PCU/ECU, Injector 1/2/3/4/5/6,

Glow relay 1/2, Intake manifoldvalve, EGR Solenoid valve,Cooling fan relay, Air flow sen-sor, Intake throttle valve

6 27

Maintenance

Description Fuse rating Protected componentIPM 1 50A Instrument panel moduleIPM 2 50A Instrument panel moduleIPM 3 50A Instrument panel moduleFRT BLOWER 40A Inside relay box(Front blower

relay)RR BLOWER 30A Inside relay box(Rear blower

relay)IG 2 RELAY - Ignition relayA/C COMP RELAY - Air conditioner compressor relayMAIN RELAY - Main relaySTART RELAY - Start relayFUEL PUMP RELAY - Fuel pump relay

Engine compartment (main fuse)

Description Fuse rating Protected componentALT 150A GeneratorC/FAN 60A Cooling fan

Maintenance

286

OVQ066018N

Shunt connector Your vehicle is equipped with a shuntconnector to prevent battery discharge ifyour vehicle is parked without beingoperated for prolonged periods. Use thefollowing procedures before parking thevehicle for prolonged periods.

1. Turn off the engine.2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.3. Open the driver’s side panel cover and

pull up the shunt connector.

✽✽ NOTICE• If the shunt connector is pulled up

from the fuse panel, the warningchime, audio, clock and interiorlamps, etc., will not operate. Someitems must be reset after replacement.(Refer to “Items to be reset···.” onpage 6-30)

• Even though the shunt connector ispulled up, the battery can still be dis-charged by operation of the head-lights or other electrical devices.

1VQA4005

Shunt connector

BATTERY

WARNING - Battery dangers

Always read the followinginstructions carefully whenhandling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes andall other flames or sparksaway from the battery.

Hydrogen, a highly com-bustible gas, is alwayspresent in battery cells andmay explode if ignited.

(Continued)

6 29

Maintenance

For best battery service:• Keep the battery securely mounted.• Keep the battery top clean and dry.• Keep the terminals and connections

clean, tight, and coated with petroleumjelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from thebattery immediately with a solution ofwater and baking soda.

• If the vehicle is not going to be used foran extended time, disconnect the bat-tery cables.

Battery recharging Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,calcium-based battery.• If the battery becomes discharged in a

short time (because, for example, theheadlights or interior lights were left onwhile the vehicle was not in use),recharge it by slow charging (trickle)for 10 hours.

• If the battery gradually dischargesbecause of high electric load while thevehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-30A for two hours.

(Continued)

Keep batteries out of thereach of children becausebatteries contain highlycorrosive SULFURIC ACID.Do not allow battery acid tocontact your skin, eyes,clothing or paint finish.If any electrolyte gets intoyour eyes, flush your eyeswith clean water for at least15 minutes and get immedi-ate medical attention. Ifpossible, continue to applywater with a sponge orcloth until medical attentionis received. If electrolytegets on your skin, thor-oughly wash the contactedarea. If you feel a pain or aburning sensation, get med-ical attention immediately.Wear eye protection whencharging or working near abattery. Always provideventilation when working inan enclosed space.

(Continued)

(Continued)• When lifting a plastic-cased bat-

tery, excessive pressure on thecase may cause battery acid toleak, resulting in personal injury.Lift with a battery carrier or withyour hands on opposite corners.

• Never attempt to recharge thebattery when the battery cablesare connected.

• The electrical ignition systemworks with high voltage. Nevertouch these components with theengine running or the ignitionswitched on.

Failure to follow the above warn-ings can result in serious bodilyinjury or death.

Maintenance

306

Items to be reset after the batteryhas been discharged or the bat-tery has been disconnected.• Clock (See Chapter 3)• Sunroof (See Chapter 3)• Trip computer (See Chapter 3)• Climate control system (See Chapter

3)• Audio (See Chapter 3)• Power sliding door and power tailgate

(See Chapter 3)

Tire care For proper maintenance, safety, andmaximum fuel economy, you mustalways maintain recommended tireinflation pressures and stay withinthe load limits and weight distributionrecommended for your vehicle.

Recommended cold tire infla-tion pressures All tire pressures (including thespare) should be checked every daywhen the tires are cold. “Cold Tires”means the vehicle has not been driv-en for at least three hours or drivenless than 1.6 km (one mile).Recommended pressures must bemaintained for the best ride, top vehi-cle handling, and minimum tire wear.

CAUTION• Before performing maintenance

or recharging the battery, turn offall accessories and stop theengine.

• The negative battery cable mustbe removed first and installed lastwhen the battery is disconnected.

WARNING - Rechargingbattery

When recharging the battery,observe the following precautions:• The battery must be removed

from the vehicle and placed in anarea with good ventilation.

• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, orflame near the battery.

• Watch the battery during charg-ing, and stop or reduce the charg-ing rate if the battery cells begingassing (boiling) violently or ifthe temperature of the electrolyteof any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Wear eye protection when check-ing the battery during charging.

• Disconnect the battery charger inthe following order.

1. Turn off the battery charger mainswitch.

2. Unhook the negative clamp fromthe negative battery terminal.

3. Unhook the positive clamp fromthe positive battery terminal.

TIRES AND WHEELS

6 31

Maintenance

All specifications (sizes and pres-sures) can be found on a labelattached to the vehicle.

WARNING - Tire underin-flation

Severe underinflation (70 kPa(10 psi) or more) can lead tosevere heat build-up, causingblowouts, tread separation andother tire failures that can resultin the loss of vehicle controlleading to severe injury ordeath. This risk is much higheron hot days and when drivingfor protracted periods at highspeeds.

/

/

/

/

/ /

psi

psi

psi

1KMN5039OVQ066022N

CAUTION• Underinflation also results in

excessive wear, poor handlingand reduced fuel economy.Wheel deformation also ispossible. Keep your tire pres-sures at the proper levels. If atire frequently needs refilling,have it checked by anAuthorized Kia Dealer.

• Overinflation produces aharsh ride, excessive wear atthe center of the tire tread, anda greater possibility of dam-age from road hazards.

Maintenance

326

Checking tire inflation pres-sureCheck your tires once a month ormore.Also, check the tire pressure of thespare tire.

How to checkUse a good quality gage to check tirepressure.You can not tell if your tiresare properly inflated simply by look-ing at them. Radial tires may lookproperly inflated even when they'reunderinflated.Check the tire's inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold. - "Cold"means your vehicle has been sittingfor at least three hours or driven nomore than 1.6 km (1 mile).

WARNING - Tire InflationOverinflation or underinflationcan reduce tire life, adverselyaffect vehicle handling, and leadto sudden tire failure.This couldresult in loss of vehicle controland potential injury.

CAUTION - Tire pressureAlways observe the following:• Check tire pressure when the

tires are cold. (After vehiclehas been parked for at leastthree hours or hasn't beendriven more than 1.6 km (onemile) since startup.)

• Check the pressure of yourspare tire each time you checkthe pressure of other tires.

• Never overload your vehicle.Be careful not to overload avehicle luggage rack if yourvehicle is equipped with one.

• Worn, old tires can cause acci-dents. If your tread is badlyworn, or if your tires havebeen damaged, replace them.

CAUTION • Warm tires normally exceed

recommended cold tire pres-sures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6psi). Do not release air fromwarm tires to adjust the pres-sure or the tires will be under-inflated.

• Be sure to reinstall the tireinflation valve caps. Withoutthe valve cap, dirt or moisturecould get into the valve coreand cause air leakage. If avalve cap is missing, install anew one as soon as possible.

6 33

Maintenance

Remove the valve cap from the tirevalve stem. Press the tire gage firm-ly onto the valve to get a pressuremeasurement. If the cold tire inflationpressure matches the recommendedpressure on the tire and loadinginformation label, no further adjust-ment is necessary. If the pressure islow, add air until you reach the rec-ommended amount.If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in thecenter of the tire valve. Recheck thetire pressure with the tire gage. Besure to put the valve caps back onthe valve stems. They help preventleaks by keeping out dirt and mois-ture.

Tire rotation To equalize tread wear, it is recom-mended that the tires be rotatedevery 12,000 km (7,500 miles) orsooner if irregular wear develops.During rotation, check the tires forcorrect balance.When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear isusually caused by incorrect tire pres-sure, improper wheel alignment, out-of-balance wheels, severe braking orsevere cornering. Look for bumps orbulges in the tread or side of tire.Replace the tire if you find either ofthese conditions. Replace the tire iffabric or cord is visible. After rotation,be sure to bring the front and rear tirepressures to specification and checklug nut tightness.Refer to Section 7, Specifications.

S2BLA790

S2BLA790A

CBGQ0707A

Without a spare tire

With a full-size spare tire (if equipped)

Directional tires (if equipped)

Maintenance

346

Disc brake pads should be inspectedfor wear whenever tires are rotated.Rotate radial tires that have anasymmetric tread pattern onlyfrom front to rear and not fromright to left.

Tire replacementIf the tire is worn evenly, a tread wearindicator will appear as a solid bandacross the tread. This shows there isless than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of treadleft on the tire. Replace the tire whenthis happens.Do not wait for the band to appearacross the entire tread before replac-ing the tire.

Compact spare tire replace-mentA compact spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular size tire.Replace it when you can see thetread wear indicator bars on the tire.The replacement compact spare tireshould be the same size and designtire as the one provided with yournew Kia and should be mounted onthe same compact spare tire wheel.The compact spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularsize wheel, and the compact sparetire wheel is not designed for mount-ing a regular size tire.

Wheel replacement When replacing the metal wheels forany reason, make sure the newwheels are equivalent to the originalfactory units in diameter, rim widthand offset.

WARNING• Do not use the compact spare

tire for tire rotation• Do not mix bias ply and radial

ply tires under any circum-stances. This may causeunusual handling characteris-tics that could result in death,severe injury, or propertydamage.

1LDA5026

Tread wear indicator

6 35

Maintenance

Wheel alignment and tire balance The wheels on your vehicle werealigned and balanced carefully at thefactory to give you the longest tire lifeand best overall performance.In most cases, you will not need tohave your wheels aligned again.However, if you notice unusual tirewear or your vehicle pulling one wayor the other, the alignment may needto be reset.If you notice your vehicle vibratingwhen driving on a smooth road, yourwheels may need to be rebalanced.

WARNINGA wheel that is not the correctsize may adversely affect wheeland bearing life, braking andstopping abilities, handling char-acteristics, ground clearance,body-to-tire clearance, snowchain clearance, speedometercalibration, headlight aim andbumper height.

WARNING - Replacingtires

• Driving on worn-out tires isvery hazardous and willreduce braking effectiveness,steering accuracy, and trac-tion.

• Your vehicle is equipped withtires designed to provide forsafe ride and handling capa-bility. Do not use a size andtype of tire and wheel that isdifferent from the one that isoriginally installed on yourvehicle. It can affect the safetyand performance of your vehi-cle, which could lead to han-dling failure or rollover andserious injury.

(Continued)

(Continued)When replacing the tires, besure to equip all four tires withthe tire and wheel of the samesize, type, tread, brand andload-carrying capacity.

• The use of any other tire sizeor type may seriously affectride, handling, ground clear-ance, stopping distance, bodyto tire clearance, snow tireclearance, and speedometerreliability.

• It is best to replace all fourtires at the same time. If that isnot possible, or necessary,then replace the two front ortwo rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling.

CAUTIONImproper wheel weights candamage your vehicle's alu-minum wheels. Use onlyapproved wheel weights.

Maintenance

366

Tire tractionTire traction can be reduced if youdrive on worn tires, tires that areimproperly inflated or on slipperyroad surfaces. Tires should bereplaced when tread wear indicatorsappear. To reduce the possibility oflosing control, slow down wheneverthere is rain, snow or ice on the road.

Tire maintenance In addition to proper inflation, correctwheel alignment helps to decreasetire wear. If you find a tire is wornunevenly, have your dealer check thewheel alignement.When you have new tires installed,make sure they are balanced. Thiswill increase vehicle ride comfort andtire life. Additionally, a tire shouldalways be rebalanced if it is removedfrom the wheel.

Tire sidewall labelingFederal law requires tire manufactur-ers to place standardized informationon the sidewall of all tires. This infor-mation identifies and describes thefundamental characteristics of thetire and also provides the tire identifi-cation number (TIN) for safety stan-dard certification. The TIN can beused to identify the tire in case of arecall.

1. Manufacturer or brand nameManufacturer or Brand name isshown.

2. Tire size designation A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tiresize designation. You will need thisinformation when selecting replace-ment tires for your car. The followingexplains what the letters and num-bers in the tire size designationmean.Example tire size designation:(These numbers are provided as anexample only; your tire size designa-tor could vary depending on yourvehicle.)P185/65R14 86H

P - Applicable vehicle type (tiresmarked with the prefix “P’’ areintended for use on passengercars or light trucks; however, notall tires have this marking).

185 - Tire width in millimeters.65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section

height as a percentage of itswidth.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).14 - Rim diameter in inches.

I030B04JM

1

1

23

4

5,6

7

6 37

Maintenance

86 - Load Index, a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry.

H - Speed Rating Symbol. See thespeed rating chart in this sectionfor additional information.

Wheel size designation Wheels are also marked with impor-tant information that you need if youever have to replace one. The follow-ing explains what the letters andnumbers in the wheel size designa-tion mean.

Example wheel size designation:5.5JX14

5.5 - Rim width in inches.J - Rim contour designation.14 - Rim diameter in inches.

Tire speed ratings The chart below lists many of the dif-ferent speed ratings currently beingused for passenger cars. The speedrating is part of the tire size designa-tion on the sidewall of the tire. Thissymbol corresponds to that tire'sdesigned maximum safe operatingspeed.

3. Checking tire life (TIN : TireIdentification Number)

Any tires that are over 6 years, basedon the manufacturing date, tirestrength and performance, declinewith age naturally (even unusedspare tires). Therefore, the tires(including the spare tire) should bereplaced by new ones. You can findthe manufacturing date on the tiresidewall (possibly on the inside of thewheel), displaying the DOT Code.The DOT Code is a series of num-bers on a tire consisting of numbersand English letters. The manufactur-ing date is designated by the last fourdigits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOOThe front part of the DOT means aplant code number, tire size andtread pattern and the last four num-bers indicate week and year manu-factured.For example:DOT XXXX XXXX 1605 representsthat the tire was produced in the 16thweek of 2005.

S 180 km/h (112 mph)T 190 km/h (118 mph)H 210 km/h (130 mph)V 240 km/h (149 mph)Z Above 240 km/h (149 mph)

Maximum SpeedSpeedRatingSymbol

Maintenance

386

4. Tire ply composition and mate-rial

The number of layers or plies of rub-ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tiremanufacturers also must indicate thematerials in the tire, which includesteel, nylon, polyester, and others.The letter "R" means radial ply con-struction; the letter "D" means diago-nal or bias ply construction; and theletter "B" means belted-bias ply con-struction.

5. Maximum permissible inflationpressure

This number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure. Referto the Tire and Loading Informationlabel for recommended inflationpressure.

6. Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds thatcan be carried by the tire. Whenreplacing the tires on the vehicle,always use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading The following information relates tothe tire grading system developed bythe Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard (CMVSS) for grading tiresby tread wear, traction and tempera-ture performance.

Tread wearThe tread wear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified govern-ment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditionsof their use. However, performancemay differ from the norm because ofvariations in driving habits, servicepractices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.These grades are molded on theside-walls of passenger vehicle tires.The tires available as standard oroptional equipment on Kia vehiclesmay vary with respect to grade.

WARNING - Tire ageA tire more than 6 years old maysustain separation of cord lay-ers inside the tire. Tire failure toseparation of cord, can causeaccidents resulting in severeinjuries or death.Make sure to check the manu-facturing date of the tire andreplace it within 6 years of thatdate.

6 39

Maintenance

Traction - AA, A, B & C The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B and C. Thegrades represent the tires ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on spec-ified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire markedC may have poor traction perform-ance.Temperature -A, B & C The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B and C. The grades repre-sent the tire’s resistance to the gen-eration of heat and its ability to dissi-pate heat when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specifiedindoor laboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tires todegenerate and reduce tires life, andexcessive temperature can lead tosudden tires failure. Grades A and Brepresent higher levels of perform-ance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by the law.

Tire terminology and defini-tionsAir Pressure: The amount of airinside the tire pressing outward onthe tire. Air pressure is expressed inkilopascal (kPa) or pounds persquare inch (psi).Accessory Weight: This means thecombined weight of optional acces-sories. Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatic transmis-sion, power seats, and air condition-ing.Aspect Ratio: The relationship of atire's height to its width.Belt: A rubber coated layer of cordsthat is located between the plies andthe tread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcing materials.Bead: The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords thathold the tire onto the rim.Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the plies are laid at alternateangles less than 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

WARNING - Tire temperature

The temperature grade for thistire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuild-up and possible suddentire failure. This can cause lossof vehicle control and seriousinjury or death.

Maintenance

406

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount ofair pressure in a tire, measured inkilopascals (kPa) or pounds persquare inch (psi) before a tire hasbuilt up heat from driving.Curb Weight: This means the weightof a motor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil andcoolant, but without passengers andcargo.DOT Markings: The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumeric des-ignator which can also identify thetire manufacturer, production plant,brand and date of production.GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight RatingGAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front Axle.GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire, thatmust always face outward whenmounted on a vehicle.Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit forair pressure.Load Index: An assigned numberranging from 1 to 279 that corre-sponds to the load carrying capacityof a tire.Maximum Inflation Pressure: Themaximum air pressure to which acold tire may be inflated. The maxi-mum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.Maximum Load Rating: The loadrating for a tire at the maximum per-missible inflation pressure for thattire.Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:The sum of curb weight; accessoryweight; vehicle capacity weight; andproduction options weight.Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicle isdesigned to seat multiplied by 68 kg(150 pounds).

Occupant Distribution: Designatedseating positions.Outward Facing Sidewall: The sideof a asymmetrical tire that has a par-ticular side that faces outward whenmounted on a vehicle. The outwardfacing sidewall bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same moldings onthe inner facing sidewall.Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tireused on passenger cars and somelight duty trucks and multipurposevehicles.Recommended Inflation Pressure:Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-ed tire inflation pressure and shownon the tire placard.Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the ply cords that extend to thebeads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.Rim: A metal support for a tire andupon which the tire beads are seat-ed.Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

6 41

Maintenance

Speed Rating: An alphanumericcode assigned to a tire indicating themaximum speed at which a tire canoperate.Traction: The friction between thetire and the road surface. Theamount of grip provided.Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact with the road.Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called "wearbars," that show across the tread of atire when only 2/32 inch of treadremains.UTQGS: Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards, a tire informationsystem that provides consumers withratings for a tire's traction, tempera-ture and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturersusing government testing proce-dures. The ratings are molded intothe sidewall of the tire.Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-ber of designated seating positionsmultiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs.) plus therated cargo and luggage load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tire due tocurb and accessory weight plusmaximum occupant and cargoweight.Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:That load on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to eachaxle its share of the curb weight,accessory weight, and normal occu-pant weight and driving by 2.Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-ly attached to a vehicle showing theoriginal equipment tire size and rec-ommended inflation pressure.

All season tires Kia specifies all season tires onsome models to provide good per-formance for use all year round,including snowy and icy road condi-tions. All season tires are identifiedby ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mudand Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snowtires have better snow traction thanall season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.

Summer tires Kia specifies summer tires on somemodels to provide superior perform-ance on dry roads. Summer tire per-formance is substantially reduced insnow and ice. Summer tires do nothave the tire traction rating M+S(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.if you plan to operate your vehicle insnowy or icy conditions. Kia recom-mends the use of snow tires or allseason tires on all four wheels.

Snow tiresIf you equip your car with snow tires,they should be the same size andhave the same load capacity as theoriginal tires. Snow tires should beinstalled on all four wheels; other-wise, poor handling may result.Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28kPa) more air pressure than thepressure recommended for the stan-dard tires on the tire label on the dri-ver's side of the center pillar, or up tothe maximum pressure shown on thetire sidewall, whichever is less.Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120km/h) when your car is equipped withsnow tires.

Maintenance

426

LUBRICANTRecommended lubricants To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance anddurability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correctlubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results inimproved fuel economy.Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available.Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fueleconomy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to over-come engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult tomeasure in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offersignificant cost and energy savings.

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in yourvehicle.

Recommended SAE viscosity number

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economyand cold weather operating (starting and oil flow). Lower viscos-ity engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weath-er performance, however, higher viscosity engine oils arerequired for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using oils ofany viscosity other than those recommended could result inengine damage.When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature yourvehicle will be operated in before the next oil change. Proceed toselect the recommended oil viscosity from the chart.

CAUTIONAlways be sure to clean the area around any filler plug,drain plug, or dipstick before checking or draining anylubricant. This is especially important in dusty or sandyareas and when the vehicle is used on unpaved roads.Cleaning the plug and dipstick areas will prevent dirt andgrit from entering the engine and other mechanisms thatcould be damaged.

*¹ Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers.

Lubricant Classification

API Service SJ, SL or above,

ILSAC GF-3 or above

Automatic transaxle fluid DIAMOND ATF SP-III or SK ATF SP-III

Power steering fluid PSF-III

Brake fluid FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

Engine oil *¹

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Temperature

Engine Oil *1

°C(°F)

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscositygrade SAE 5W-20, 5W-30 (API SJ, SL / ILSAC GF-3). However, if the engineoil is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil using the engineoil viscosity chart.

10W-30

5W-20, 5W-30

6 43

Maintenance

APPEARANCE CAREExterior care Exterior general caution It is very important to follow the labeldirections when using any chemicalcleaner or polish. Read all warning andcaution statements that appear on thelabel.

Finish maintenanceWashing To help protect your vehicle’s finish fromrust and deterioration, wash it thoroughlyand frequently at least once a month withlukewarm or cold water.If you use your vehicle for off-road driv-ing, you should wash it after each off-road trip. Pay special attention to theremoval of any accumulation of salt, dirt,mud, and other foreign materials. Makesure the drain holes in the lower edges ofthe doors and rocker panels are keptclear and clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,industrial pollution and similar depositscan damage your vehicle’s finish if notremoved immediately.Even prompt washing with plain watermay not completely remove all thesedeposits. A mild soap, safe for use onpainted surfaces, may be used.After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Donot allow soap to dry on the finish.

WARNING - Wet brakesAfter washing the vehicle, test thebrakes while driving slowly to see ifthey have been affected by water. Ifbraking performance is impaired,dry the brakes by applying themlightly while maintaining a slow for-ward speed.

CAUTIONDo not use strong soap, chemicaldetergents or hot water, and do notwash the vehicle in direct sunlightor when the body of the vehicle iswarm.

CAUTION• Water washing in the engine com-

partment may cause the failure ofelectrical circuits located in theengine compartment.

• Never allow water or other liquidsto come in contact with electri-cal/electronic components insidethe vehicle as this may damagethem.

Maintenance

446

WaxingWax the vehicle when water will nolonger bead on the paint.Always wash and dry the vehicle beforewaxing. Use a good quality liquid orpaste wax, and follow the manufacturer’sinstructions. Wax all metal trim to protectit and to maintain its luster.Removing oil, tar, and similar materialswith a spot remover will usually strip thewax from the finish. Be sure to re-waxthese areas even if the rest of the vehicledoes not yet need waxing.

Finish damage repair Deep scratches or stone chips in thepainted surface must be repairedpromptly. Exposed metal will quickly rustand may develop into a major repairexpense.

✽✽ NOTICEIf your vehicle is damaged and requiresany metal repair or replacement, be surethe body shop applies anti-corrosionmaterials to the parts repaired orreplaced.

Bright-metal maintenance• To remove road tar and insects, use a

tar remover, not a scraper or othersharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of bright-metalparts from corrosion, apply a coating ofwax or chrome preservative and rub toa high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastalareas, cover the bright metal parts witha heavier coating of wax or preserva-tive. If necessary, coat the parts withnon-corrosive petroleum jelly or otherprotective compound.

Underbody maintenanceCorrosive materials used for ice andsnow removal and dust control may col-lect on the underbody. If these materialsare not removed, accelerated rusting canoccur on underbody parts such as thefuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaustsystem, even though they have beentreated with rust protection.Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbodyand wheel openings with lukewarm orcold water once a month at the end ofeach winter. Pay special attention tothese areas because it is difficult to seeall the mud and dirt. It will do more harmthan good to wet down the road grimewithout removing it. The lower edges ofdoors, rocker panels, and frame mem-bers have drain holes that should not beallowed to clog with dirt; trapped water inthese areas can cause rusting.

CAUTION• Wiping dust or dirt off the body

with a dry cloth will scratch thefinish.

• Do not use steel wool, abrasivecleaners, or strong detergentscontaining highly alkaline orcaustic agents on chrome-platedor anodized aluminum parts. Thismay result in damage to the pro-tective coating and cause discol-oration or paint deterioration.

WARNINGAfter washing the vehicle, test thebrakes while driving slowly to see ifthey have been affected by water. Ifbraking performance is impaired,dry the brakes by applying themlightly while maintaining a slow for-ward speed.

6 45

Maintenance

Aluminum wheel maintenance The aluminum wheels are coated with aclear protective finish.• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol-

ishing compound, solvent, or wirebrushes on aluminum wheels. Theymay scratch or damage the finish.

• Use only a mild soap or neutral deter-gent, and rinse thoroughly with water.Also, be sure to clean the wheels afterdriving on salted roads. This helps pre-vent corrosion.

• Avoid washing the wheels with high-speed car wash brushes.

• Do not use any acid detergent. It maydamage and corrode the aluminumwheels coated with a clear protectivefinish.

Interior care Interior general precautions Prevent caustic solutions such as per-fume and cosmetic oil from contactingthe dashboard because they may causedamage or discoloration. If they do con-tact the dashboard, wipe them off imme-diately. See the instructions that follow forthe proper way to clean vinyl.

Cleaning the upholstery and interiortrim Vinyl Remove dust and loose dirt from vinylwith a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Fabric Remove dust and loose dirt from fabricwith a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.Clean with a mild soap solution recom-mended for upholstery or carpets.Remove fresh spots immediately with afabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do notreceive immediate attention, the fabriccan be stained and its color can beaffected. Also, its fire-resistant propertiescan be reduced if the material is notproperly maintained.

CAUTIONNever allow water or other liquidsto come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside thevehicle as this may damage them.

CAUTIONUsing anything but recommendedcleaners and procedures may affectthe fabric’s appearance and fire-resistant properties.

Maintenance

466

Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt web-bing Clean the belt webbing with any mildsoap solution recommended for cleaningupholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc-tions provided with the soap. Do notbleach or re-dye the webbing becausethis may weaken it.

Cleaning the interior window glass If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi-cle become fogged (that is, covered withan oily, greasy or waxy film), they shouldbe cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow thedirections on the glass cleaner container.

The emission control system of yourvehicle is covered by a written limitedwarranty. Please see the warranty infor-mation contained in the Warranty &Consumer Information Manual in yourvehicle.

Vehicle modifications This vehicle should not be modified.Modification of your Kia could affect itsperformance, safety or durability andmay even violate governmental safetyand emissions regulations.In addition, damage or performanceproblems resulting from any modificationmay not be covered under warranty.

Engine exhaust gas precautions(carbon monoxide) • Carbon monoxide can be present with

other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if yousmell exhaust fumes of any kind insideyour vehicle, have it inspected andrepaired immediately. If you ever sus-pect exhaust fumes are coming intoyour vehicle, drive it only with all thewindows fully open. Have your vehiclechecked and repaired immediately.

• Do not operate the engine in confinedor closed areas (such as garages) anymore than what is necessary to movethe vehicle in or out of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in anopen area for more than a short timewith the engine running, adjust theventilation system (as needed) to drawoutside air into the vehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi-cle for any extended time with theengine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails to start,excessive attempts to re-start theengine may cause damage to theemission control system.

CAUTIONDo not scrape or scratch the insideof the rear window. This may resultin damage to the rear windowdefroster grid.

WARNING - ExhaustEngine exhaust gases contain car-bon monoxide (CO). Though color-less and odorless, it is dangerousand could be lethal if inhaled.Follow the instructions following toavoid CO poisoning.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

6 47

Maintenance

Operating precautions for catalyt-ic converters

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalyticconverter emission control device.Therefore, the following precautionsmust be observed:• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gaso-

line engine.• Do not operate the vehicle when there

are signs of engine malfunction, suchas misfire or a noticeable loss of per-formance.

• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.Examples of misuse are coasting withthe ignition off and descending steepgrades in gear with the ignition off.

• Do not operate the engine at high idlespeed for extended periods (5 minutesor more).

• Do not modify or tamper with any partof the engine or emission control sys-tem. All inspections and adjustmentsmust be made by an authorized Kiadealer.

• Avoid driving with a very low fuel level.If you run out of gasoline, it couldcause the engine to misfire and resultin excessive loading of the catalyticconverter.

Failure to observe these precautionscould result in damage to the catalyticconverter and to your vehicle.Additionally, such actions could void yourwarranties.

WARNING - FireA hot exhaust system can igniteflammable items under your vehi-cle. Do not park the vehicle over ornear flammable objects, such asgrass, vegetation, paper, leaves,etc.

7

Dimensions / 7-2Bulb wattage / 7-2Tires / 7-3Capacities / 7-3

Specifications

Specifications

27

Item mm (in)

Overall length 5130 (202.0)

Overall width 1985 (78.1)*1 / 1940 (76.4)

Overall height 1815 (71.5)*2 / 1760 (69.3)

Front tread 1685 (66.3)

Rear tread 1685 (66.3)

Wheelbase 3020 (118.9)

DIMENSIONS

*1 With door handle *2 With roof rack

Light Bulb WattageHeadlights (Low) 55Headlights (High) 55Front turn signal/Position lights 28/8 (Amber)Side mark lights 5Front fog lights 35Stop and tail lights 27/8Rear turn signal lights 27 (Amber)Back-up lights 16High mounted stop light LED *1

License plate lights 5Front map lamps 10Center dome lamps 10Tailgate lamp 10Door courtesy lamps 5Glove box lamp 5Vanity mirror lamps 3

BULB WATTAGE

*1 LED : Light-emitting diode

7 3

Specifications

Inflation pressure

kPa (psi)

Front Rear

225/70R16 6.5J×16 240 240

235/60R17 6.5J×17 (35) (35)

T135/90R17 4.0T×17420 420

(60) (60)

Full size tire

Compactspare tire

Wheel lug nut torque kg•m

(N•m, lb•ft)

9~11

(88~107, 65~79)

TIRES

ItemTire

sizeWheel size

CAPACITIESLubricant Volume Classification

5.6 l (5.9 US qt.)

Automatic transaxle fluid 10.9 l (11.5 US qt.) DIAMOND ATF SP-III, SK ATF SP-III

Power steering 1.0 l (1.06 US qt.) PSF-III

Coolant 8.6 l (9.1 US qt.) Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator

Brake fluid0.7~0.8 l

FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4(0.7~0.8 US qt.)

Fuel 80 l (21 US gal.) -

Engine oil *1

(with filter change)

API Service SJ, SL or above, ILSAC GF-3 or above(SAE 5W-20)

*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the page 6-42.

8Index

Index

28

Air bags-advanced restraint system·······························3-77Air cleaner ·····································································6-13Air conditioner air filter·················································6-17Antenna········································································3-179Appearance care·····························································6-43Audio remote control···················································3-179Audio system ·······························································3-180Automatic climate control system ·······························3-147Automatic transaxle················································4-5, 6-13

Back warning system·····················································4-22Battery············································································6-28Before driving··································································4-2Brake system··································································4-14Brakes ············································································6-15Bulb wattage ····································································7-2

Capacities·········································································7-3Child restraint system ····················································3-70Cruise control system ····················································4-11

Defroster ······································································3-134Dimensions ······································································7-2

Door locks······································································3-11Driver position memory system ····································3-56

Economical operation ···················································4-25Electronic stability control·············································4-19Emergency starting ··························································5-2Emission control system················································6-46Engine compartment························································6-9Engine coolant ·······························································6-11Engine oil·······································································6-10

Fuel filler lid ··································································3-30Fuel requirements ····························································1-2Fuses ··············································································6-20

Gauges ·········································································3-108

Hazard warning flasher ···············································3-135Homelink® wireless control system····························3-165 Hood···············································································3-29Horn ·············································································3-133How to use this manual ···················································1-2

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

8 3

Index

If the engine overheats ···················································5-5If you have a flat tire ·····················································5-10Immobilizer system ·························································3-9Instrument cluster ························································3-107Instrument panel overview ··············································2-3Interior features····························································3-173Interior lights ·······························································3-123Interior overview ·····························································2-2

Key positions ···································································4-3Keys ·················································································3-3

Label information ··························································4-35Lighting········································································3-127Lubricant········································································6-42Lubricants and fluids ·····················································6-16Luggage net holder ······················································3-163

Maintenance schedule······················································6-3Maintenance services·······················································6-2Manual climate control system····································3-136Mirrors ·········································································3-102

Overloading ···································································4-34Owner maintenance ·························································6-7

Power adjustable pedals·················································3-57Power sliding door and power tailgate ··························3-17Power steering ·······························································6-17

Rear seat entertainment system ···································3-210Remote keyless entry·······················································3-4Road warning···································································5-2Roof rack ·····································································3-164

Safety belts·····································································3-58Seat·················································································3-37Special driving conditions ·············································4-26Starting the engine ···························································4-4Steering wheel······························································3-100Storage compartment ···················································3-169Sunroof···········································································3-33

Theft-alarm system ··························································3-7

I

K

L

M

O

P

R

S

T

Index

48

Tires ·················································································7-3Tires and wheels ····························································6-30Tires pressure monitoring system (tpms) ························5-6Towing ···········································································5-19Trailer towing ································································4-28Trip computer·······························································3-111

Vehicle break-in process ··················································1-3

Warnings and indicators···············································3-117Window··········································································3-26Windshield defrosting and defogging··························3-160 Winter driving································································4-28Wiper blades ··································································6-18Wipers and washers ·····················································3-130

V

W

Documents

kia, the c...kia, t t he c c ompany Congratulations! Your selection of a Kia was a wise investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure. Now that you are the owner of a Kia